title page 1952

Code No: 1952 ر ر رمز رمز رمز رمز

مقر ر ال

مق

ر ر ال

مق

ر ر ال

مق

١٩۵٢ : : : : ال

Unit No: 1-9 :وحداتل

وحدات: ا

ل

وحدات: ا

ل

وحدات: ا

ل

٩۔١ا

QURANIC ARABIC

ةغ

لل

ا

عربية

ال

رانية

ق

ال

BS Islamic Studies

DR. ABDUL HAMEED KHAN ABBASI

قسم القرآن و التفس��

و اللغة العر�یة ةسلامی لیة الدراسات الإ

قبال المفتوحة اسلام آباد إجامعة العلامة

ii

� � � � � � � � ��

��

��

�� 5000��!��"

��# ��$��%&

�� '� (��)

��б�+

�!�, ��- ��./ ��01%&23�4��5��6/7��

�ن ا� ��

�

ا��د ا�م �ر� ��

�� او� ا�ل ��

iv

COURSE TEAM

1. Chairman Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi

Dean Faculty of Arabic & Islamic Studies

Allama Iqbal Open University, Islamabad.

2. Author Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi

3. Reviewer 1. Prof. Dr. Sami ul Haq

Ex-Chairman Deptt of Tafseer & Uloom Ul Quran

International Islamic University, Islamabad.

2. Dr. Shahnaz Zaheer

Incharge Department of Arabic, AIOU

3. Dr. Abdul Majeed Bagdadi

Assistant Professor Deptt of Arabic, AIOU

4. Mr. Shakeel Ahmed

Lecturer Deptt of Arabic, AIOU

4. Course Coordinator Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi

5. Editor Fazal Karim

v

Table of Contents

S. No. The Contents ت�محتول

Page No ا

1.Forward

viii

2.Course Introduction

ix

3. Objectives of The Course xiii

4. Acknowledgement xiv

5. Unit NO. 01 The Nouns (1) اء سم لا

لي: ا

لا

ا

وحدۃ

ل

28-01 )1( ا

6. The Noun and its kinds 1.1 سم

لااعه ا 2

02 وا

7. The Number of Nouns 1.2 اء سم 16 عدد الا

8. The Gender 1.3 سن

23 الج

9. Questions 1.4 سئل

لا

ا

28 ة

10. Unit No.02.The Nouns (2) )اء سم لا

انية: ا

ث

ال

وحدۃ

ل

64-29 )2ا

11. The Kinds of Pronoun (1) 2.1

اع 2مائر (ا

ض

ل

30 )1ا

12. The Kinds of Pronoun (2) 2.2 ) مائر

ضل

ا

اع 2

40 )2ا


الا

63 ة

14. Unit No.03.The Nouns (3) ) اء سم لا

: ا

الثة

الث

وحدۃ

ل

88-65 )3ا

15. The Adjective Compound 3.1 ب مرك

ل

ا Cوصي

ت

66 ال

16. The Adjective Compound 3.2 ضافي

ب الا

مرك

ل

ا 78

17. Questions 3.3 ةسئل

لا

ا 88

18. Unit No.04-The Nouns (4) )اء سم لا

الرابعة: ا

وحدۃ

ل

)4ا 89-126

19. The Demonstrative Composite/Phrase 4.1 ب مرك

ل

ا

ارى

ش

90 الا

20. The Genitive/Prepositional Composite 4.2

ارى

ب الج مرك

ل

99 ا

21. The Addadi/Numeral Composite (1) 4.3 )

عددىب ال

مرك

ل

101 )1ا

22. The Addadi/Numeral Composite (2) 4.4 )

عددىب ال

مرك

ل

116 )2ا


لا

ا

125 ة

24. Unit No.05-The Nouns (5) )اء سم لا

:ا

لخامسة

ا

وحدۃ

ل

160-127 )5ا

vi

25. Parts of the Nominal Sentence 5.1 جزاءة ا

مل

لج

ية ا سم

128 الا

26. The I’raab of the Noun 5.2 سم

140 اعراب الا

27. The I’raab of the Noun 5.3 عراب و البناء

لا 150 ا

28. The Declinable and the Indeclinable 5.4 مبنىمعرب و ال

ل

152 ا


لا

ا

159 ة

30. Unit No.06: The Tenses (1) الس وحدۃ

ل

س اد ا

( ة

عال

ف

لا

172-161 )1: ا

31. Definition of the Past Tense 6.1 ماضىفعل ال

عريف ال

164 ت

32. Kinds of the Past Tense 6.2 ماضىفعل ال

سام ال

ق

164 ا


لا

ا

172 ة

34. Unit No.07: The Tenses (2) :

ابعة س ال

وحدۃ

ل

(ا

عال

ف

لا

208-173 )2ا

35. The Present Tense 7.1

مضارع ال

فعل

ل

176 ا

36. Kinds of the Present Tense 7.2 مضارعفعل ال

سام ال

ق

176 ا

37. The Other Kinds (Forms) of Present Tense (1) 7.3 خرىمضارع الا

فعل ال

ال

اع 2

181 ا

38. he Other Kinds (Forms) of the Present Tense (2) 7.4 )خرى مضارع الا

فعل ال

ال

اع 2

194 )2ا

39. Questions 7.5 ةسئل

لا

206 ا

40. Unit No.08: The Tenses (3) )

عالف

لا

: ا

امنة

الث

وحدۃ

ل

252-209 )3ا

41. The Imperative 8.1

مر فعل 210 الا

42. The Negative Imperative 8.2 ى النه

222 فعل

43. Active Participle 8.3 اعل

ف 229 اسم ال

44. The Passive Participle 8.4 عول اسم

مف 229 ال

45. The Verbal Sentence 8.5

فعلية ال

ة

مل

لج

240 ا


لا

ا

251 ة

47. Unit No.09: The Letters الت

وحدۃ

ل

ع اس ا

ة

روف

لح

293-253 : ا

48. The Letters 9.1

روف

لح 254 ا

49. The Lunar and the Solar Letters and the

Preposition

9.2

روف

والح

ةمري

ق

ال

روف

لح

ا

الجارة

روف

و الح

ة

مسي

لش

ا

256

vii

50. The Prepositions 9.3 الجارة

روف

لح

257 ا

51. The Arabic Words other than The Preposition 9.4 ارة

روف الج

ير الح غ

عربية

ال

اظ

لف

لا

268 ا

52. The Six Particles Similar to a Verb 9.5 فعل jل

تة الس

ة مشبه

ال

روف

لح

282 ا

53. The Interrogative 9.6 هام

ستف

دوات الا 284 ا


لا

ا

291 ة

viii

��

��

�� ! �� "�� #$ � ��

$�� % &�� %�% �� '��

(�� ) �� ! ��

"�� * &�� +��% ��% �� ,�� -�� )��

�� % &�� ) �� (��

�� .�� %

&�� ) �� ) ��

��/� �� (��! ��

�� 0�� % &�� ) (�� ! ��

�� ! �� "��

�� % ��!� � (�� )� � ��)� �� ) ��

�� ) �� "��

� �� !% � ��! �� ! ��

"�� &�� (�� ! �� !%

+��% ��% 1�� +��% ��% 1�� +��% ��% 1�� +��% ��% 1�� 2222"�!!��"�!!��"�!!��"�!!��

3�� 3�� 3�� 3�� 4

ix

COURSE INTRODUCTION

All Praises are for Allah. We praise Him and seek His assistance. May the Salah and Salam be

upon the messenger of Allah ( انه و تعاليn) and all those who follow the prophetic path until the

Last Day. Amma ba’d:

Arabic Language is the language in which Allah ( انه و تعاليn) revealed Al-Quran Al-Hakeem to

Muhammad صلى الله عليه وسلم for the guidance of all mankind. Allah ( انه و تعاليn) preferred this blessed

language, as He states in the Quran.

﴿ �� ﴾ 56789:4;<=;4>

“Verily We have sent it down as an Arabic Quran; in order that you may gain understanding

(you may learn wisdom)”

﴿ �� ! �� "# �� $�% �� & �� ﴾84?@A4567BC4<;D>

“An Arabic Quran, without any crookedness, so that they may have Piousness (Taqwa)”

﴿ �� '�� "( �� ) �� *�� +,�- ./��0﴾84E4567F=4<B>

“A book, where of the verses are explained in detail as an Arabic Quran for people who

know”1.

For those who do not know the language of Al-Quran Al-Hakim, they will be deprived of true

sweetness of its blessings and most importantly, understanding of the words of Allah ( 12 �� 3 )��456).

The contemporary status of the Muslim Ummah is not much satisfactory. The majority has lost the

connection with Al-Quran Al-Hakeem because the language has been lost, as the Last prophet of

Allah, Muhammad صلى الله عليه وسلم said: “Allah raises up peoples by this book, and puts down by it others” (Sahih

Muslim). We have abandoned this book, and the Prophet Muhammad ( صلى الله عليه وسلم) will testify to Allah

:on the Day of Judgment (سبحانه و تعالی )

﴿ ��7 8�9 �� +/ �: �� ;� �6 �� 7 �;� � �37 �:� �< �! �9 �� 7 7 �= 1�> 73 �= �?﴾84GHIA4567BJ4<;K>

“And the Messenger ( صلى الله عليه وسلم) will say, O my Lord, indeed my people deserted this Quran” ۔

It is the duty of every Muslim to devote some time on daily basis for the study of Al-Quran,

which contains true guidance for achieving the success in this life and in the eternal life

Hereafter. In Islam, every Muslim has the following obligations towards Al-Quran Al-Hakeem:

1. to believe in the Quran

2. to read and recite it daily

3. to understand its commandments

4. to act upon its teachings and

5. to convey its teachings to others.

1 See Al-Quran, 20:113, 41:44, 42:7, 43:3.

x

It’s not possible to perform these obligations of Al-Quran without knowing and learning its

language. But today, most of the Muslims recite Al-Quran without understanding it. They offer

Salat, reciting passages in Arabic without understanding the meanings. Everyone should start

to learn the language of Al-Quran with the following rules:

1. To purify intention.

2. To seek the guidance and help from Allah ( انه و تعاليn) alone through supplications such as:

Éb>u‘” ÷yu� õ° $# ’Í< “Í‘ ô‰|¹ ∩⊄∈∪ ÷� Åc£o„ uρ þ’Í< “Ì� øΒr& “∩⊄∉∪

“O my Lord! Expand for me my chest (grant me self confidence, contentment, and

boldness). And ease my task for me” (20:25, 26).

3. To remove the idea from mind that learning of Arabic is difficult.

4. To understand the objective of learning Arabic only for understanding the teachings

of Al-Quran Al-Hakim.

5. To repent and refrain from committing sins.

If you desire to cope with these attributes, consciously, then you must start to read

and study this Quranic Arabic book.

The main objective of this book is to enable the students of BS Islamic Studies and

the other sincere brothers and sisters in Islam who want to learn Quranic Arabic with

basic grammar to understand Al-Quran Al-Hakeem and the Sunnah of the last Prophet

Muhammad (صلى الله عليه وسلم).

This Course book "Quranic Arabic Consists of the following three parts:

1. Unit No 1 to 5, is about noun and its Kinds ( و سم لا ا

ه اع 2 ا )

1.1- Definition of the noun ( سم .(تـعريف الإ

1.2- Signs of the noun ( سم .(علامات الإ

1.3- Different kinds of noun like: the definite (proper) noun ( اسم المعرفة), Indefinite

(common) noun ( اسم النكرة).

1.4- The active noun (اسم الفاعل).

1.5- The passive noun اسم المفعول 1.6- The Instrument noun اسم الآلة 1.7- The comparative noun ( يل اسم التـفض ).

1.8- The Exaggeration noun ( اسم المبالغة).

1.9- The Relative noun ( الملكية اسم ).

1.10- The noun of place and time ( اسم المكان والزمان).

1.11- The number of nouns ( سم عدد الإ ): Singular ( واحد), Dual ( تـثنية), plural ( جمع).

xi

1.12- The Gender ( الجنس): The Masculine gender ( الجنس المذكر) and the feminine

gender ( الجنس المؤنث)

1.13- The Pronouns and its kinds (اعها 2مائرو ا

ض

ل

like : The detached and attached (ا

pronouns ( فصلة والمتصلة the ,(ضمائر الملكية ) the Possessive pronouns ,(الضمائر المنـ

demonstrative pronouns ( الإشارة ضمائر ), the Interrogative pronouns

ستـفهام ) ) the reflexive pronouns ,(ضمائر الا نعكاسية ا لضمائر الا ) and the objective

pronouns ( ضمائر المفعول به).

1.14- The Adjective and Relative compound ( اضافی المركب التـوصيفى وال ).

1.15- The Demonstrative composite ( ارى المركب الإش ).

1.16- The genitive / Prepositional composite ( المركب الجارى).

1.17- The numeral composite ( المركب العددى).

1.18- The nominal sentence ( ية .(الجملة الإسم

1.19- The I'raab of the noun ( إعراب الإسم).

1.20- The declinable and the Indeclinable ( المعرب و المبنى).

2. Unite No. 6 to 8 is about verb/Tense and its different forms

(

علف

ل

مخ ا

ل

زq و صورە ا

ل

تل / ا

ة

ف ):

2.1- The Active past tense ( رف المع الفعل الماضى ).

2.2- The passive past tense ( الفعل الماضى المجهول).

2.3- The Near Past Tense ( الفعل الماضى القريب).

2.4- The Distant Past Tense ( الفعل الماضى البعيد).

2.5- The Negative Past Tense ( الفعل الماضى المنفى).

2.6- The past continuous Tense ( الفعل الماضى الجارى).

2.7- The present tense - Active voice ( الفعل المضارع المعروف).

2.8- The Present Tense - Passive voice ( ل الفعل المضارع المجهو ).

2.9- The Other kinds of present tense ( الفعل المضارع الأخرى انـواع ).2.10- The Imperative verb ( فعل الأمر).

2.11- The Negative Imperative ( فعل النـهى).

2.12- The Active participle( اسم الفاعل)

xii

2.13- The Passive participle ( اسم المفعول).

2.14- The verbal sentence ( الجملة الفعلية).

3. Unit No. 9 is about the letters and its kinds ( ا ا ا ا

لح

لح

لح

و و و و ر ر ر ر لح

ف

ف

ف

و و و و ف

ا ا ا ا

ق ق قها ها ها ها ام ام ام ام س س س س ق ).

3.1- The Lunar Letters ( الحروف القمرية).

3.2- The solar Letters ( الحروف الشمسية).

3.3- The Prepositional Letters ( الجارة روف الح ).

3.4- The Arabic words other then the preposition ( العربية غير الحروف الجارة ) الحروف ( الألفاظ ).

3.5- The Six Particles similar to a verb ( تة [لفعل .(الحروف المشبـهة الس

3.6- The Interrogative words ( ستفهام ادوات الإ ).

Therefore, students of BS Islamic Studies and the other respectable readers are

requested to give suggestions for more improvement of this book. Their valuable

suggestions will be acknowledged and incorporated in the upcoming edition.

In the end, I pray that my this endeavor may offer benefits to everyone (Ameen).

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi

Dean Faculty of Arabic & Islamic

Studies, AIOU, Islamabad.

xiii

OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE

Dear Student’s with the help and the grace of Allah Almighty, when you

complete the study of 09 unites of this courses book completely and

thoroughly, you will achieve easily the following objectives and In’Shah’Allah

you will be able:

1. To know the noun and its different kinds (

ة

مختلفل

عه ا 2

سم وا

لا

mentioned above (ا

under the title of course introduction.

2. To know the verb/tense and its different forms ( q و ز

ل

/ ا

فعل

ل

ا

ة

مختلف

ل

سامه ا

ق

( ا

mentioned above in the 2nd part of course Introduction.

3. To know the letters and its different shapes (

ة

مختلفل

وصور ھا ا

روف

لح

described (ا

above in 3rd part of course Introduction.

xiv

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

All thanks to the Almighty Allah for his kindness and blessing to enable me to accomplish this

book “Quranic Arabic” which is the most important source for understanding of Al-Quran Al-

Majeed. My special and sincere thanks to my parents with whom prayers I achieved, I am

achieving, and I will achieve unforgettable and unbelievable successes in my life.

I am highly thankful to all my teachers especially those who taught me at B.A. (Hons) Usul-

ud-Din and M.A. Usul-ud-Din levels in IIU, Islamabad from 1981 to 1991. In fact, my present

position and my work are result of their efforts and prayers.

Here, I wish to express my affectionate gratitude to my beloved teacher, late Maw’lana

Professor Abdullah Kakakhil whose prayers and precious advices play an important role in

my academic and research work. May Allah rest his soul in peace.

I would like to extend my thanks to unit’s reviewers and course Editor Mr.Fazal Karim and

supporting staff of Department of Quran & Tafseer, especially Mr. Muhammad Waseem,

Mr. Assad Iqbal, Mr. Irfan Qaiser, Mr. Saeed Ahmad and those who have helped directly and

indirectly for providing co-operation and peaceful environment to complete this work.

At the end I would like to thank especially Prof. Dr. Zia-ul-Qayyum Vice Chancellor Allama

Iqbal Open University Islamabad Pakistan for forward of this book.

It is my request to the respectable readers to give suggestions for making this book more

fruitful. In’sha Allah their suggestions will be honored and adjusted in the next edition.

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi

Dean Faculty of Arabic & Islamic Studies

Allama Iqbal Open University, Islamabd.

1

الا

وحدۃ

اء وال سم

� � � � �� لي:الاUnit No.01.The Nouns(1)

شعور.أفكار و و ماكن، أ و أشياء، و أشخاص، ر ك هى الكلمات التى نستخدمها لذ الأسماء

Nouns are words which we use to name people, things, places, ideas

(freedom, honesty, truth, etc.) and feelings (happiness, anger, joy, boredom, etc.).

ا ۔ 1.1

ه اع ) ا و سم لا

The Noun and its Kinds

ا د د ع ۔ 1.2 اء سم لا

The Number of Nouns

ا ۔ 1.3

س ن لجThe Gender

�مید خان عبا�� دکتور لالأستاذ ا : إ عداد�عبد ا

شکیل احمد: راجعالم

Written by: Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Reviewed by: Mr. Shakeel Ahmad

2

اعه ۔1.1 (سم وا الا

(The Noun and its kinds)

(2) (1)

سم (The definition of Noun)تـعريف الإسم (The Signs of Nouns)علامات الإ

is "ة" مربـوطة at the end of the noun, e.g.

و جنة شجرة

Noun can take

on كسر6ن or كسرة

the last letter, e.g.

فى كتاب، فى الكتاب

حرف الجر May precede a

noun, e.g.

الكتاب فى

May ال

precede a noun, e.g.

الكتاب

Noun accepts

at the تـنوين

end, e.g.

كتاب

أسماء الأشياء

The names of things

أسماء الأماكن The names of places

أسماء الأشخاص The names of

persons

(3)

انـواع الإسم المختلفة

اسم المبالغة The Exaggeration

Noun

يل اسم التـفض The Comparative

Noun

اسم الآلة The Instrument

Noun

اسم المفعول The Passive

Noun=(object)

اسم الفاعلThe Active

Noun=(subject)

اسم النكرة The Common

Noun

اسم المعرفة The Definite

Noun/Proper Noun

النكرة انـواع The kinds of

Common Noun

انـواع المعرفة The kinds of Definite

Noun

اسم الصفة The Adjective

Noun

النكرة The Common Noun, e.g. جبل

الضمائر The

Pronouns

اسم العلم The Proper

Noun

التـعريف حرف "ال"

Definite particle

3

Introduction to the First part of Unit No.01

The first part of Unit No. 01 of Quranic Arabic, which you are going to start, is about

noun and its kinds ( سم و أنـواعه :It covers the following aspects of the noun .(الا

1. The definition of noun ( سم .(تـعريف الإ2. The signs of noun ( سم .(علامات الإ

3. The kinds of noun ( سم اقسام الإ ).

Objective of the First Part of Unit No.01

The objectives of this first part of unit No.01 is to build the confidence within yourself,

and enable to assist you to easily understand the following:

1. to define the noun.

2. to explain the three types of nouns in the definition of noun:

(i) The names of persons ( أسماء الأشخاص). (ii) The names of places ( أسماء الأماكن). (iii) The names of things ( أسماء الأشياء).

3. to describe the signs of noun ( سم .(علامات الإ

4. to elaborate the kinds of noun ( انـواع الإسم)

4

الإسم وأنـواعه ۔1.1The Noun and its Types

الإسم ف تـعري .1 (The Definition of Noun)

Noun is the name of persons, places or things. It does not need the help of another word

to explain its meaning1 e.g. [

i. اص خ ش لأا اء سم أ (The Names of Persons)

د ي رش Rasheed ر ي ـذ ن Nazeer

م ي ل ك Kaleem احمد Ahmad

V Nasiraصرة Maryam مريم

يد Basheer بشير Hameed حم

Saaleha صالحة V Nadiaدية

ii. ن اك الأم اء سم أ (The Names of Places)

\ ز ي ال م Malaysia ] ان ت س ك Pakistan

ير م ش ك Kashmir اتر ل نج إ England

اي ان م ل أ Germany اق ي ـر ف أ Africa

اك ي ر م أ America ج ان ن ي ـب انك ن ي ـب / Penang

اس ن ر ف ـ France دآ[ م لا س إ Islamabad

iii. اء ي ش الأ اء سم أ (The names of things)

س ر ف ـ Horse ان ص ح Horse

Hand يد Ear اذن

س أر ل ا The head ين ع ل ا The eye

س د Fan مروحة سة /دبـو ة [ Stapler

طة و ف ـ Towel بـلة قـن ـ Bomb

(The Signs of Noun) علامات الإسم .2

In Arabic there are five signs by which an ism (noun) is known:

1 In other words we can say that a noun does not dependent on any other word in indicating its meaning and does

not have any of the three tenses (past, present and future).

5

2.1. The first sign is that the اسم (noun) accepts تنوين at the end e.g., صراط (a path), كتاب (a

book), كرسى (a chair), etc.

2.2. The second sign is that “ ال” (alif and lam) may precede the noun (ism) e.g., الكتاب (the

book), الجامعة (the university), البـيت (the house), etc.

2.3. The third sign is that ر الج حروف (particles of jarr preposition) may precede the ism e.g. فى

الكتاب فى ,(in the house) البـيت (in the book), الأرض على (on the earth) etc.

2.4. The fourth sign is that the ism (noun) can take الجر (kasrah/kasrataan) on the last letter

e.g. فى غرفة (in a room), .etc ,(towards the sky) إلى السماء ,(in the pocket) فى الجيب

2.5. The fifth sign is that ة“ مربـوطة” is at the end of the noun e.g., جنة (a garden), كلمة (a word,

a speech), شجرة (a tree), etc.

Note:

i. These five signs cannot function for the verbs for particles/latter. So, they are specific to

the noun.

ii. These five signs can be used to distinguish between the أسماء (nouns), افـعال (verbs) and

.(particles) حروف

(The Different Kinds of Noun) أنـواع الإسم المختلفة .3

In Arabic language, there are different kinds of noun:

(The Definite Noun) اسم المعرفة .3.1 / Proper Noun

المعرفة تـعريف (The Definition of Definite Noun)

A definite noun can be defined as name of a specific person, a place or a thing

( أو مكان أو شىء اسم يدل على شخص معين ) e.g. محمد (Muhammad), أحمد (Ahmad), المكة(Makkah), بيروت (Beirut), الأسود الحجر (The black stone), etc.

(The Types of Definite Noun) أنـواع المعرفة

There are eight kinds of اسم المعرفة (the definite noun):

i. حرف التـعريف -ال (Al-Definite Particle)

The definite particle ال is prefixed to a noun (an ism) which is نكرة (indefinite), and

changes it to become معرفة (definite), and also causes the تـنوين (tanween) at the end to be

6

dropped2. The definite particle ال (al) corresponds to the English “the”, e.g.,

ا طبيب هذ (This is a doctor). الطبيب جالس (The doctor is sitting), etc.

In the definite article ال (al) the ا (a) is known as همزة الوصل (the connecting Hamzah). If

it is not preceded by a word it will be pronounced with the vowel marking _ فـتحة(fathah). If it is preceded by a word, it is dropped in pronunciation, though remains in

writing, e.g. واقف الطالب جالس والمدرس (The student is sitting and the teacher is standing).

When indefinite noun ( نكرة اسم ) begins with a “sun letter” ( حرف شمسى), this letter ( حرف)

assimilates (joins) itself with the ل (lam) of the article in pronunciation, though the ل(lam) remains in writing. Thus, the assimilating (joining) letter takes Shadd (doubled),

such as الطالب in the above example.

There are 14 sun/solar letters ( ت، ث، د، ذ، ر، ز، س، ش، ص، ض، ط، ظ، ل، ن)3.ii. العلم اسم (The Proper Noun)

A proper noun is the name of a specific person, a thing or a place, e.g. يد ,(Hameed) حم

.(Madinah) مديـنة ,(Al-Quran) القرآن

The Proper nouns can include the names of countries, people, states, tribes, rivers oceans, mountains etc.

The proper nouns ( العلم) take the cases similar to the ordinary nouns, i.e.

a) Double Dhamma ( تان (حالة رفعية ) when in nominative case (ضم

b) Double Fatha ( ان فـتحت ) when in accusative case ( حالة نصبية)

c) Double Kasra ( كسر6ن) when in genitive case ( حالة جرية).

However, the proper nouns which are diptotes ( غير منصرف/ الممنـوعة من الصرف) follow the

rules of diptotes4. Some examples for this rule

.Ahmad is brave أحمد شجاع

البحر الأحمر ء فاطمة على شاطى Fatima is at the shore of the Red Sea.

مسحت الحجر الأسود I rubbed the black stone.

شربت الماء الزمزم I drank the Zamzam water.

2 In other words we can say that one way of making a noun definite is to prefix the definite article ال (al) to it and

to omit its nunation ( تـنوين), e.g. الكتاب= ال+كتاب (The book), الرجل= ال+رجل (The man)3 See 1st part of Unit No.09 of this book for sun/solar and moon/lunar letters, page No. 258 4 See 3rd part of Unit No 05 ( الإ عراب و البناء)

7

iii. فصلة الضمائر المنـ (The Detached Pronouns)

All the following detached pronouns are definite proper nouns ( معرفة اسم ):

ع جم PLURAL

نى ث م /ة ي ن ث ت ـ DUAL

د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم They (all)

هماThey

هو He

ب ائ غ ر ك ذ م 3rd person (m)5

هن They (all)

هماThey

هى She

ب ائ غ ث ن ؤ م 3rd person (f) 6

انـتم You (all)

أنـتما(Both of) You

انت You

ر اض ح ر ك ذ م 2nd person (m)

انتن You (all)


أنت You

ر اض ح ث ن ؤ م 2nd person (f)

نحن We

نحن We

Vأ I

متكلم1st person (m) & (f)

iv. شارة الأسماء الإ (The Demonstrative Pronouns)

All the following demonstrative pronouns for both near and far (distance)

( شارة ضمائر الإ للبعيد و للقريب ) are definite nouns ( المعرفة اسم ):

1. Demonstrative Pronouns for Near Distance ( شارة أسماء /ضمائر للقريب الإ ). [[

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هؤلاء All these (m)

هذان/ هذين These two (m)

هذاThis

ر ك ذ م (m)

هؤلاء All these (f)

ها6ن/ هاتين These two (f)

هذه This

ث ن ؤ م (f)

2. Demonstrative pronouns for far distance ( شارة أسماء/ضمائر للبعيد الإ ):

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ئك أول All those (m)

ذانك Those two (m)

ذلك That

ر ك ذ م

ئك أول All those (f)

نك 6 Those two (f)

تلك That

ث ن ؤ م

5 m = masculine. 6 f = feminine.

8

v. الموصولة الأسماء (The Relative pronouns)

All the following relative pronouns are definite nouns ( المعرفة اسم ): [[

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

الذين Those

للذان ا Who/Whom

الذى Who/ Whom

ر ك ذ م

اللاتى/اللائى Those/Which

اللتان Who/Whom

التى Who/Whom

ث ن ؤ م

vi. The Definite with annexation ( ضافة معرف @لإ ), e.g.

Muhammad’s book كتاب محمد

Student’s book كتاب الطالب

This book كتاب هذا

In these three examples, the indefinite noun كتاب has become a definite noun.

( معرفة اسم ).

vii. Vocative Noun ( المنادى اسم the one being called)

The vocative noun (اسم المنادى) is one kind of the definite noun. The particle

\ (O!) is used to call somebody. The person who is called is the اسم (ism-noun) which

comes after this particle is known as المنادى (the one being called). And the person who

calls is known as منادىال , for example:

\عباس : أحمد (Ahmad: O Abbas). This sentence has three parts:

.(caller) منادى He is : أحمد .1

2. \: It is particle of calling ( داء ن حرف ).

عباس .3 : is المنادى (the one being called).

المنادىاشكال (The Types of Al-Munada)

a. المفرد العلم! \ محمد، \ احمد، \ رشيد.... : In this type of المنادى, somebody is called by his

name i.e., O Muhammad! , O Ahmad! , O Rashid! and so on.

b. ذ \استا : somebody is called ,(المنادى) noun \ رجل In this type of vocation :النكرة المقصودة

as a particular or specific person i.e., O Teacher! O Man! and so on.

c. ,.i.e (Mudhaaf) مضاف In this kind the one being called is : المضاف: \ عبد الله \ بنت خالد

O Abdullah! O daughter of Khalid! and so on.

9

Note: It is important to note that the first and the second types of منادى and is one

ب منصو will be (Mudhaaf) مضاف not tanween. As for the third type, the (dhamma) ضمة (take fatha فـتحة on the last letter).

(The Indefinite/ Common Noun) اسم النكرة .3.2

(The Definition of Indefinite Noun) تـعريف النكرة

.النكرة: اسم يدل على شحض، أو مكان أو شىء غير معينAn indefinite noun can be defined as “name of nonspecific person, place or thing, e.g.,

can be any (a house) بـيت ,can be any room (a room) غرفة ,can be any man (a man) رجل

house, شاعر (a poet) can be any poet, كتاب (a book) can be any book, etc.

(The Kinds of Indefinite Noun) أنـواع النكرة

There are many types of indefinite nouns. Among all of them, the following two are

widely used:

i. Common ( النكرة) The name of any species, e.g. جبل (a mountain).

Nunation ( تـنوين) as Indefinite Form

Nouns and adjectives are generally indicated as indefinite forms ( النكرةan-nakiratu), by doubling the final vowel sign as pronouncing them with a final /….n/.

The final vowel itself does not, however, become long inspite of the double vowel sign.

This process of making a noun or adjective indefinite is called تـنوين (tanwinun) in Arabic

and nunation in English. The indefinite forms of three different cases are:

a. Nominative Indefinite: The word ends with a double dammah ( تان .(a king) ملك ,.e.g (ضم

b. Accusative Indefinite: The word ends with double fathah ( فـتحتان) and often an extra alif

.a king (malikan) ملكا ,.which is not pronounced as a long vowel e.g (ا)

c. Genitive Indefinite: The word ends with double kasrah ( كسر6ن) e.g., ملك (malikin) a

king, of a king.

10

ii. The Adjective Noun ( الصفة اسم )

An adjective noun is that which qualifies a noun or which indicates qualities or attributes of other nouns. In some cases, after the second alphabet of the root word, one of the vowel

.is added as follows ا or و ، ى

حروف اصلية Root Word

لصفة اسم ا Adjective Noun

English

ف ش+ر+ف=شر Good شريف

Dignified وقـور و+ق+ر=وقـر

ع ش+ج+ع= شج Brave شجاع

Following forms are also used

as measures of adjective: فـعل Difficult صعب

Beautiful حسن فـعل

Hard صلب فـعل

Very happy فرح فعل

Beneficent رحمان فـعلان

Tall طويل فعيل

فعيل Short قصير

فعيل Killed قتيل

Very unjust ظلوم فـعول

فـعول Very ignorant جهول

فـعول Very lazy كسول

Ignorant جاهل فاعل

Most learned عالم فاعل

Famous مشهور مفعول

مفعول Preserved, Protected محفوط

Adjective which denotes colour, appearances or bodily defects have three measures:

فـعل أ فـعلاء فـعل 7 حمر أ حمراء حمر (red)

عل أومونث علی وزن فـعلاء أف ـ وزن علی المذکر وصف لکل جمع الوزن ذاهعنی إن ي ۔۔۔و خمراءفـعل لنحوأحمد ۔ 7

11

سود أ سوداء سود (black)

يض ب (white) أبـيض بـيضاء

صم أ صمياء صم صمم)أ ) (dumb) ىعم أ عمياء عمى (blind)

Use of adjective nouns in daily usage sentences:

.This boy is tired هذا الولد تـعبان

بان تلك البنت غض That girl is angry.

ذه الشجرة خضراء فى الصيف ه This tree is green in summer.

.The rose is red الورد احمر اللون

.My friend is wealthy/ rich صديقى كثير المال

3.3. Varieties of Nouns other than Definite and Indefinite Nouns:

سم غير اسم المعرفة والنكرة ) (أنـواع الإ1. Inflexible Noun ( جامد اسم )

و غير مأخوذ من غيره (أى أنه وضع على صورته الحالية ابتداء فليس له أصل يرجع إليه ا 8هو اسم متصرف يـتفرع منه).

It is a noun that has been not derived from an infinitive, e.g., فيل (an elephant), فـرس (a

horse), جبل (a mountain), ةرأ م (a woman), شجرة (a tree), قـلم (a pen), سد أ (a lion), ذكاء (intelligent), حكمة (wisdom), etc.

2. Verbal Noun ( مصدر اسم )

حروف فعله لفظا و تـقديرا بدون تـعويض.اسم مصدر: لفظ يدل على معنى المصدر و يـنقص عن

Verbal noun is a noun that has been derived from an infinitive and from which other

words are derived, e.g.

ل قـت (To murder) - Infinitive

Verb - (He murdered) قـتل

، ويجمع م اسم 8 و ينسب إليه: جبل، جبلان، جبال، جبـيل، جبلى، وهو نوعان: تصرف: اسم يثنى . أى أنه وضع على صورته الحالية ابتداء فليس له أصل يرجع إليه او يـتفرع منه اسم جامد غير ماخوذ من غيره. الف. ، أصل يـرجع إليه و يـتـفرغ منه. ه ير غ من وذ خ أ اسم مشتق م ب.

12

Derived subject - (Murderer) قاتل

ول مقت ـ (One who is murdered) - Derived object

3. Active Noun - Subject ( فاعل اسم )

This noun is derived from the root word by adding (ا) الف after the first alphabet and

marking the sign (كسرة ) ـ on the central alphabet, e.g., صرV (one who helps --helper),

.etc9 ,(killer) قاتل ,(writer) كاتب ,(one who opens -- opener) فاتح

4. Passive Noun - Object ( مفعول اسم )

This noun is derived from the root word by prefixing “ م” and inserting “ا” between the

second and third letter. The central alphabet is marked with the sign (ضمة ) ـ, e.g., منصور(one who is helped), مفتـوح (that is opened), مقتـول (one who is killed)10.

5. Instrument Noun ( آلة اسم )

على أداة العمل وهو قسمان: مشتق وجامد: اسم متصرف يدل هو The Instrument Noun denotes or indicates the names of working instruments ( أداة العمل). There are three forms of this noun:

i. محرث = مفعل (a plough), root word: ر، ث ،ح ث حر = .

ii. مفتاح= مفعال (a key), root word: ح فـتح= ف، ت ، .

iii. مروحة = مفعلة (a fan), root words: ح ، و روح= ر ، .

6. Comparative Noun ( يل تـفض اسم )

6.1. It is a noun that is used for comparing things. It is derived from the root word فـعل. The

word فعيل means one who has the capacity to work. The forms فـعل أ (masculine) and ی فـعل(feminine) show comparative capacity of doing more work, following examples throw

more light:

Noun Comparative Masculine

Comparative Feminine

Plural

(short) صغير (shorter) أصغر ی صغر (shorter) صغر 11(great, big) كبير (greater, bigger) أكبر ی بر ك (greater, bigger) كبر

9 See unit no.7, part 2 اسم الفاعل and .for detail اسم المفعول 10 See unit no.7, part 2 for more detail.

علي نحو ۔ 11 جمع لاسم G وزن ف

عل

صغر جمعه اصاغر اکبر جمعه اكاLف

بر و ابری G ک

ک

13

(hard) صعب صعب أ (harder) (harder) صعبى صعب عالى ) عال ( (high) (higher) أعلى

6.2. Generally, the comparative form is indefinite نكرة and the superlative form is definite

.e.g ,معرفة

i. بشير أحمد أعلم من (Ahmad is more learned than Basheer.)

ii. يد هو أكبر من حم (He is bigger or greater than Hameed.) من is used for than.

iii. ل الطالب الأفض (The best student.)

Superlative is expressed as under:

a. هو الاطول (He is the tallest.)

b. د أعلم الناس .(Muhammad is the most learned of the people) محم

6.3. When the second and the third radicals are the same, the forms of elective are: Noun Comparative

masculine Comparative

feminine Plural

(Strong) شديد (stronger) اشد شدد شدى(few/ little) قليل (more little)أقل قـلل قـلى

6.4. Two irregular elective (adjective of superiority) are خير (better, best) and شر (worst).

They are used as:

.I am better than him أV خير منه

خير الناس هو He is the best among mankind.

.He is worse than that هذا شر من ذلك

ةبري ال ئك هم شر أول They are the worst of creatures (98:6).

6.5 Adjectives which denote colors or bodily defects have their elatives (adjective of

superiority) by prefixing اشد to their nouns which come in the accusative form, e.g.

سود أ (black) سوادا شد أ (More black)

(red) أحمر حمرة شد أ (More red)

Use of elatives (adjectives of superiority) in daily usage sentences:

كبر منى أنت أ You are bigger than me.

؟أين الجامعة الكبرى Where is the biggest university?

ö≅ è% öΝ çFΡr&u ãΝ n= ôãr& ÏΘr& ª! $# Say, “do you know more or is it Allah (who knows better)?”

.Glorification of my sustainer who is the Highest سبحان ربى الأعلى

14

شد بـياضا من الماء أ اللبن The milk is whiter than the water.

.This is better than that هذا خير من ذلك

ها البارحة .Today the wind is more violent than yesterday الريح اليـوم اشد منـ

ة لوقتهاأفضل الأعمال الصلو The best of deed is prayer (establishment of salat) with in its time.

فع الن اس خير الناس من يـنـ The best man is he who serves mankind.

.The best of the believers is one who has best manners افضل المؤمنين احسنـهم خلقا

.They are the worst of mankind أولئك هم شر الناس

شجع من ذلك أ هو He is bolder than that.

ضل هو الرجل الأف He is the best man.

كبر أ ا Allah is the greatest (of all).

.The best man is he who has the best manners خير الناس احسنـهم خلقا

?Is milk more useful than water هل اللبن انـفع من الماء؟

.She is very beautiful هى حسناء

.They are white women هن بيض

7. Exaggeration Noun ( غة مبال اسم )

It is a noun that is used to express an excess of some qualities. The following terms of the

root words فـعل are used for the exaggeration noun ( مبالغة اسم ):

Terms of the Root Word- فـعل Exaggeration Noun English

Very cautious حذر فعل

Very merciful رحيم فعيل

Heavy eater أكول فـعول

Very learned علام فـعال

Very elderly كبار فـعال

يق فعيل Very truthful صد

Great bestower منـعام مفعال

Very poor مسكين مفعيل

Very peculiar عجاب فـعال

Great differentiator فاروق فاعول

Established one قـنـوم فـعول

15

Very holy قدوس فـعول

One who finds excuses قـلب فـعل

8. Relative Noun المنسوب اسم When “ ى” is suffixed to certain nouns, the derived word conveys the sense of belonging, e.g.

الدولة اسم The Name of Country

Relative Noun English

Belonging to Arabic عربى عرب

Belonging to India هندى هند

Belonging to Pakistan [كستانى [كستان

Belonging to Kashmir كشميرى كشمير

Belonging to China الصينى الصين

Belonging to Iraq العراقى العراق

Belonging to Japan \[نى \[ن

ماليز\ Belonging to Malaysia ماليزى

9. The Noun of Place and Time ( اسم المكان والزمان) It is based on the same pattern as ism al-maful, i.e., مفعل e.g.

.(Museum) متحف, يـتحف, أتحف .1

, يـفتح, فـتح مفتح .2 (Opening).

.(Helping) منصر, يـنصر, نصر .3

.(Sitting) مجلس, يجلس, جلس .4

Exceptions to the Rules مشرق , ق , يشر مشرق .5 (East).

مغربب, , يـغر مغرب .6 (West).

.(Mosque) مسجد, يسجد, سجد .7

16

اء ۔ عدد 1.2 سمالا

The Number of Nouns

واحد تـثنية جمع (Plural) (Dual) (Singular)

جمع سالم جمع تكسير (Broken Plural) (Sound Plural)

جمع المذکرالسالم جمع المونث السالم (The Sound Feminine Plural) (The Sound Masculine Plural)

17

Introduction to the 2nd part of Unit No.01

The 2nd part of this unit is about number of nouns. In Arabic language, there are three

numbers:

,The singular number denotes only one thing .(plural) جمع and (dual) تـثنية ,(singular) واحد

the dual (two things) and the plural number denotes more than two things.

The plural number has two kinds: sound and broken plural ( جمع سالم و جمع مكسر).

The sound plural is divided into two kinds: masculine sound plural and feminine sound

plural ( سالم مؤنث سالم وجمع جمع مذكر ).

There is a difference between sound plural and broken plural:

In sound plural ( سالم جمع ) alphabets ( حروف) of the singular noun/word remain in the same

order e.g., مسلمون ,مسلمان ,مسلم, etc.

In broken plural ( جمع مكسر), alphabets and vowels of the singular noun do not remain in

the same order e.g., كتب، كتاب، اوراق، ورق, etc.

Objectives of the 2nd part of Unit No.01 With the help and the grace of Allah ( ی سبحانه و تعال ), when you complete the study of this

part of unit no.01, you will achieve its objectives and will be able:

1. to know the three kinds of noun with respect to number, i.e., singular, dual and plural.

2. to know about the singular Arabic nouns/words.

3. to know about dual Arabic nouns/words.

4. to know the way of converting from singular noun to dual.

5. to know about plural and its two kinds: sound plural and broken plural.

6. to know about two kinds of sound plural: masculine sound plural and feminine sound

plural.

7. to know the Arabic nouns/word of masculine and feminine sound plural.

8. to know about the broken plural and its Arabic nouns.

18

عدد الأسماء ۔ 1.2 The Number of Nouns

In Arabic language, there are three kinds of noun with respect to number: واحد or مفرد(singular), تـثنية (dual), and جمع (plural):

(Singular) مفرد or واحد .1

It denotes one person, place or thing, e.g., حمد أ (Ahmad), بشير (Bashir), يد ,(Hameed) حم

كافر ,(a Muslim) مسلم ,(a Woman) امرأة ,(a Man) رجل ,(Malaysia) ماليز\ ,(Pakistan) [كستان (a disbeliever), صالح (a pious), اب كت (a book), ساعة (a watch), طالب (male student), يد (ahand), بـيت (a house), سيارة (a car), ابن (a son), ولد (a boy), ت بن , ابـنة (a daughter), طالبة(female student), ب] (a door), فذةV (a window), جبل (a mountain) etc.

(Dual) تـثنية .2

It denotes two persons, places or things, and ends in “ ن ا ” (aani) e.g., طالبان ، طالبـتان (two

students), نVدكا (two shops), لان ي سب ، طريـقان ،طريـقتان (two ways, paths), سجدان م (two

Mosques), جبلان (two mountains), بـلدان بلد6ن، (two countries), ان مديـنـت (two cities), ن يـتاقـر(two villages, towns), ساعتان (two watches), تان رجلان ,(two hands) يدان ,(two houses) بـيـ(two men), كتا[ن (two books), قـلمان (two pens), امرأ6ن (two women), سيار6ن (two cars),

نان اب ـ ,(two boys) ولدان (two sons), ، صالحا6ن صالحان (two men/women pious), مسلمتان مسلمان،

(two men/women Muslim), كافران ، كافر6ن (two disbelievers), درستان م (two schools), جامعتان (two

universities), غرفـتان (two rooms), etc.

Converting of Singular to Dual

The way of converting (forming) a dual from singular is by adding ـ ان (aini) for the

nominative ( الرفعية الحالة ) and ـ ين (aini) for the accusative ( النصبية الحالة ) or the genitive

( الجرية الحالة ), e.g.

Singular Dual Nominative Case Accusative & Singular Case

عين An eye

نان عيـTwo eyes

نين عيـTwo eyes

يد A hand

يدان Two hands

يدين Two hands

19

عالمة One learned woman

عالمتان Two learned women

عالمتين Two learned women

ملك A king

ملكان Two kings

ملكين Two kings

ملكة A queen

ملكتان Two queen

ملكتين Two queen

(Plural) جمع .3

It denotes more than two persons, places or things, ملوك (kings), بـلدان (countries), مدن (cities) مدارس (schools), ب طلا ،طالبات (students), جامعات (universities), اقلام (pens), رجال (men), نسوة نسآء ، (women), بـيـوت (houses), etc.

الجمع أنـواع (Kinds of the Plural)

There are two kinds of plural: سالم جمع (Sound plural) and مكسر جمع (Broken plural).

السالم الجمع .3.1 (The Sound Plural)

In sound plural, alphabets of the singular form remain in the same order. This kind of

plural is further divided into two:

i. السالم المذكر جمع (The Sound Masculine Plural)

ii. السالم المؤنث جمع (The Sound Feminine Plural)

i. السالم جمع المذكر (The Sound Masculine Plural)

It is formed from the singular ( واحد ) by adding ـ ون (una) to the nominative case ( الحالة) or to the genitive case ,(الحالة النصبية ) to the accusative case (ina) ـ ين ,(النصبية الجرية الحالة ), e.g.

Singular Plural Nominative Case Plural Accusative & genitive case

عالم A scholar

عالمون Scholars

ين عالم Scholars

مسلم A Muslim

مسلمون Muslims

ين مسلم Muslims

مؤمن A believer

مؤمنـون Believers

مؤمنين Believers

صالح A pious person

صالحون Pious

صالحين Pious

سارق A thief

سارقـون Thieves

رقين سا Thieves

20

ii. السالم المؤنث (The Sound Feminine Plural)

The feminine sound plural is made (formed) by the suffix ـ ات (atun) to the singular

after dropping the feminine ending ة -ة (tun-tu), e.g.

Singular (f.) Plural (f.) Singular (f.) Plural (f.)

سارقة A thief

سارقات Thieves

مسلمة A Muslim

مسلمات Muslims

زوجة Wife

زوجات Wives

كافرة Disbeliever

كافرات Disbelievers

ساعة Watch

ساعات Watches

مدرسة A teacher

مدرسات Teachers

صالحة A pious

صالحات Pious women

كلمة A word

كلمات Words

حافظة A protector

حافظات Protectors

طالبة A student

طالبات Students

﴿βÎ) šÏϑÎ= ó¡ßϑ ø9$# ÏM≈ yϑÎ= ó¡ßϑ ø9$#uρ š ÏΖÏΒ ÷σßϑø9$# uρ ÏM≈ oΨÏΒ÷σ ßϑø9 $#uρ tÏG ÏΖ≈s) ø9$# uρ ÏM≈ tF ÏΖ≈s)ø9$# uρ t Ï%Ï‰≈¢Á9 $#uρ ÏM≈ s% Ï‰≈ ¢Á9$# uρ

tÎ�É9≈ ¢Á9 $#uρ ÏN≡ u�É9≈ ¢Á9$# uρ t ÏèÏ±≈y‚ ø9$# uρ ÏM≈ yèÏ±≈y‚ ø9$# uρ t Ï% Ïd‰ |Á tFßϑø9 $#uρ ÏM≈ s% Ïd‰|Á tF ßϑø9$# uρ t Ïϑ Í× ‾≈ ¢Á9$#uρ ÏM≈ yϑ Í× ‾≈¢Á9$#uρšÏà Ï�≈ptø: $#uρ öΝ ßγy_ρ ã� èù ÏM≈ sàÏ�≈ys ø9$# uρ šÌ� Å2≡ ©%! $#uρ ©! $# # Z�� ÏV x. ÏN≡t� Å2≡©%! $#uρ £‰tãr& ª! $# Μçλ m; Zοt� Ï�øó ¨Β # �� ô_ r& uρ $ Vϑ‹ Ïà tã﴾

(Indeed, the Muslim men and Muslim women, the believing men and believing women,

and obedient men and obedient women, the truthful men and truthful women, the patient

men and patient women, the humble men and humble women and men and women who

give charity, the fasting men and fasting women, the men who guard their private parts

and women who do so and the men who remember Allah often and the women who do

so for them Allah has prepared forgiveness and a great reward) (33:35).

Note: The plural of nouns which do not end in ة (tun) or ة (tu) are also made (formed) by adding

.(sky, heavens) سماوات، سماء to the singular as in ”ات “

21

Summary of Number, Singular, Dual and Sound Plural

MASCULINE FEMININE Active

فاعل Passive

مفعول Preposition

حرف Active

فاعل Passive

مفعول Preposition

حرف Singular مسلمة مسلمة مسلمة مسلم مسلما مسلم

Dual مسلمتين مسلمتان مسلمين مسلمان Plural مسلمات مسلمات مسلمين مسلمون

المكسر مع الج .2 (The broken plural)

In broken plural, the original form of the singular is changed by addition or removal of

alphabets, and by changing the signs associated with the original alphabets, e.g., رسول issingular, its plural is رسل, and رجل is singular, its plural is جال ر , or the change of vowels,

e.g., سد أ is singular and its plural is سد أ (lions). In Arabic, the broken plural is very widely

used, and has many patterns, e.g.

مفرد ، واحد Singular

مكسر جمع Broken Plural

واحد، مفرد Singular

مكسر جمع Broken Plural

رجل A man

رجال Men

قـلم A pen

أقلام Pens

كتاب A book

كتب Books

م نج A star

نجوم Stars

6جر A trader

تجار Traders

عين An eye

عيـون Eyes

منزلة A building

منازل Buildings

غنى A rich

عنياء أ Rich

شيطان A satan

شياطين Satans

فقير A poor

فقراء Poor

Note:

1. In Arabic language, some singulars have more than one broken plurals, e.g.

:is a singular noun, it has four plurals ,(a sea) بحر بحور، ابحار، بحار and ابحر (seas).

خاء، اخواة إ :is a singular word and its plurals are (a brother) أخ and إخوان (brothers).

22

2. It is quite common for a word/noun in Arabic to have, in some cases, both the sound

plural ( سالم جمع ) and broken plural ( مكسر جمع ), e.g., in the case of نبى (Prophet), its sound

plural is نبيـون and broken plural is انبياء. 3. Some words having different plurals convey different meanings, e.g.

(i) بـيت (a house): its plurals are two:

(a) بـيـوت (houses) (b) ابـيات (verses of poetry)

(ii) بد ع (slave): It has two plurals:

(a) عبيد (slaves) (b اد عب (servants, mean)

(iii) عين (eye) is a singular name, its plurals are:

(a) أعين (eyes) (b) عيـون (springs, fountains).

تمرين An exercise

تمارين Exercises

حديـقة A garden

حدائق Gardens

ظفر A nail

ظفار أ Nails

جار A neighbor

جيران Neighbors

عنق A neck

ق ان ع أ Necks

صندوق A box

صناديق Boxes

عقرب A scorpion

عقارب Scorpions

صنم An idol

أصنام Idols

مطبخ A kitchen

طابخ م Kitchens

ثـوب Cloth

ثـياب Cloths

23

نس 1.3

۔ الج The Gender

(2) (1)

الجنس المؤنث الجنس المذكر (The Feminine Gender) (The Masculine Gender)

(1) (2)

الجنس المؤنث الحقيقى الجنس المؤنث غير الحقيقى The Unreal Feminine Gender The Real Feminine Gender

السمارعی الجنس المؤنث غير الحقيقى القياسى الجنس المؤنث غير الحقيقى The Unreal Irregular The Unreal Formal Feminine Gender Feminine Gender

24

Introduction to the 3rd part of Unit No.01

The 3rd part of this unit is about the masculine gender and feminine gender. The feminine

gender is divided into two categories:

حقيقى مؤنث .1 (Real feminine).

مؤنث غير حقيقى .2 (Unreal feminine). This category has two kinds:

(i) مؤنث قـياسى (Formal feminine).

(ii) مؤنث سماعى (Irregular feminine).

Objectives of 3rd part of Unit No.01

With the help of Allah, when you complete this part of unit no one then you will be able:

1. to define the gender ( الجنس). 2. to know the two kinds of gender: masculine and feminine.

3. to know the examples of masculine and feminine gender.

4. to know about real and unreal feminine gender ( مؤنث حقيقى وغير حقيقى) and its example.

5. to know about the two kinds of unreal feminine gender: مؤنث قياسى and مؤنث سماعى.

6. to know about the formal feminine and its examples.

7. to know about the irregular feminine and its examples.

25

الجنس ۔1.3The Gender

Gender is used to differentiate between male and female. For a noun it is used to

differentiate whether it is a masculine or feminine noun. In the Arabic grammar (like

some other languages), with respect to gender, the noun is divided into the following two

types/kinds.

الجنس المذكر .1 (The Masculine Gender)

The nouns related to the male sex are مذكر (masculine), e.g., رجل (a man), اب (a father),

.(a dog) كلب ,(a donkey) حمار ,(a boy) ولد ,(a camel) جمل ,(a son) ابن

Some nouns have ta “ة” ending but they are used as masculine ( ر ك ذ م ), e.g., علامة (learned),

فة ,(a male name) اسامة ه طرف ,(caliph) خليـ (name of An Arabic poet).

Some parts of body (single) are also considered masculine ( مذكر), e.g., رأس (a head), ن س(a tooth), بطن (a belly), صدر (a chest), etc.

Some nouns are considered masculine gender by form, e.g., جدار (a wall), كتاب (a book),

,(a canal) «ر ,(a chair) كرسى ,(a house) بـيت ,(a mosque) مسجد ,(a path) صراط ,(a pen) قـلم

.(a door) [ب

الجنس المؤنث .2 (The Feminine Gender)

The nouns related to the female sex are مؤنث (feminine). The feminine gender has two

basic kinds: real and unreal.

i. المؤنث الحقيقى (The Real Feminine)

The real feminine is the female living being that has its equivalent male living beings. In

other words, the noun which has the concept of pair i.e., male and female. The male is

called masculine and female is called حقيقى مؤنث (real feminine), e.g. م أ (a mother), امرأة(a woman), بـقرة (a cow), قةV (a female camel), بنت (a daughter), ابـنة (a daughter), أخت(a sister), etc.

26

ii. المؤنث غير الحقيقى (The Unreal Feminine)

The nouns which do not have the concept pair, i.e., male and female are called “unreal

feminine”, e.g., أرض (earth), شجرة (tree), غرفة (room) etc.

The unreal feminine, according to the Arabic grammar, is classified into two categories:

قـياسى مؤنث and سماعى مؤنث .

(a) المؤنث القياسى (The Formal Feminine)

The words/ nouns which are neither masculine nor feminine in reality are called formal

feminine ( قـياسى مؤنث ). The general way of identification of gender (masculine and

feminine) for such nouns/ words is that the words which end without the following

feminine signs ( التأنيث علامات ) are called formal feminine ( قياسى مؤنث ):

a. مربـوطة -ة (round ta), e.g., ساعة (watch), ة مدرس (school), مروحة (fan), شجرة (tree), سيارة (car),

ة ,(nation) أمة ,(wisdom) حكمة ,(life) حياة ,(garden) جنة (sign) آية ,(room) غرفة ,(Mecca) مك

مظلة ، شمسية (umbrella), ممسحة (duster), سبـورة (black-board), فذةV (window), كراسة (note-

book), طاولة ، منضدة (table), etc.

b. مقصورة الف (short alif): The nouns ending in “ ى“ ,”ى” called " مقصورة الف" e.g., ی كبر(great), ی صغر (small), ی حسن (good, beautiful), ی بشر (good news), ی اخر (other).

c. ممدودة الف (lengthened alif): The nouns/words ending in " آء" or “آء” called “ ممدودة الف ”,

e.g., صحرآء (desert), ضراء (harm), بـيضآء (white), ضرآءح (green), رقآء ز (blue) etc.

Note: It may also be understood that feminine gender ( مؤنث جنس ) is often formed from the

masculine by suffixing “ة”, e.g.

(M.) Word (F.) Word English Tralsntaion

(M.) Word (F.) Word English Translation

Many كثيرة كثير Muslim مسلمة مسلم

Teacher معلمة معلم Disbeliever كافرة كافر

Teacher مدرسة مدرس Truthful صادقة صادق

س Pious صالحة صالح سة مهند Engineer مهند

Lecturer محاضرة محاضر Student طالبة طالب

27

ماعى المؤنث الس .2 (The Irregular Feminine)

According to the Arabic Grammar, though some nouns are called “irregular feminine”,

because they have neither concept of pair (i.e., male and female), nor have they “ة” (ta)

ending (a sign of feminine), yet they are feminine by usage, e.g.

a. Some natural and artificial things: سماء (sky), حرب (battle, war), شمس (sun), رV (fire), جهنم(hell), ريح (wind), خمر (wine), نـفس (soul, self person), دار (house), بئـر (well), كأس (cup),

رض أ (earth), سبيل (path), \رؤ (dream).

b. Proper names of countries and towns are feminine by significance, e.g., مصر (Egypt),

كستان [ ,(Lahore) لاهور ,(Washington) واشنطن ,(Iraq) العراق (Pakistan), فريـقاأ (Africa), مريكاأ(America), كشمير (Kashmir), etc.

c. The parts of the body which are in pair, e.g., يد (hand), عين (eye), اذن (ear), قدم (foot),

.(cheek) خد ,(shin) ساق ,(leg) رجل

d. All Arabic letters of alphabet are considered as feminine.

e. Some collective nouns, e.g., قـوم (people) رهط (tribe), are used as feminine. However, ل أه(family), آل (progeny) are feminine, some broken plural are treated as feminine, e.g.,

.(the messengers) الرسل ,(the Jews) اليـهود

f. Some nouns are used as masculine as well as feminine, e.g., سحاب (clouds), بـقر (cattle),

.(trees) شجر ,(bees) نحل ,(gold) ذهب ,(locust) جراد

28

QUESTIONS

ةسئل

الاAnswer the following Questions: تية ة الا

سئل

جب e الا :ا

ها إلى شياء ]لعربية ثم تـرجم ماكن والأ ر م ثالين لكل من أسم اءالأشخاص والأ ف الإ سم وأذك 1- عر

الإ نج ليزية

ـ

ــ

ـ

ـ

ـ

ــ ـ

ـ

ـ

2 ما هي علا مات الا سم ؟ 3 ما هي أنـواع الا سم ؟

ا ـ ر أنـواع ه فة ثم أذك ف المعر 4 عرف اسم الع لم ] لإ نج ل ي ز ية ـ 5 عر

6 ما هي الضمائر المنـفصلة ؟ اـ تب أنـواع ه ف اسم النكرة ثم اك 7 عر

ف اسم الصفة ] لإ نج ل ي ز ية 8 عرفة والنكرة 9 ما هي أنـواع الإ سم غير اسم المعر

اء ؟ 10 ـ ما هي عد د الأسممع ؟ 11- ما هي أنـواع الج

ر أنواعه نس وأذك ف الج 12 عرنس المؤنث ؟ 13 - ما هي أنـواع الج14 ما المراد ] لمؤنث الس ماع ى ؟

29

اوحدۃ

ال

ال

ي ان ث

اء :ة سم

) 2(الا)2( Unit No.02.The Nouns

مائر ۔ 2.1

ضاع و ال اه ا)

The Pronouns and its Kinds

۔ 2.2مائر ا

ض

ال

اع ()1 (

The Kinds of Pronoun (1)

۔ 2.3مائر(ا

ض

ال

اع (2 (


�مید خان عبا�� الأستاذ الدکتور : إ عداد�عبد ا

ش(ناز ظ()' الدکتور :مراجع

Written by: Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Reviewed by: Dr. Shahnaz Zaheer

30

۔2.1

اع مائر ا)

ض ال

Kinds of the Pronouns

فصلة الضمائر المتصلة الضمائر المنـ (The Attached Pronouns) The Detached Pronouns

فصلة الضمائر المنـ The Detached Pronouns

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم They

هماThey/Both of them

هو He

ب ائ غ ر ك ذ م 3rd person (m.)

هن They


هى She

ب ائ غ ث ن ؤ م 3rd person (f.)



نت أ You

ر اض ح ر ك ذ م 2nd person (m.)

انتن You (all)


أنت You

ر اض ح ث ن ؤ م 2nd person (f.)

نحن We

نحن We

Vأ I

م ل ك ت م 1st person (m.) & (f.)

31

Introduction to the first part of Unit No.02 The first part of this Unit, which you are going to study, consists of the detached pronouns

in Arabic language. ( فصلة فى اللغة العربية :These pronouns are 14 in number .(الضمائر المنـ

، أنت، أنـتما، أنـتم، أنت ، أنـتما، أنتن، أV، نحن هو، هما، هم، هى، هما، هن This part of Unit No.02 covers four aspects of these detached pronouns:

1. Their conjugations/inflections.

2. Their examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.

3. Their examples from sentences of daily usage.

4. Their usage with different kinds of verbs: past ( ماضى), present ( مضارع), imperative ( أمر), active participle ( اسم الفاعل) and passive participle (اسم المفعول).

Objectives of 1st part of Unit No.02

With the help and Taufiq (conciliation) of Allah Taalah, as you start and complete the

study of the 1st part of this unit no.02, which is about the detached pronouns ( الضمائر:you will then discover that you have the ability (المنـفصلة

1. to conjugate the detached pronouns

2. to give examples of these pronouns

3. to use them in sentences of daily usage

4. to use them with past tense, present tense ( مضارع), imperative verbs active and passive

participle (اسم الفاعل و المفعول).

32

(Definition of the Pronoun) تـعريف الضمائر .2.1 الضمائر جمع و واحدها الضمير. وهو اللفظ الذى يستخدم فى محل اسم.

Plural pronoun has singular pronoun. It is a word which is used in place of a noun.

الضمير بدلا من الإسم عند ما نكون على علم مع من أو عن أى شىء نـتحدث.نستخدم A pronoun is used instead of the noun when it is clear who or what we are talking about,

e.g., ن ك الس /ة ام ق الإ ر ا د فى ن ك س ي و ب مجتهد ه حمد طال أ (Ahmad is a hardworking student. He

lives in the hostel). Here ضمير (pronoun) is هو (He).

��2.2 � � � أنـواع الضمائر (Kinds of the Pronoun)

There are eight kinds of Pronoun in the Arabic language:

فصلة .1 (The Detached Pronouns) الضمائر المنـ

(The Attached Pronouns) الضمائر المتصلة .2

(The Possessive Pronouns) ضمائر الملكية .3

(The Demonstrative Pronouns) ضمائر الإشارة .4

(The Relative Pronouns) ضمائر الوصل .5

ستـفهام .6 (The Interrogative Pronouns) ضمائر الا

نعكاسية .7 (The Reflexive Pronouns) الضمائر الا

(The Objective Pronouns) ضمائر المفعول به .8

33

فصلة 12(The Detached Pronouns) الضمائر المنـ

The term فص ة ل منـ (munfasila) comes from verb “ صل انـف ” which gives the meaning of

standing alone, separated, e.g. هو ,هما ,هم ,أنت ,انت , etc.

Conjugation of the Detached Pronoun

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم They


هو He

ب ائ غ ر ك ذ م 3rd person m.

هن They


هى She

ب ائ غ ث ن ؤ م 3rd person f.


أنـتماYou/Both of you

انت You

ر اض ح ر ك ذ م 2nd person m.

انتن You (all)

أنـتماYou/Both of you

أنت You

ر اض ح ث ن ؤ م 2nd person f.

نحن We

نحن We

Vأ I

م ل ك ت م 1st person m. & f.

Examples of the Detached Pronouns from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem

هو .1 (He): This pronoun is used 265 times in Al-Quran, e.g.

uθ èδ “Ï%©!$# šYn= y{ Ν ä3 s9 It is He who has created all of you (2:29).

uθ èδ ü“ Ï%©!$# tΑt“Ρ r& y7 ø‹n= tã |=≈tG Å3 ø9$# It is He who has sent down to you the book (3:7).

ö≅è% uθèδ ª! $# î‰ym r& Say (O! Muhammad صلى الله عليه وسلم) He is Allah, the one and only (112:1).

ö≅t/ uθ èδ ×β# uö� è% Ó‰‹ Åg ¤Χ Nay, this is a Glorious Quran (85:21).

هما .2 (Both of them): This pronoun is used only one time in Al-Quran, e.g.

øŒÎ) $yϑèδ †Îû Í‘$tóø9 $# Both of them were in the cave (9:40).

هم .3 (They): This pronoun is used 261 times in Al-Quran, e.g.

öΝ èδ Ü=≈ys ô¹r& Ïπ yϑ t↔ô±yϑ ø9$# They are the (unhappy) companions of the left hand

(90:19).

12 Detached Pronouns ( فصلة Personal) ضمائر شخصية /are also called Independent/ Disconnected/ Separated (الضمائر المنـ

Pronouns) and ضمائر الفاعل (Subjective Pronouns).

34

y7Í× ‾≈ s9'ρ é& ö/ãφ ç�ö� y{ Ïπ−ƒ Î�y9ø9 $# They are the best creature (98:7).

t Ï%©!$# öΝ èδ tã öΝ Íκ ÍEŸξ |¹ tβθèδ$y™ Those who are neglectful of their prayers (107:5).

“Ï% ©! $# ö/ãφ Ïµ‹ Ïù tβθà� Î= tGøƒèΧ About whom they cannot agree (78:3).

tÏ%©!$# öΝ èδ 4’ n?tã öΝÍκ ÍEŸξ |¹ tβθ ßϑÍ← !#yŠ Those who remain steadfast in their prayer (70:23).

÷β Î) öΛèε āωÎ) tβθ‘Ζ Ýàtƒ They merely conjecture (45:24).

هى .4 (She): This is used 47 times in Al-Quran, e.g.

íΟ≈n= y™ }‘Ïδ 4®Lym Æìn= ôÜtΒ Ì� ôf x�ø9$# Peace! This is until the rise of the morning (97:5).

¨βÎ* sù sπΨ pgø: $# }‘Ïδ 3“ uρ ù'yϑ ø9$# Verily, Then indeed Paradise will be (his) abode (79:41).

¨β Î* sù tΛÅspgø: $# }‘Ïδ 3“ uρ ù'yϑ ø9$# Hell-fire will be his home (79:39).

÷β Î) }‘Ïδ HωÎ) Ö !$oÿ ôœ r& !$ yδθßϑçG ø‹®ÿ xœ öΝ çFΡr& /ä.äτ !$t/# u uρ These are nothing but names which you have devised, you and your fathers (53:23).

(#θ ä9$s% uρ $ tΒ }‘Ïδ āωÎ) $uΖ è?$uŠ ym $ u‹÷Ρ‘‰9 $# ßNθßϑ tΡ $u‹øt wΥuρ And they say: What is there but our life in this world? We shall die and we shall live (45:24).

هن .5 (They all women): In Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, this pronoun is utilized 07 times, e.g.

£ èδ Ó¨$t6 Ï9 öΝ ä3 ©9 öΝçFΡr& uρ Ó¨$t6 Ï9 £ßγ©9 They are your garments and you are their garments (2:187).

£ èδ ‘Π é& É=≈tG Å3 ø9$# They are the foundation of the Book (3:7).

$Β �∅èδ óΟ ÎγÏF≈ yγΒé& They cannot be their mothers (58:2).

tΑ$s% ÉΘöθ s)≈tƒ Ï Iωàσ‾≈ yδ ’ÎA$uΖt/ £ èδ ã�yγôÛr& öΝ ä3 s9 He said: O my people! Here are my daughters: they are pure for you (if you marry!) (11:78).

÷β Î) u’ÎΤ yŠ# u‘r& ª! $# Ah�ÛØ Î/ ö≅ yδ £ èδ àM≈ x�Ï±≈x. ÿÍνÎh� àÑ ÷ρ r&’ ÎΤyŠ#u‘ r& >πyϑ ômt� Î/ ö≅yδ �∅ èδ àM≈s3 Å¡ôϑ ãΒ Ïµ ÏGuΗ ÷qu‘

If Allah intended me harm, and would they

remove His harm; or if He intended mercy for me,

would they withhold His mercy? (39:38).

أنت .6 (You): This pronoun is used 55 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, e.g.

ö� Ïj. x‹sù !$yϑ‾ΡÎ) |MΡr& Ö� Åe2x‹ãΒ So, remind them, [O Muhammad! (S.A.W.)] you are only one who reminds (88:21).

!$yϑ ‾ΡÎ) |MΡr& â‘É‹ΖãΒ tΒ $yγ9 t±øƒs† You [O Muhammad! (S.A.W.)] are only a warner for those who fear it (79:44).

!$oΨ−/u‘ ( y7 ¨ΡÎ) |MΡr& â“ƒ Í•yèø9$# ÞΟŠ Å3ptø:$# Our Lord! Verily, You, only You are All-Mighty, the All-wise (60:5).

¤Α uθtG sù öΝ åκ÷]tã !$yϑ sù |MΡr& 5Θθè= yϑÎ/ So, turn away, [(O Muhammad! (S.A.W.)] from them (Quraish pagans), you are not blame worthy (as you have conveyed Allah’s Message) (51:54).

35

!$tΒ uρ |MΡr& Ν Íκ ö�n=tã 9≅Š Ï.uθÎ/ And you [O Muhammad! (S.A.W.)] are not a Waki’l (guardian of their affairs) over them. (42:6)

أنـتما .7 (Both of you): This pronoun is used only once in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, e.g.

$ yϑçGΡr& ÇtΒ uρ $ yϑä3 yè t7?$# tβθç7 Î=≈tóø9$# You and those who follow you will be the pre dominant. (28:35)

أنـتم .8 (You all): In Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, this pronoun is used 86 times, e.g.

tΑ$s% ö≅yδ ΟçFΡr& tβθãèÎ=©Ü •Β (The speaker) said: will you look down. (37:54)

(#θä9$s% !$tΒ óΟ çFΡr& āωÎ) ×�|³o0 $oΨè= ÷WÏiΒ !$tΒuρ tΑt“Ρr&ß≈ oΗ÷q §�9$# ÏΒ > ó x« ÷βÎ) óΟ çFΡr& āωÎ) tβθç/ É‹õ3 x?

They (people of the town) said: “You are only human beings like ourselves and the Most Gracious (Allah) has revealed nothing. You are only telling lies. (36:15)

ö≅ t/ óΟ çFΡr& ×Πöθ s% šχθèùÍ� ô£•Β Nay, but you are a people transgressing all bounds. (36:19)

÷Λ äΡr& çµ÷Ζtã tβθàÊ Ì� ÷èãΒ From which you do turn away. (38:68)

Iωuρ óΟ çFΡr& tβρ ß‰Î7≈ tã !$ tΒ ß‰ç7 ôãr& Nor will you worship that which I worship. (109:3)

9. fا (I): It is used 66 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, e.g.

$ tΡr& ª!$# �Uu‘ š Ïϑn=≈ yèø9$# Verily, I am Allah, the Lord of the worlds. (28:30)

!$tΒuρ O$tΡr& āωÎ) Ö�ƒ É‹tΡ ×Î7•Β I am but a Warner open and clear. (46:9)

!$tΒ uρ O$ tΡr& 5Ο≈‾= sàÎ/ Ï‰‹Î7 yè ù=Ïj9 And I do not do the least injustice to My servants. (50:29)

tΑ$ s)sù O$ tΡr& ãΝ ä3 š/u‘ 4’ n?ôãF{ $# Saying, I am your Lord, the Most High. (79:24)

Iωuρ O$tΡr& Ó‰Î/% tæ $Β ÷Λ –n‰t6tã And I shall not worship that which you are worshipping (109:4).

نحن .10 (We): This pronoun is used 65 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, e.g.

ß øtwΥ $yγ≈oΨ ù=yèy_ Zοt� Ï. õ‹s? We have made it a memorial (of our handiwork). (56:73)

ö≅t/ ßøt wΥ tβθãΒρ ã� øt xΧ Indeed we are shutout (of the fruits of our labor). (68:27)

$tΒuρ ßøt wΥ tÏ%θç6 ó¡yϑ Î/ And we are not to be defeated (in our plan). (70:41)

$‾ΡÎ) ßøt wΥ $uΖø9“tΡ y7ø‹ n=tã tβ#u ö� à)ø9$# Wξƒ Í”∴s? It is We who have sent down the Quran to you in stages. (76:23)

ß øtªΥ öΝßγ≈oΨ ø) n=s{ It is We Who created them. (76:28)

36

Use of the Detached Pronouns with الفاعل اسم (The Active Participle)

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم مسلمون They are Muslims

هما مسلمان Both of them are Muslims

هو مسلم He is a Muslim


هن مسلمات They are Muslims

هما مسلمتان Both of them are Muslims

هى مسلمة She is a Muslim


أنـتم مسلمون All of you are Muslims

مسلمتان أنـتما Both of you are Muslims

أنت مسلم You are a Muslim


أنتن مسلمات All of you are Muslims

أنـتما مسلمتان Both of you are Muslims

أنت مسلمة You are a Muslim


نحن مسلمون نحن مسلمات

We are Muslims

نحن مسلمان نحن مسلمتان

We are Muslims

أV مسلم أV مسلمة

I am a Muslim


Conjugation of the Detached Pronoun with المفعول اسم (The Passive Participle)

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم منصورون They are helped

هما منصوران Both of them are helped

هو منصور He is helped


هن منصورات They are helped

هما منصور6ن Both of them are helped

هى منصورة She is helped


أنـتم منصورون All of you are helped

أنـتما منصوران Both of you are helped

ت منصور أن You are helped


أنتن منصورات All of you are helped

منصور6ن اأنـتم Both of you are helped

أنت منصورة You are helped


منصورون نحن نحن منصورات

We are helped

نحن منصوران نحن منصور6ن

We are helped

أV منصور أV منصورة

I am helped

م ل ك ت م 1st person m.

& f.

Use of Detached Pronouns with the Past Tense Verb “ فـعل”

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم فـعلواThey did

هما فـعلا Both of them did

هو فـعل He did


37

هن فـعلن They did

هما فـعلتاBoth of them did

هى فـعلت She did


أنـتم فـعلتم All of you did

أنـتما فـعلتماBoth of you did

أنت فـعلت You did


أنتن فـعلتن All of you did

أنـتمأ فـعلتماBoth of you did

فـعلت أنت You did


نحن فـعلناWe did

نحن فـعلناWe did

أV فـعلت I did


Use of Detached Pronouns with the Present Tense Aorist Verb “ يـفعل”

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم يـفعلون They do

They will do They are doing

هما يـفعلان Both of them do

Both of them will do Both of them are doing

هو يـفعل He does

He will do He is doing


هن يـفعلن They do

They will do They are doing

هما تـفعلان Both of them do

Both of them will do Both of them are doing

هى تـفعل She does

She will do She is doing


تـفعلون أنـتم All of you do

All of you will do All of you are doing

أنـتما تـفعلان Both of you do

Both of you will do Both of you are doing

أنت تـفعل You do

You will do You are doing


تـفعلن أنتن All of you do

All of you will do All of you are doing

أنـتمأ تـفعلان Both of you do

Both of you will do Both of you are doing

أنت تـفعلين You do

You will do You are doing


نحن نـفعل We do

We shall do We are doing

نحن نـفعل We do

We shall do We are doing

أV أفـعل I do

I shall do I am doing

م ل ك ت م 1st person mg. & f.g

Use of Detached Pronouns with Imperative Verb “ افـعل”

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

نـتم افـعلواأ (All 0f) You do

نـتما افـعلا أ (Both of) You do

نت افـعل أ You do

ر ك ذ م

38

انتن افـعلن (All of) You do

انـتما افـعلا (Both of) You do

أنت افـعلىYou do

ث ن ؤ م

Use of Detached Pronouns with Negative Verb “ لا تـفعل”

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

نـتم لا تـفعلواأ (All of) You do not do

نـتما لا تـفعلا أ (Both of) You do not do

تـفعل نت لا أ You do not do

ر ك ذ م

نتن لا تـفعلن أ (All of) You do not do

نـتما لا تـفعلا أ (Both of) You do not do

نت لا تـفعلىأ You do not do

ث ن ؤ م

Use of Detached Pronouns in Sentences of Daily Usage

هو .1 (He): هذا ضمير الغائب المفرد المذكر

.He plays football هو يـلعب كرة القدم

.He is a hero هو بطل

هى .2 (She): هذا ضمير الغائب المفرد المؤنث

.She plays football هى تـلعب كرة القدم

.She is a heroin هى بطلة

هن، هم، هما .3 (They): والعاقل هذه ضمائر جمع الغائبين المذكر و المؤنث و غير العاقل

.Both of them play football هما يـلعبان كرة القدم

يـلعبـون كرة القدم هم They (m) play football.

.They (f) play football هن يـلعبن كرة القدم

.Both of them are heroes هما بطلان

.They (m) are heroes هم أبطال

.They (f) are heroes هن بطلات

أنـتم، انـتما، أنت أنتن، أنت، .4 (You): ر و المؤنث هذه الضمائر عن المخاطب المفرد والجمع والمذك

.You (m) play football أنت تـلعب كرة القدم

نـتما تـلعبان كرة القدم أ Both of you play football.

نـتم تـلعبـون كرة القدم أ Both of you play football.

39

نت تـلعبين كرة القدم أ You (f) play football.

نتن تـلعبن كرة القدم أ All of you play football.

نت بطل أ You (m) are a hero.

نـتما بطلان أ Both of you are heroes.

.All of you are heroes أنـتم أبطال

نت بطلة أ You (f) are a heroin.

.Both of you are hero أنـتما بطلتان

.All of you are heroes أنتن بطلات

5. Vأ (I): ر و المؤنث هذا الضمير عن المتكلم المذك

.I play football أV ألعب كرة القدم

.I am a hero أV بطل

نحن .6 (We): هذا الضمير عن المتكلمين بحالة التـثنية والجمع

.We play football نحن نـلعب كرة القدم

.We are heroes نحن أبطال

(The Abstract) المستخلص الضمير المنـفصل .1 (The Detached Pronoun) is a type of noun ( م س ا , ism) that is used to indicate

the غائب (absent), or the مخاطب (addressed), or the متكلم (Speaker).

2. You can begin a sentence with it ( منـفصل ضمير ).

الضمير المنـفصل .3 is a type of a تدأ .(subject) مبـ

الضمير المنـفصل .4 is معرفة (definite).

5. The ضمير (dhameer) هو and هى can be used for those who possess intellect عاقل, and for

things that do not possess intellect عاقل غير . If they are used for the latter they will have

the meaning of “it”.

40

۔2.2

اع مائر(ا)

ض )1ال

The Kinds of Pronouns (1)

الضمائر المتصلة The Attached Pronoun

(7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)

ه هما هم ها هما هن ك

You

ضربك Your

كتابك Them

ضرËن Their

كتاËن Them

صرËماTheir

كتاËماHer

ضرËاHer

كتاËاThem

ضرËم Their

كتاËم Them

ضرËماTheir

كتاËماHim

ضربه His

كتابه

(14) (13) (12) (11) (10) (9) (8)

كما كم ك كما كن ى ن

Us

ضربـناOur

كتابـناMe

ضربنى My

كتابى You

ضربكن Your

كتابكن You

ضربكماYour

كتابكماYou

ضربك Your

كتابك You

ضربكم Your

كتابكم You

ضربكماYour

كتابكما

41

Introduction to the 2nd part of Unit No.02 The 2nd part of the unit no.02, which you are going to study, is about the attached

pronouns in Arabic language. ( لة فى اللغة العربية الضمائر المتص ). There are 14 pronouns and

they are used with a noun as its annexed noun ( إليه مضاف ) and with a verb as its object

.(مفعول به ) V ،ه، ها، هم، ها، هما، هن، ك، كما، كم، ك، كما، كن، ى

This unit covers three aspects of the attached pronouns: 1. Their introduction

2. Their usage with a noun as annexed ( ه مضاف إلي ) in the form of conjugation/ inflection,

e.g., .كتابه، كتابك، كتابى

3. Their usage with a verb as object ( مفعول به) in the form of conjugation, e.g., هوضربه، هىها، ضربنى، ضرب ـ ناضربـتـ .

4. Their examples in sentences of daily usage.

Objectives of 2nd part of Unit No.02 With the help of Allah ( سبحانه و تعالی), when you complete the study of the 2nd part of Unit

No.02, which consists of 14 attached pronouns ( لة المتص الضمائر ), you will then discover

that you will be able to do the following work easily:

1. to introduce the attached pronouns.

2. to conjugate the attached pronouns and use them with a noun (ism) as its

.etc ,(your book) كتابك ,(his book) كتاب+ه= كتابه .e.g ,(annexed) مضاف إليه

3. to conjugate the attached pronouns and use them with a verb as its object, e.g., ضرب+ه.etc ,(He struck you) ضرب+ك = ضربك ,(He struck him) = ضربه

4. to use them in sentences of daily usage.

42

13(The Attached Pronouns) الضمائر المتصلة

The term متصلة (muttasila) comes from the verb “ اتصل” which has the meaning of being

linked or connected, e.g.,m ه (his), ها (her), ك (your), ى (my), فى (me),

V (our), etc.

Conjugation of the Detached and the Attached Pronouns with Examples of Using the

Attached Pronouns with Noun as its مضاف إليه 14

فصلة والمتصلة مع أمثلة استخدام (أى اسم) ه الضمائر المتصلة @سم كمضاف إليه ل صيغ الضمائر المنـ

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

(Their) هم, (They) همكتاËم

Their book

(Their) ،هما (they)هما كتاËما

Their book

(His) (He) ه، هو كتابه

His book


(Their) هم, (They) همكتاËن

Their book

(Their) ،هما (they)هما كتاËما

Their book

(Her)ها, (She)هىكتاËا

Her book


(your) كم, (you) أنـتمكتابكم

Your book

(your)كما, (you)أنـتماكتابكما

Your book

(your)ك, (you) أنتكتابك

Your book


(your) كن, (you) أنتنكتابكن

Your book

(your)كما, (you)أنـتما كتابكما

Your book

(your) ك, (you) أنتكتابك

Your book


(Our) V, (We) نحنكتابـنا

(Our book)

(Our) V, (We) نحنكتابـنا

(Our book)

(My)ى, (I) Vأكتابى

My book


Note: Memorize these pronouns thoroughly because they often occur a number of times in Al-

Quran Al-Hakeem.

13 Attached pronouns are also named: linked, connected, suffexted pronouns ( ضمائر الأضافة) possessive pronouns

and subject pronouns ( الفاعل ضمائر ).

14 .(the annexed and the determining noun) مضاف إليه

43

Conjugation of the Attached Pronouns with Examples of Using it with a Verb as its Object ( مفعول): صيغ الضمائر المتصلة مع استخدامها بفعل كمفعول له (أى فعل)

ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص

(Forms)

ضرËم -هم He stucked them

ضرËما -هما He strucked both of them

ضربه -ه He strucked him


ضرËن -هن She strucked them

ضربـتـهن -هن She strucked them

ضرËما -هما He stucked both of them

هما -هما ضربـتـ She strucked both of them

ضرËا -ها He strucked her

ها -ها ضربـتـ She strucked her


ضربكم -كم He strucked you

ضربكما -كما He strucked both of you

ضربك -ك He strucked you


ضربكن -كن He strucked you

ضربـتكن -كن She strucked you

ضربكما -كما He strucked both of you

ضربـتكما -كما She strucked both of you

ضربك -ك He strucked you

ضربـتك -ك She strucked you


V- ضربـنا He strucked us

Î- ضربـنا He strucked us

ضربنی -ى He strucked me


Use of the Attached Pronouns in Sentences of Daily Usage with Nouns as اليه مضاف : (His) ه .1

مسلم و ايمانه قوى.هو He is a Muslim and his belief is strong.

.He is a student and his book is new هو طالب و كتابه جديد.

هجه فى التدريس جيد جدا. He is a teacher and his method of teaching is هو معلم و منـvery good.

ى و لباسه ثمين. .He is a soldier and his dress is precious هو جند

.He is a driver and his car is new هو سائق و سيارته جديدة.

(Their) هما .2

.Both of them are believers and their belief is strong هما مؤمنان و ايما«ما قوى.

.Both of them are students and their books are useful هما طالبان و كتـبـهما مفيدة.

.Both of them are friends and their friendship is famous هما صديـقان و صداقـتـهما مشهورة.

.Both of them are players and their dresses are cheap هما لاعبان و لباسهما رخيص.

44

.Both of them are helpers and their help is recognizable هما Vصران و نصرÑما مشكورة.

هم .3 (Their)

ذاكرÑم قوية جدا.هم طلاب و They are students and their memory is very strong.

They are ignorant people and their ignorance is هم جهلاء و جهالتـهم خطير للآخرين.dangerous to other people.

رين.هم علماء و علمهم مفيد للآخ They are scholars and their knowledge is useful for other people.

.They are believers and their belief is not so strong هم مؤمنـون و ايما«م ليس بقوىء.

.They are workers and their houses are old هم عاملون و بـيوÑم قديمة.

ها .4 (Her)

She is a hard working student and her manners are هى طالبة مجتهدة و عاداÑا طيبة.very good.

.She is a pretty wife and her husband is handsome هى زوجة مليحة و بـعلها مليح.

She is an active student and her homework is هى طالبة نشيطة و عملها البـيتى ممتاز.excellent.

.She is a naughty student and her manners are bad هى طالبة شريـرة و عاداÑا سيـئة.

لة و جمالها هى امرأة يـ جم معروف فى العالم.

She is a beautiful woman and her beauty is famous

worldwide.

She is present and her presence is eighty out of هى حاضرة و حضورها ثمانين فى المائة.hundred (80%).

هما .5 (Their (of two))

و هما طالبـتان مجتهد6ن لى مكمل. اجبهما الم� Both of them are hardworking students and their homework is complete.

Both of them are expert nurses and their experience هما ممرضتان ماهر6ن و خبرÑما كثيرة.is a lot.

Both of them are believers and their belief is not so هما مؤمنـتأن و ايما«ما ليس بقوىء.strong.

.Both of them are players and their dresses are cheap هما لاعبـتان و لباسهما رخيصة.

داقـتـهماص هما صديـقتان و مشهورة فى القرية.

They both are friend and their friendship is famous

in the village/ town.

هن .6 (Their)

بحثـوهن ممتازة. [حثات و ات هن طالب They are research students and their research theses are excellent.

They are Muslim women and their daughters are هن نسوة مسلمات و بـناÑن مطيـعات.obedient.

عالمات. /هن جاهلات و اولادهن عالمون They are ignorant ladies and their sons and daughters are scholars.

45

هن معلمات و طلاËن و طالباÑن مجتهدون و مجتهدات.

They are teachers and their students are

hardworking.

بات و لة.هن طبيـ خيرÑن قليـ They are lady doctors and their experience is little.

(Your) ك .7

نت [حث و بحثك مختصر جدا.أ You are a researcher and your thesis is very short.

يمانك قوى.إ نت مؤمن و أ You are a believer and your belief is strong.

نت معلم و تلميذ كم مطيع جدا.أ You are a teacher and your pupil is very obedient.

نت 6جر و تجارتك Vفعة للآخرين.أ You are a trader (merchant) and your trading is useful (beneficial) for other people.

يل و واسع. أ نت صاحب البـيت و بـيـتك جم You are the owner of house and your house is beautiful and vast.

كما .8 (Your (of two))

تكما ليس بجيد.أ نـتما رجلان و بـيـ Both of you are men and your house is not so good.

عان وأستاذكما مسرور بكما. أ نـتما تلميذان مطيـ Both of you are obedient pupil and your teacher is happy with you.

نـتما نشيطان و مديركماأ متفق بنشاطاتكما.

Both of you are active and your director supports

your activities.

دليـتكمانـتما صيدليان مشهوران و صي أ مملوءة بسائر الأدوية.

Both of you are famous Pharmacists and your

pharmacy is full with all kinds of medicines.

لة جدا نـتماأ يـ كاتبان و كتابـتكما جم و مقروءة بسهولة.

Both of you are writers and your handwriting is very

beautiful and easy to read.

كم .9 (Your)

نـتم مسلمون وسلوككم حسن.أ All of you are Muslims and your method/way is very good.

نـتم طلاب و علمكم مفيد للناس.أ All of you are students and your knowledge is useful for the people.

فة.أ نـتم أطباء و خبرتكم كافية لهذه الوظيـ All of you are doctors and your experience is enough for this job.

نـتم خياط و خياطتكم مشهورة جدا.أ All of you are tailors and your tailoring is very famous.

. عند الله تعالى نـتم عابدون و عبادتكم مقبـولة أ All of you are worshipers and your act of worship is accepted by Allah ( ی سبحانه و تعال ).

ون و بحثـوكم مفيدة نـتم [حثـون مجتهد أ للباحثين فى المستـقبل.

You are hardworking researchers and your theses

will be useful for the future researchers.

46

(Your) ك .10[

نت طالبة مجتهدة و استادك مسرور بك.أ You are a hardworking student and your teacher is happy with you.

. نت عابدة و عبادتك مقبـولة عند الله تـعالى أ You are a worshiper and your act of worship is accepted by Allah ( ◌ سبحانه و تعالى ).

نت امرأة عالمة و علمك أ غير مفيد للآخرين.

You are a scholar woman and your knowledge is not

useful for others.

مريضك شريـر/ نت ممرضة نشيطة و أ مريضتك شريـرة.

You are an active nurse and your patient is naughty.

.تاز نت [حثة ممتازة و بحثك مم أ You are an excellent researcher and your thesis is excellent.

تاز.مشرفك أستاذ مم نت [حثة نشيطة و أ You are an active researcher and your supervisor is an excellent professor.

كما .11 (You of two)

نـتما طالبـتان و جامعتكما أ معروفة فى كل العالم.

Both of you are students and your university is

famous worldwide.

نـتما مومنـتان و ايمانكما قوى.أ Both of you are believers and your belief is strong.

تكما نظيف.أ نـتما امرأ6ن و بـيـ Both of you are women and your house is clean.

معروفة نـتما صديـقتان و صداقـتكما أ جدا بين الطلاب.

Both of you are friends and your friendship is

known among the students.

لة أ يـ نـتما كاتبـتان و كتابـتكما جم ة بسهولة.و مقرور

Both of you are writers and your handwriting is

beautiful and easy to read.

(Your) كن .12

قريـبة منا. ن و مدرستك نتن طالبات أ All of you are students and your school is near us.

عات.نتن مسلمات و أ بـناتكن مطيـ All of you are Muslims and your daughters are obedient.

لة.أ يـ بات و غرفكن واسعة وجم نتن طبيـ All of you are doctors and your rooms are vast and beautiful.

معروف نتن صادقات و صدقكن أ فى المجتمع.

All of you are truthful women and your truthful is known

in the society.

نتن مدرسات و طلابكن/ طالباتكن أ موجودات./موجودون

All of you are teachers and your (male and female)

students are present.

47

(Me) ى .13

.I am a student and my book is on the table أV طالب و كتابى على المنضدة.

.I am a man and my house is near to the mosque أV رجل و بيتى قريب من المسجد.

تلامذتى كلهم حاضرون فى أV مدرسة و رة.غرفة المحاض

I am a teacher and all my pupils are present in the

classroom.

ساتذتى كلهم يحبوننى أV مجتهدة جدا و أ كثيرا.

I am very hard working and all my teachers like me

very much.

.I am active and my friend is active like me أV نشيط و صديقى نشيط مثلى.

14. f (Our)

.We are Muslims and our God is Allah نحن مسلمون و ربـنا الله.

.المجيد نحن مسلمون و كتابـنا القرآن We are Muslims and our book is Al-Quran Al-Majid.

نحن طلاب و مكتـبـتـنا مملوءة عة.[لكتب المتـنـو

We are students and our library is full of different

kinds of books.

و جهالتـنا خطيرة للناس. جهلاء نحن We are ignorant people and our ignorance is dangerous for the people.

ساتذتـنا يحبـونـنا.أ نحن مجتهدون و We are hardworking and our teachers like us.

48

۔2.3م ا

ض

ال

اع ) ) ) ) 2222((((ائر )

The kinds of Pronoun (2)

(4) (3) (2) (1)

ستفهام ضمائر الإThe Interrogative Pronouns

ضمائر الوصل The Relative Pronouns

شارة ضمائر الإThe Demonstrative Pronouns

لكية ضمائر الم The Possessive Pronouns

، كيف، من، ما، ماذا، أى/أية، كم لماذا، أنى أين، متى، لما،

الذى، اللذان، الذين التى، اللتان، اللاتى/اللائى

للبعيد For Distant

ذلك، ذانك، أولئك 6نك، أولئك تلك،

للقريب For Near

هذا، هذان، هؤلاء هذه، ها6ن، هؤلاء

له لهما لهم لها لهما لهن لك لكما لكم لك لكما لكن

لى لنا

49

Introduction to 3rd part of Unit No.02

The 3rd part of Unit No.02, which you are going to study, contains the following kinds of

pronouns:

1. The Possessive Pronouns ( لكية ضمائر الم ).

2. The Demonstrative Pronouns ( شارة .(ضمائر الإ

3. Their Relative Pronouns ( ضمائر الوصل).

4. The Interrogative Pronouns ( ضمائر الإستفهام).

This unit covers the following aspects of these pronouns.

1. Rules and conjugations.

2. Using of pronouns in beneficial sentences.


After studying this Unit No.02, InshaAllah, it will be very easy for you to do the

following:

1. to conjugate these pronouns.

2. to present examples of these pronouns.


50

مائر ۔ 2.3

ض ال

اع ) 2(ا)


(The Possessive Pronouns) ضمائر الملكية .3Use of the Possessive Pronouns in Sentences of Daily Usage

له هذا المنزل This house is his.

لهما هذا المنزل This house is theirs. (both of them)

لهم المنزل هذا This house is theirs. (all of them)

لها هذا المنزل This house is hers.

لهما هذا المنزل This house is theirs. (both of them)

نزل لهن هذا الم This house is theirs. (all of them)

.This house is yours هذا المنزل لك

This house is yours. (both of you) هذا المنزل لكما

This house is yours. (all of you) هذا المنزل لكم

.This house is yours هذا المنزل لك

This house is yours. (both of you) هذا المنزل لكما

.This house is yours هذا المنزل لكن

.This house is mine هذا المنزل لى

.This house is ours هذا المنزل لنا

The Possessive Adjectives ( لكية الم صفات )

ه هذا منزل This/It is his house.

منزلهماهذا This/It is their house. (both of them)

.This/It is their house هذا منزلهم

This/It is her house. (both of them) هذا منزلها

This/It is their house. (both of them) هذا منزلهما

نزلهن م هذا This/It is their house.(all of them-f)

.This/It is your house هذا منزلك

This/It is your house. (both of you) هذا منزلكما

51

This/It is your house. (all of you) هذا منزلكم

.This/It is your house هذا منزلك

This/It is your house. (both of you) هذا منزلكما

This/It is your house. (all of you) هذا منزلكن

.This/It is my house هذا منزلى

.This/It is our house هذا منزلنا

Note: From the above mentioned fourteen forms of the possessive pronouns and the possessive

adjectives, it seems that there is a difference between the both. The students of the Arabic

language should know this difference, e.g.

لكية)أV ذهبت إلى الجامعة مع صديق لى (مثال ضمير الم I went to the university with a friend of mine (example of possessive pronoun).

لكية)أV ذهبت إلى الجامعة مع صديقى (مثال صفة الم I went to the university with my friend (example of possessive adjective).

"لكية بلفظ "اs استخدام ضمائر الم (Usage of Possessive Pronouns with Word “ sا”)

The word \ا is prefixed to the attached pronouns. The word “ \ا” confines the meaning of

“only/ alone”, e.g.

x‚$ −ƒÎ) ß‰ ç7 ÷è tΡ y‚$−ƒÎ)uρ ÚÏè tGó¡ nΣ You alone we worship, and you alone we ask for help (1:4).

Conjugation of the Possessive Pronouns with the Word “ sا”

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم -هم ا\ They alone

(only all of them-m)

هما -هما إ\ They alone

(only both of them-m)

ه -ه ا\ He alone


هن -هن ا\ They alone

(only all of them-f)

هما -هما ا\ They alone

(only both of them-f)

ها -ها ا\ She alone


كم -كم ا\ You alone

(only all of you)

كما -كما ا\ You alone

(only both of you)

ك -ك ا\ You alone


كن -كم ا\ You alone

(only all of you)

كما -كما ا\ You alone

(only both of you)

ك -ك ا\ You alone (f)


V- ن ا\ We alone

V- V ا\ We alone

ى -ى ا\ I alone


52

شارة .4 (The Demonstrative Pronoun) ضمائر الإ

شارة تـعريف ضمائر الإلمفعولة المحسوسة و اضمائر الإشارة هى التى تستخدم للإشارة إلى الناس، أو الحيـواVت، أو الأشياء

لك.الملموسة، إضافة إلى الأشياء مثل رأىء، و علم، و فكر و ما إلى ذ The Definition of Demonstrative Pronouns

Demonstrative pronouns are those which are used to point or to indicate people, animals,

objects or things, that could be felt or touched, and could also indicate things that have

meanings such as راىء (opinion), علم (knowledge) or فكر (thought), etc.

Conjugation of the Demonstrative Pronouns

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

اسم الإشارة (The Noun of Indication)

هؤلاء These

هذان These (two)

هذاThis

ر القريب للمذكFor near m.

هؤلاء These

ها6ن These (two)

هذه This

للمؤنث القريب For near f.

أولئك Those

ذانك Those (two)

ذلك That

ر البعيد للمذكFor distant m.

أولئك Those

6نك Those (two)

تلك That

للمؤنث البعيد For distant f.

Use of the Nouns of Indication in Sentences of Daily Usage

(This) هذا .1

ذا رجل.ه This is a man.

.This is a door هذا [ب.

.It is a useful knowledge هذا علم مفيد.

كتاب جديد.هذا This is a new book.

.This is a beneficial thing هذا شىء Vفع.

هذان .2 (These both)

ان.هذان طالبان مجتهد These two students are hard working.

.These two camels are cheap هذان جملان رخيصان.

.These two opinions are acceptable هذان رأ\ن مقبـولان.

53

ذان جبلان عاليان.ه These two mountains are high.

.ه ران معروفان فى العالم ذان مفك These two thinkers are famous worldwide.

(These all) هؤلاء .3

ون.هؤلاء طلاب مجتهد These are hard working students.

لماء معروفـون.ؤلاء ع ه These are famous scholars.

فكار مردودون.أ هؤلاء These are rejected thoughts.

اء؟ق من أين هؤلاء الأصد From where are these friends?

?Who are these boys من هؤلاء الأولاد؟

تازون.ؤلاء الأطباء مم ه These doctors are excellent.

(This) هذه .4

.This is an easy language هذه لغة سهلة.

.This car is new هذه سيارة جديدة.

.This is a naughty student هذه طالبة شريـرة.

.This window is opened هذه النافذة مفتـوحة.

لة Vفعة. يـ .This cow is beautiful and beneficial هذه البـقرة جم

(These two) هاwن .5

صديـقتان.ها6ن These two (people) are friends.

.These two rooms are beautiful ها6ن غرفـتان واسعتان.

قتان. .These two (people) are real sisters ها6ن اختان شقيـ

.These two trees are tall ها6ن شجر6ن طويـلتان.

.These two women are Muslims ها6ن امرأ6ن مسلمتان.


.These girls are students هؤلاء الفتـيات طالبات.

يلات. .These are beautiful daughters هؤلاء بـنات جم

ماهرات.هؤلاء مدرسات These are expert teachers.

?Are these nurses Muslims أهؤلاء الممرضات مسلمات؟

54

بات مدرسون. زواجهن أ هؤلاء طبيـ These are doctors. Their husbands are teachers.

عات .هؤلاء زوجات مطيـ لأزواجهن These are obedient wives to their husbands.

ذلك .7 (That)

.That is a student ذلك طالب.

.That is my friend ذلك صديقى.

أخى. ذلك بـيت That is my brother’s house.

.That doctor is Muslim/That is a Muslim doctor ذلك الطبيب مسلم.

.That man is a great scholar from Egypt ذلك الرجل عالم كبير من مصر.

ذانك .8 (Those two)

.Those two are Muslims ذانك مسلمان.

.Those two boys are hard working ذانك الولدان مجتهدان.

.Those two books are useful ذانك كتا[ن مفيدان.

درسان Vفعان جدا. .Those two teachers are very beneficial ذانك الم

بان م اهران.ذانك الطبيـ Those two doctors are expert.

أولئك .9 (Those all)

.Those men are teachers أولئك الرجال مدرسون.

؟من أين أولئك المدرسون From where are those teachers?

.Those teachers are from Pakistan أولئك المدرسون من [كستان.

و أولئك لاب من الصين هؤلاء الط الحرة. ن كشمير م

These students are from China and those are

from Azad Kashmeer.

المحتـلة. أولئك التجار من كشمير Those traders are from the occupied Kashmeer.

55

تلك .10 (That)15

.That is a tall tree تلك شجرة طويـلة.

.That is an old car تلك سيارة قديمة.

ة.تلك الطالبة مجتهد That student is hard working.

مدرسة نشيطة.تلك That is an active teacher.

ة عالمة.تلك امرأ That is a scholarly lady.

w (Those)نك .11

.Those two are active students 6نك طالبـتان نشيطتان.

.Those two cows are very beneficial 6نك بـقر6ن Vفعتان جدا.

بـتان مسلمتان. .Those two doctors are Muslims 6نك الطبيـ

ر6ن من الهند.6نك المحاض Those two lecturers are from India.

.Those two cars are from Japan 6نك السيار6ن من اليا[ن.

أولئك .12 (Those)

لترا.إ أولئك الطالبات من نج Those students are from England.

ين أولئك المحاضرات؟من أ From where are those (female) lecturers?

.Those women are teachers أولئك النسوة مدرسات.

Those girls are from Egypt and those are from هؤلاء الفتـيات من مصر و أولئك من فـرنسا. France.

ات جدا.أولئك الطالبات مجتهد Those students are very hard working.

Note: All the الإشارة ضمائر (demonstrative pronouns)/ شارة أ سماء الإ (nouns of indication) are معرفة (definite). These can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ( عاقل), and

to things that do not possess intellect ( غير عاقل).

15 It is a noun of indication which is used to indicate/point to object (مفعول) or people that are distant/far and

feminine. تلك can be broken into three parts:

i.الإشارة اسم -تى(Noun of indication) .

ii. للبـعد اللام -ل(The Laam is for the far/ distant) .

iii. خطاب حرف -ك (Particle of address) .

56

ك ذل is a noun of indication. It is used to indicate/point to objects or people that are distant

or far. ذلك can be broken down in to three parts:

Noun of indication شارة ذا اسم الإ

The Laam is for the far/distant ل اللام للبـعد

Particle of address ك خطاب حرف

Some of the grammarians say that the “ ك” particle of address also indicates far/distant,

and the “ل” shows even further distant.

The letter/particle of address “ ك” is used if the person or object, we are addressing, is

masculine.

.(ا) but it is written without the alif ذالك is pronounced as ذلك Some of the grammarians say that the شارة أ سماء الإ have three levels ( ثلاث مراتب): 1. For near ( للقريب): هذا

2. For far/distant ( للبعيد): ذلك

3. For the middle between near and far ( للوسط): ذاك

لاصة أن ضمائر الإشارة تشير إلى إسم أو شخص سبق ذكره.والخ ا كتاب).(هذ This is a book للمفرد القريب المذكر. (This)هذا .1 (هذه أخت). This is a sister للمفرد القريب المؤنث. (This) هذه .2 (ذلك أخى). That is my brother المذكر. للمفرد البعيد (That) ذلك .3 (تلك أختى). That is my sister للمفرد البعيد المؤنث. (That) تلك .4ؤنث. (These)هؤلاء .5

).ب لا هؤلاء ط ( These are studentsللجمع القريب المذكرو الم

ر و المؤنث. (Those)اولئك .6 ).ىائ ق د ص ولئك أ أ ((Those are my friends) للجمع البعيد المذك (The Relative Pronouns) ضمائر الوصل .5

تستخدم ضمائر الوصل لربط الجمل بـعضها ببـعض، مثل: الرجل الذى ضرب أخى.

The relative pronouns are used to join sentences together16, e.g., the man who beated my

brother.

16 The relative pronouns is a kind of definite معرفة noun because a clause (جزء) coming after it completes its proper

sense. This clause is called the syndetic (sin-det-ik connected by a conjunction) relative clause (اضافى).

57

Conjugation of the Relative Pronouns

ع جم PLURAL

حالة نصبية و جرية Accus & Gen


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

الذين Those

اللذين Who/Whom

اللذان Who/Whom

الذى Who/Whom

مذكر

اللائى /اللاتى Those

اللتين Who/Whom

اللتان Who/Whom

التى Who/Whom

مؤنث

Note: All the above relative pronouns are indeclinable ( مبنى) except their dual forms.

Use of Relative Pronouns in Sentences Daily Usage

i. (Who, Whom) الذى

.The man who left is my friend الرجل الذى ذهب صديقى.

.الطبيب الذى خرج من المستشف ى هو من الصين The doctor, who went out from the hospital, is from China.

The player, who is eating and drinking, is اللاعب الذى \كل و يشرب بطل.a hero.

ستاذى.أ لقى المحاضرة الأستاذ الذى ي ـ The teacher, who is delivering the lecture, is my teacher.

متحان بدرجات عالية ابنى.الطالب الذى نجح فى الإ The student, who passed the examination with the highest mark, is my son.

.He is the man who told me ذلك الرجل الذى أخبرنى.

كلمته.V ذلك الرجل الذى أ He is the man whom I spoke to.

ii. Who (two) الذان

يـقان.ذهبا هما صد ان الطالبان اللذ The two students who left are friends.

انجلترا. ا جاءا من ن ان يـعملان ه بان اللذ ي ـب لط ا Both the doctors who are working here came from England.

ان يدرسان فى هذه المدرسان اللذ المدرسة هما من اصدقائى.

Both the teachers, who teach in this

school, are my friends.

مسلمان.الولدان اللذان يـلعبان كرة القدم Both the boys, who play football, are Muslims.

سان اللذان يسكنان فى هذه هند الم

. الشقة المفروشة غير متـزوجينBoth the engineers, who live in this

furnished flat, are single.

58

iii. (Who) الذين

هؤلاء المدرسون الذين يدرسون فى كلية أصول ين كلهم من جامعة الأزهر.الد

The teachers, who teach in the Faculty of Usul-ud-din are all from Al-Azhar University.

بـون من هنا إلى العراق الذين يذه الناس للجهاد كلهم من افـعانستان.

The people, who are going from here to Iraq for jihad (the holy war) are all from Afghanistan.

ون جدا.هد الطلاب الذين التحقوا [لجامعة كلهم مجت The students, who took admission in the university are all very hardworking.

The principles who are in the government المديـرون الذين فى الكليات الحكومية كلهم جيدون.college are all good.

,Those who come, go, and those who go الذين Ùتـون يذهبـون والذين يذهبـون لايـعودون.do not return.

iv. (who) التى

متحان بدرجات عالية هى الطالبة التى نجحت فى الإد على.أخت صديقى محم

The student, who succeeded in the examination with the highest mark, is the sister of my friend, Muhammad Ali.

The car, which is present here, is made in السيارة التى موجودة هنا هى مصنـوعة من اليا[ن.Japan.

ها هى غرفة المدير. This room in which we are is the director’s هذه الغرفة التى نحن فيـroom.

.The clock, which I need, is a wall clock الساعة التى اريدها هى للجدار.

فة.ة التى فى يدك هى الملعق ليست نظيـ The spoon, which is in your hand, it is not clean.

v. (Who) اللتان

ينيـتان. بـتان اللتان فى هذا المستشفى هما الص Both the lady doctors, who are in this الطبيـhospital, are Chinese.

اللتان على الطاولة هما قديمتان جدا.تان الساع Both the watches, which are on the table, very old.

6ن جدا.حقتا [لجامعة مجتهد تان اللتان الت ب ـالطال Both the students, who took admission in the university, are very hardworking.

الممرضتان اللتان تسكنان فى الشقة المفروشة كلتا هما من القرية.

Both the nurses, who live in the full

furnished apartment, are from the village.

ن.يد6 النافذ6ن اللتان فى جدار بيتى جد Both the windows, which are at the wall of my house, are new.

vi. تى (Those) اللا

تى يـعملن فى المصنع كلهن .سارقات النساء اللا All the women, who work in the factory, are thieves.

59

ينيةالمعلمات تى يدرسن فى المدرسة الد اللا ات و نشيطات جدا.كلهن مجتهد

All the teachers, who teach in the religious

school, are very hardworking and active.

تى ي ـ لقن المحاضرات فى المحاضرات اللا ت.عربية كلهن مصر\ اللغة ال

All the lecturers, who deliver lectures in the

Arabic language, are Egyptians.

تى هنا فى القرى النسوة الجاهلات اللاجن العلم الإسلامى.كلهن يحت

All the ignorant women, who are in the villages, all in need of Islamic knowledge.

تى هنا فى السوق كلها السيارات اللا مصنـوعة من اليا[ن.

All the cars, which are here in the market,

are made in Japan.

The following three words, which are interrogative pronouns originally, are also used as

relative pronouns:

(which of) أى ,(that, which) ما ,(he, who) من

.I taught to one who was (once) a student علمت من كان متـعلما.

ى.ى ما مض مض Let bygones be bygone.

يجتهد.يكرم ايكم Among you, he, who tries his best, is respected.

ستفهام ضمائر .6 الا (The Interrogative Pronouns)

ستفهام تستخدم لصياغة الأسئـلة. ضمائر/أسماء الإThe interrogative pronouns/questioning nouns are used to make questions or to ask about

people and things in order to know their position. They are given as below:

ن م .1 (who) 2. ما (what) 3. ماذا (what)

ى أ ، ية أ .4 (who, which, what, what kind of) 5. كم (how many)

ين أ .7 (!how? how) كيف .6 (where) 8. ی مت (when)

نى أ .11 (why) لماذأ .10 (why) لما .9 (where from).

All the above interrogative pronouns are مبنى (indeclinable) except اى and ية أ either of

which is معرب (declinable) - having all three cases of vowels.

Some Rules to Use Questioning Nouns

1. The questioning nouns or interrogative pronouns come in the beginning of the sentences, e.g.

نت؟من أ Who are you?

وك؟خ من أ Who is your brother?

?What is your name ما اسمك؟

60

But when they are used as genitive ( ر و ر مج ), they come after the construct accordingly, e.g.,

من كرسى (whose chair), بـيت من (whose home).

2. The particles are added before the interrogative pronouns, e.g.

?Whose pen is this لمن القلم؟

?Whose kingdom is today لمن الملك اليـوم؟

?From where من أين؟

3. The particle ما is pronounced م also, e.g.

(i) لما= لم (ii) عما= عم (iii) فيما = فيم

:are construct to the coming words اية and اى .4

(i) ى رجل أ ى الرجال، أ (whichever man/men)

(ii) ية مرءة أ ية النسأء، أ (whichever woman/women)

5. The noun following كم is singular, and is accusative case, e.g.

?How many dollars have you كم دولارا عندك؟

؟كم سنة عمرك What is your age?/How old are you?

6. Sometimes كم is used as خبرية (informative). Then it has the meaning of: many, how

much. And the noun, that follows is singular or plural in genitive case

.e.g ,(حالة جرية )

.Many men كم رجل، كم رجال.

لة. .Many small groups كم من فئة قليـ

سئـلة تكوين الأ Making Questions

وال التالية:ن يـبدأ Úحدى أدوات الس إعطاء معلومات معيـنة فـيجب أ ل السؤاف من إذا كان الهد Where? المكان عن ل ؤاللس ين أ When? الزمان عن ل للسؤا متىWhy? السبب عن ل للسؤا لماذأWhat? شىء عن ل للسؤا ما/ماذا

61

Which? للأختيار بين شيئين أى Who? فاعل عاقل عن ل للسؤا من

Whom? عن مفعول عاقل ل للسؤا من Whose? لكية عن الم ل للسؤا لمن

How? عن الحالة ل للسؤا كيف How many? عن العدد ل للسؤا كم عدد How much? ية ية ل للسؤا كم كم عن الكمHow long? عن الطول ل للسؤا كم طول

How old? عن العمر ل للسؤا كم عمر How far? سافة عن الم ل للسؤا كم بـعد

نعكاسية .7 (The Reflexive Pronouns) الضمائر الا

.)Reflexive pronouns are used to emphasis(ة للتأكيد تستخدم ضمائر الإنعكاسي .1بكلمة يكون هو الفاعل نـفسه و تصاغ ما عن المفعول به عند تستخدم هذه الضمائر للتـعبير .2

“Self ” :زية ليـ نج [للغة الإ

غة الجمع المفرد الصيـ

المتكلم Speaker

نـفسىMyself

نـفسناأ Ourselves

المخاطب Listener

نـفسك Yourself

نـفسكم أ Yourselves

الغائب Absent

(Himself) نـفسه

(Herself)نـفسها

(Itself)نـفسها

م ه نـفس أ Themselves

Examples:

البـيت.هى ضربت نـفسها فى She struck herself in the house.

.She hurt herself in the garden هى جرحت نـفسها فى الحديـقة.

.He talks to himself هو يكلم نـفسه.

(Here subject is himself object) هنا المفعول به هو نـفسه الفاعل

62

(The Object Pronouns) ضمائر المفعول به .8

. ستخدم ضمير المفعول به بـعد ي حروف الجر

The object pronouns are used after the preposition, e.g.

.He lives near me هو يسكن قريب منى.

إليهم.هما يذهبان Both of them go/are going/will go to them.

They are looking at them/They are looking هم يـنظرون إليهن.towards them.

Vتـوكل عليه.أ أ I trust him.

ساعدكم.نحن ن We help you.

.I read from your book أV قرأت من كتابك.

Examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem:

ó>Î� ôÑ$#uρ Μçλ m; ¸ξsW ¨Β And present to them an example. (36:13)

øŒ Î) !$uΖù=y™ ö‘r& ãΝ Íκö�s9Î) È ÷uΖ øO$# $yϑ èδθ ç/¤‹s3 sù $ tΡø—“yèsù;]Ï9$sV Î/ (# þθ ä9$s)sù !$‾ΡÎ) Νä3ø‹ s9 Î) tβθ è=y™ ó÷‘∆

When We sent to them two Messengers, they denied them both, so, We strengthened/reinforced them with a third, and they said, “Indeed, we are messengers to you”. (36:14)

óΟ s9r& (# ÷ρt� tƒ ö/ x. $uΖ õ3 n=÷δ r& Νßγn= ö6s% š∅ ÏiΒ Èβρã� à) ø9$#öΝ åκΞ r& öΝ Íκö�s9Î) Ÿω tβθãèÅ_ ö� tƒ

Do they not see how many generations We

have destroyed before them? Verily, they will

not return to them. (36:31)

$oΨ ù=yè y_uρ $yγŠ Ïù ;M≈Ζ y_ And We have made therein gardens. (36:34)

63

QUESTIONS

ةسئل


سئل

جب e الا :ا

فصلة الضمائر هي ما ـ 1 ـ نجليزية الإ إلى رجمهاوت ـ اكتبها ؟ المنـ ها أنـواع واكتب ئر الضما عرف ـ 2فصلة الضمائر فيها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 3 المنـفصلة الضمائر استخدم ـ 4 ل ع الف و " ل ع "ف ـ ى ماض ال ل ع ف ال و ،المفعول م س ا و الفاعل م س ا مع المنـ

ـ نجليزية الإ إلى تـرجمها " ثم "لا تـفعل ى ه النـ ل ع ف و "ل ع ف ـ"ا الأمر ل ع ف و " ل ع ف المضارع "ي ـالمتصلة الضمائر اكتب ـ 5ـ ةي ز ي ل نج لإ [ المتصلة الضمائر عرف ـ 6 إليه ـ كمضاف [سم المتصلة الضمائر استخدم ـ 7 )فـعل أى (له‘ كمفعول بفعل المتصلة الضمائر استخدم ـ 8 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم فى الجمل المفيدة المتصلة مائر الض استخدم ـ 9

نجليزية الإ إلى تـرجمها ثم المفيدة الجمل فى هام استخد ؟ الملكية ت وصفا الملكية ضمائر هى ما ـ 10 " ا\" بلفظ الملكية استخدم الضمائر ـ 11شارة ضمائر عرف ـ 12 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى وتـرجمها المفيدة الجمل فى اه م استخد و هااكتـب ـ ثم الإ الوصل؟ ضمائر تستخدم لماذا ـ 13 المفيدة الجمل فى هام استخد ثم الوصل ضمائر صيغ اكتب ـ 14 ؟ الإستفهام ضمائر تستخدم لماذا ـ 15 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم الإستفهام أسماء / ضمائر اكتب ـ 16 الأمثلة اكتب ؟ الإنـعكاسية ضمائر تستخدم لماذا ـ 17 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم الأمثلة المفعول له ؟ اكتب ضمير تستخدم أين ـ 18

65

وحدة

ال

ث ال الث

اء :ة سم

� � � � �� الاUnit No.03-The Nouns(3)

المركب التـوصيفى ۔ 3.1

The Adjective Compound

ضافی الا المركب ۔ 3.2The Relative Compound

�مید خان عبا�� الأستاذ الدکتور : إ عداد�عبد ا

عبد ا01ید /غدادی الدکتور : راجعالم

Written by: Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Reviewed by: Dr. Abdul Majeed Bagdadi

66

�� sوصي تب ال

مرك

ال

The Adjective Compound

(2) (1)

الموصوف الصفة

الكتاب المفيد

وصيفى المركب التـ

موصوف صفة

ى مركب تـوصيف The Adjective Compound

67

Introduction to the 1st part of Unit No.03 The first part of this Unit of your course, “Quranic Arabic”, is about the Adjective

compound ( تـوصيفى لالمركب ا ). In this unit you will study the following points:

1. Definition of the adjective compound.

2. Some additional important rules about :(adjective compound) مركب تـوصيفى

i. Agreement of the prescribed (qualified) noun and the adjective noun in number ( مطابـقة.and examples from the Quran and sentences of daily usage ,(اسم الصفة والموصوف فى العدد

ii. Agreement of the prescribed noun and the adjective noun in gender

.and examples from the sentences of daily usage (مطابـقة اسم الموصوف و الصفة فى الجنس )

iii. Agreement of the prescribed and the adjective noun in the definite and indefinite noun

( صفة والموصوف فى اسم المعرفة و النكرة لقة اسم امطاب ـ ) and examples from the sentences of daily

usage.

iv. Agreement of the prescribed and the adjective noun for the Irab case-ending

( عراب الموصوف قة اسم مطاب ـ فة فى الإ والص ) and its examples and conjugation.

Objectives of 1st part of Uunit No.03 With the help of Allah ( انه و تعاليw), when you complete the 1st part of this unit no.03, you

will then be able to know about the following:

1. Definition of the adjective compound ( تـعريف المركب التـوصيفى). 2. Some important rules about the agreement between the prescribed (qualified) noun and

the adjective noun ( الموصوف صفة و لمعرفة أهم القواعد عن المطابـقة بين اسم ا ) in the following four

aspects:

i. In number ( فى العدد).

ii. In gender ( فى الجنس).

iii. In the proper and common noun ( المعرفة و النكرة اسم فى ).

iv. In the Irab, case-ending ( عراب .(فى الإ

The main purpose of this unit is to describe every aspect of the above mentioned

examples.

68

المركب التـوصيفى � � � � �� (The Adjective Compound)

تـعريـفه:: قـلم ل ث ، م يسمى الصفة سم الثانى والإ ل يسمى الموصوف و الأ م ، الإس مجموعة الإسمين وصيفى المركب التـ .ك ذل تاب Vفع، غرفة واسعة، وما الى جديد، ك

The adjective compound/phrase is a combination of the two nouns. The first noun is

called الموصوف (the Prescribed/the possessor of the quality) and the other is called الصفة(the adjective), e.g., new pen, a beneficial book, a spacious (vast) room, etc.

In the above mentioned three examples, the first noun is prescribed noun ( موصوف) and

the second is adjective ( صفة).

In short, a phrase, in which the second word qualifies the first, is called an adjective

phrase.

Some Important Rules About مركب تـوصيفى Adjective Compound

:in these four aspects (prescribed noun) موصوف must agree with its (an adjective) صفة

والنكرة المعرفة ,(the gender) الجنس (the definite and indefinite) and الإعراب (the case-ending).

Now we describe them one by one with examples:

قة اسم الصفة والموصوف فى العدد مطاب ـ .1 (Agreement of the Prescribed/Qualified Noun and

the Adjective Noun in Number):

The number ( العدد) of the adjective noun ( الصفة اسم ) must agree with its

prescribed/qualified noun ( الموصوف اسم ), i.e.

i. If الموصوف اسم (the qualified noun) is singular ( واحد), الصفة اسم (the adjective noun) is

to be singular ( واحد). Examples are presented from Al-Quran Al-Kareem, and from

sentences of daily usage:

69

Examples of the Adjective Phrases from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem:

مركب fقص (Incomplete Phrase)

مفيدة جملة غير (Un-beneficial Sentence)

مركب wم (Complete Phrase)

جملة مفيدة (Beneficial Sentence)

نات ا|ت بيClear signs

م عل

و~ا ال

ذ� ا نات في صدور ال هو ا|ت بي

بل

Nay, but it is clear Ayat (signs) in the hearts of those who have been given knowledge (29:49).

كيم

قران الح ال

The Quran full of wisdom

كيم

قران الح ال

By the Quran, full of wisdom (i.e. full of laws, evinces and proofs).

مام مبين اA clear book

حصيناه في ء ا شى

مام مبين وكل اAnd all the things we have recorded with numbers (as a record) in a clear book (36:12).

مبين ال

غ

بلا

ال

To clearly convey (the Message)

مبين ال

غ

بلا

ال

لا ينا ا

وما عل

And our duty is only to clearly convey (the message) (36:17).

ريم جر ك

اA generous reward

ريم جر ك

ه بمغفرة وا بشر ف

Give him good news of forgiveness as a generous reward (i.e., paradise) (36:11).

واحدة

صيحة

One shout

واحدة

صيحة

لا نت ا

ن كا ا

But it was only one shout (36:29).

م بين

ل

ضلاA plain (clear) error

ل م

s ضلاذا ل ا

نى بين ا

Then verily, I should be in plain error (36:24).

عدو مبين A plain (clear) enemy

عدو مبين كم

ه ل

ن يطان ا

لا تعبدوا الش

You should not worship Shaitan (Satan). Verily, he is a plain enemy to you (36:60).

اط مستقيم صرA straight path

ن اط مستقيم وا ا صر

ذ اعبدونى ه

And that you should worship Me. That is the straight path (36:61).

خضر ج ر الا

الش

The green tree

خضر ªرا جر الا

» الش

كم ل

ذي جعل

ال

He who produces for you fire out of the green tree (36:80).

رحيق مختوم Pure sealed wine

يسقون » رحيق مختوم They will be given to drink of pure sealed wine (83:25).

بير ك

فوز ال

ال

The great success

بير ك

فوز ال

لك ال ذ

That is the great success (85:11).

يد قران مجGlorious Quran

يد هو قران مج

وح محفوظ Oبلفي ل

Nay! This is the glorious Quran. In Preserved Tablet (85:21, 22).

70

Use of the Adjective Phrases in Sentences of Daily Usage:


جملة غير مفيدة (Un-beneficial Sentence)



طالب مجتهد A hard working student

هذا طالب مجتهد This is a hard working student.

كتاب Vفع A beneficial book

لك كتاب Vفع ذ That is a beneficial book.

قـلم جديد A new pen

هذا قـلم جديد This is a new pen.

ميدان واسع A vast ground

ذلك ميدان واسع That is a vast ground.

طبيب ماهر (حاذق)An expert doctor

هل هذا طبيب ماهر Is this an expert doctor.

ii. If اسم الموصوف is dual ( تـثينة), اسم الصفة is to be dual, e.g.



يلان تان جم بـيـTwo beautiful houses

يلان ن هذا تان جم بـيـBoth these houses are beautiful.

سلان ولدان ك Two lazy boys

سلان ذهب ولدان ك Two lazy boys left.

مدرسان جديدان Two new teachers

جاء مدرسان جديدان Two new teachers came

زوجان شفيـقان Two kind husbands

قان إلى السماء نطر زوجان شفيـTwo kind husbands looked towards the sky.

مسجدان كبيران Two big mosques

هنا مسجدان كبيران Here are two big mosques.

71

iii. If الموصوف اسم is in plural ( جمع), الصفة اسم has to be plural ( جمع), e.g.



الحون مسلمون ص Pious Muslims

البـيت الحون فى دخل مسلمون ص Pious Muslims entered the house.

بـون ماهرون طبيـExpert doctors

بـون ماهرون القرآن قـرأ طبيـExpert doctors read Al-Quran.

معلمون حاذقـون Expert teachers

درس معلمون حاذقـون Expert teachers taught.

رجال فلاحون Farmer men

لاء رجال فلاحون هؤ These men are farmer.

أولاد شريـرون Naughty boys

أولئك أولاد شريـرون They are naughty boys.

طلاب جدد New students

نة التحق طلاب جدد [لجامعة فى هذه الس This year, new students took admission in the university

The Agreement of the Prescribed Noun and the) مطابـقة اسم الموصوف والصفة فى الجنس .2

Adjective Noun in Gender)

The gender of the object noun ( الصفة اسم ) must agree with the gender of the prescribed

noun ( الموصوف اسم ):

72

i. if سم الموصوف ا is مؤنث (f.g.), الصفة اسم is to be مؤنث, e.g.


غير مفيدة جملة (Un-beneficial Sentence)



طالبة مجتهدة A hardworking student

زيـنب طالبة مجتهدة Zainab is a hardworking student.

جديدة سيارة A new car

هذه سيارة جديدة It is a new car.

جامعة معروفة A famous university

تلك جامعة معروفة That is a famous university.

نة مدرسة فطيـAn intelligent teacher

نة رشيدة مدرسة فطيـ Rashida is an intelligent teacher.

نة زوجة اميـA trustworthy wife

نة؟ هل هى زوجة اميـIs she a trustworthy wife?

ii. If سم الموصوف ا is مؤنث تـثنية (dual f.g.), the has to be اسم الصفة مؤنث تـثنية (dual f.g.) also,

for example:



يلتان تان جم بنـTwo beautiful daughters

يلتان تان جم ؟هل ها6ن بنـ Are these two daughters beautiful?

قان أختان شقيـTwo real sisters

قتان لة أختان شقيـ يـ فريدة و جمFrida and Jamila are two real sisters.

زوجتان صالحتان Two pious wives

هل هما زوجتان صالحتان؟Are they both pious wives?

ممرضتان نشيطتان Two active nurses

ها6ن ممرضتان نشيطتان Both of them are active nurses.

نـتان يـ بـقر6ن سمTwo fat cows

نـتان يـ ها6ن بـقر6ن سمThese two cows are fat.

73

iii. If الموصوف سم ا is جمع مؤنث (plural f.g.), the اسم الصفة has to be جمع مؤنث (plural f.g.) also, for example:



بـنات صالحات Pious daughters

بـنات صالحات هن They are pious daughters.

ات نساء مجتهد Hardworking women

ات؟هل هن نساء مجتهد Are they hardworking women?

مدرسات نشيطات Active teachers

ن مدرسات نشيطات كله ء هؤلا All of these are active teachers.

نات طالبات فطيـIntelligent students

نات أولئك كلهن طالبات فطيـAll of these are very intelligent female students.

عات زوجات مطيـObedient wives

عات؟ هل هن زوجات مطيـAre they obedient wives?

iv. If the prescribed noun ( سم الموصوف ا ) is مذكر (m.g.), the adjective noun ( اسم الصفة) has to

be مذكر (m.g.) also for example:



مطيع ابن Obedient son

هل أحمد ابن مطيع؟Is Ahmad an obedient son?

شجاع جندى A brave soldier

شجاع؟ ی جند قاسم ن هل محمد ب Is Muhammad ibn Qasim a brave soldier?

سائق ماهر An expert driver

نديم سائق ماهر ى ق ي د ص My friend Nadeem is an expert driver.

شارع واسع Vast road

هذا شارع واسع It is a vast road.

معلم شفيق A kind teacher

هل هو معلم شفيق Is he a kind teacher

3. قة اسم الموصوف و الصفة فى اسم المعرفة والنكرة مطاب ـ (Agreement of the Prescribed and the

Adjective in the Definite and Indefinite Noun)

In an compound/adjective ( تـوصيفى مركب ), the agreement ought to be between both parts

( ة صف و موصوف ) of it ( تـوصيفى مركب ) in proper and common noun (definite and indefinite

noun) ( نكرة و معرفة اسم ), e.g.

74

اسم المعرفة The Proper/Definite Noun

كرة اسم الن The Common/Indefinite Noun

الإبن الصالح The pious son

الإبن الصالح مجتهد The pious son is hardworking

ابن صالح A pious son

هل هو ابن صالح؟Is he a pious son?

الابـنان الصالحان The two pious sons

الإبـنان الصالحان مجتهدان Both the pious sons are hardworking.

ابـنان صالحان Two pious sons

هل أنـتما ابـنان صالحان؟Are you two pious sons?

البـنـون الصالحون All pious sons

البـنـون الصالحون مجتهدون The pious sons are hardworking.

بـنـون صالحون Pious sons

هؤلاء بـنـون صالحون These are pious sons.

البنت المطيعة The obedient daughter

عة نشيطة و صادقة البنت المطيـThe obedient daughter is active and truthful.

بنت مطيـعة An obedient daughter

هل هى بنت مطيـعة؟Is she an obedient daughter?

عتان تان المطيـ البنـ The two obedient daughters

عتان نشيطتان و صادقـتان تان المطيـ البنـThe two obedient daughters are active and truthful.

عتان تان مطيـ بنـ Two obedient daughters

عتان تان مطيـ ها6ن بنـThese two are obedient daughters.

البـنات المطيـعات The obedient daughters

البـنات المطيـعات Vشطات و صادقات The obedient daughters are active and truthful.

بـنات مطيـعات Obedient daughters

ء بـنات مطيـعات لا هؤ These are obedient daughters.

عراب الموصوف و الصفة فى الا قة مطاب ـ .4 (Agreement of the Prescribed Noun and the Adjective

Noun in the Irab/Case-Ending)

In an adjective compound, the إعراب of الصفة must agree with its موصوف (prescribed

noun?), i.e.

i. If الموصوف اسم (the qualified noun) is in nominative case ( ة رفعي حالة الصفة ,( has to be in

nominative case ( ة رفعي حالة ) also. For example:

75

مركب wم مركب fقص طالب صادق

A truthful student

هو طالب صادق He is a truthful student.

طالبان صادقان Two truthful students

طالبان صادقان هما Both of them are truthful students.

طلاب صادقـون Truthful students

لاء طلاب صادقـون هؤ They are truthful students.

ii. If الموصوف is in the accusative case ( ة الحالة النصبي الصفة ( must also be in the accusative

case. For example:

Incomplete Compound ( قصf مركب)Nominative Case ( ة رفعي حالة )

Complete Compound ( مw مركب)Accusative Case ( ة نصبي حالة )

طالب صادق A truthful student

رأيت طالبا صادقا I saw a truthful student.


رأيت طالبين صادقين I saw two truthful students.

طلاب صادقـون All the truthful students (more than two)

دقين رأيت طلا[ صا I saw truthful students (more than two).

iii. If ) is in the genitive case اسم الموصوف ة الحالة الجري اسم الصفة ,( must also be in genitive case

( ة الحالة الجري ). For example.

Incomplete Compound ( قصf مركب)Nominative Case ( ة رفعي حالة )

Complete Compound ( مw مركب)Genitive Case ( جرية حالة )

طالب صادق A truthful student

نطرت إلى طالب صادق I saw a truthful student.


نظرت إلى طالبين I saw two truthful students.

طلاب صادقـون Truthful student

نظرت إلى طلاب صادقين I saw truthful students.

Conjugation of Three Cases

جمع Plural

تـثنية Dual

واحد Singular

احوال/ اشكال Cases/ Types

رجال صالحون Pious men

رجلان صالحان Two pious men

رجل صالح A pious men

ة الحالة الرفعي The Nominative Case

76

ين رجالا صالح Pious men

رجلين صالحين Two pious men

رجلا صالحاA pious man

ة الحالة النصبي The Accusative Case

رجال صالحين Pious men

ين رجلين صالح Two pious men

رجل صالح A pious man

ة الحالة الجري The Genitive Case

In short, in an adjective phrase, if the first word is attached with ال then the second will

also have ال attached to it, e.g., المفيد الكتاب , and, as in the case of تدأ وخبر مبـ (subject and

predicate), if the first word is مؤنث (feminine), the second should also be feminine. If the

first word is dual or plural, the second should also be dual or plural in number, i.e., the

two words should agree in gender and number with respect to each other.

A New Rule: But when a prescribed ( موصوف) is a broken plural ( جمع تكسير) and a non-human

feminine plural, the relevant adjective ( صفة) will be a feminine singular ( واحد

:For example .(مؤنث

بـيـوت كبيرة Big houses

هذه بـيـوت كبيرة These are big houses.

مدن نظيـفة Clean towns

؟هل تلك مدن نظيـفة Are these clean towns?

ف الجميـلة الغر The beautiful rooms

لة واسعة و نظيـفة الغر ف الجميـ The beautiful rooms are spacious and clean.

لة ئ الطا رات الجميـ The beautiful birds

لة ع ئ الطا الأشجار لى رات الجميـ The beautiful birds are on the trees.

ويـلة الأشجار الط The tall trees

الأشجار الطويـلة فى الغابةThe tall trees are in the jungle.

Examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem

$ pκ� Ïù Ö‘ç�ß� ×πtãθèùö� ¨Β There (in it) will be thrones raised high (88:13).

Ò># uθø. r& uρ ×π tãθàÊ öθΒ And cups/goblets set at hand (88:14).

ä−Í‘$oÿ sς uρ ×π sùθà� óÁtΒ And cushions set in rows (88:15).

÷’Î1# u‘ y—uρ îπ rOθèV ö7tΒ And rich carpet (all spread out) (88:16).

’Îû 7#çt à¾ 7π tΒ§� s3 •Β (It is) in books held (greatly) in honour (80:13).

7π tãθèùó÷ £∆ ¥οt� £γsÜ •Β Exalted (in dignity), kept pure and holy (80:14).

77

In the first Quranic example, the word “ مرفـوعة” is “ الصفة اسم ” and the word “ سرر” is “ اسم

) which is a broken plural ”موصوف تكسير جمع ) of سريـر (couch). It is a non living being object

( عاقل غير ).

And in the second example, the word موضوعة (set at hand or placed ready) is الصفة (the

adjective), and the word أكواب (cups/goblets) is الموصوف (the prescribed) both form a

broken plural ( تكسير جمع ) of كوب (cup/goblet). It is a non living being object ( عاقل غير ).

The Difference in Arabic Construction for a Simple Sentence تدأ خبر و مبـ and for Adjective

and its Noun ( وصوف م و صفة ):

تدأ و الخبر المبـ (The Subject and the Predicate)

الصفة الموصوف و (The Prescribed and the Adjective)

البـيت كبير The house is big.

البـيت الكبير The big house

العبد صالح The slave is pious.

العبد الصالح The pious slave

المسلم صادق The Muslim is truthful.

المسلم الصادق The truthful Muslim

الصراط مستقيم The path is straight

الصراط المستقيم The straight path

العم صالح The uncle is pious

العم الصالح The pious uncle

الخالة صالحة The aunt is pious

الخالة الصالحة The pious aunt

78

ب الا ۔3.2 مرك

ال ضافي

The Relative Compound

المضاف إليه The Determining and

the Annexed Noun

المضاف The Determined Noun

عبد الله

إليه مضاف

(Possessor)

مضاف

(Possessed)

The Relative Compound ضافى المركب الإ

79

Introduction to 2nd part of Unit No.03 In this 2nd part of unit, you will study about المركب الإ ضافى (the relative compound). It is

a compound of two nouns in which the first noun is attributed to the second one, e.g.,

.(The book of Allah) كتاب الله

After a brief introduction to this relative compound, there are some examples of both:

incomplete and complete compound ( ب Vقص و 6م مرك ) from Al-Quran and from sentences

of daily usage. Subsequently, you will study the ten rules that apply to the relative

compound/phrase or annexation or possessive expression ( اضافة).

Objectives of 2nd part of Unit No.03

When you complete the study of this 2nd part of Unit No.03 completely and thoroughly,

you will be able to gain the following objectives:

1. to define the relative compound ( ضافى المركب الإ ) and the annexation/the possessive

expression ( الإضافة). 2. to know how the relative compound اضافى مركب in the incomplete compound ( قصV مركب),

is used in complete compound ( مركب 6م).

3. to know the examples of مركب اضافى from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.

4. to know the examples of مركب اضافى (relative compound) from sentences of daily usage.

5. to know about the basic and fundamental rules which apply to the annexation ( ضافة الإ ) or

the relative compound ( ضافى المركب الإ ).

80

ضافی المركب الا ۔3.2The Relative Compound/Phrase

تـعريـفهضاف م الثانى يسمى س الإ و م الأول يسمى المضاف لإس ، ا ين سم هو مجموعة الإ ی المركب الإضاف

إليه الم

رشيد.ل: كتاب الطالب، قـلم ث م The relative compound is a combination of two nouns. The first noun is called المضاف(the determined noun) and the second is called المضاف إليه (the annexed and the

determining noun): e.g., book of the student, pen of Rasheed etc.

In this compound/phrase, the first noun is attributed to the second one, as in these two

examples, the book is attributed to the student and the pen is attributed to Rasheed.

This relation (attribution) between the two nouns is called الإضافة (the annexation)17.

۔)أى كتاب لطالب (ل: كتاب طالب ث حرف الجر م ر تـقدي لى ع سمين نسبة بين الإ ى والإضافة ه

The annexation (al-idhaafah) in a relationship between two nouns with a hidden particle

of Jarr, e.g., “book of a student” means book for a student.

Examples of the Relative Compound/ Phrase from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem:

مركب fقص Incomplete Compound

مفيدة جملة غير Unbeneficial Sentence

مركب wم Complete Compound

جملة مفيدة Beneficial Sentence

قرية صحاب ال

اThe dwellers of the Town

قرية صحاب ال

ا

هم مثلاب ل واضر

And put forward to them a similitude: the (story of the) dwellers of the town (36:13).

مدينة قصى ال

ا

The farthest part of the town

مدينة قصى ال

وجاء » اAnd there came a man running from the farthest part of the

town (36:20).

م ا|ت ربهThe signs of Lord

م وما تيهم » اية » ا|ت ربهتا

And never came an Ayat (sign) from among the Aya’t18 of

their Lord (36:46).

17 Or called the genitive construction, because the first part of relative compound is المضاف constructive, and the

second one إليه المضاف is genitive.18 “Aya’t” means proofs, evidences, verses, lessons, revelations, etc.

81

ة ن

صحاب الج ا

The Dwellers of the

paradise

اكهون يوم في شغل ف

ة ال ن

صحاب الج

ن ا اVerily, the dwellers of the paradise, that day, will be busy

with joyful things (36:55).

ماوات رب السLord of the heaven

رض وما بينهماماوات والا رب الس

Lord of the heavens and the earth, and all that is between

them (37:5).

ضل الله » ف

The Bounty of Allah

ضل الله وابتغوا » ف

And seek the bounty of Allah (by working) (62:10).

فصل م ال Ã

The Day of Decision

Äن ميقا

فصل كام ال Ã ن ا

Verily, the Day of Decision is a fixed time (78:17).

عيم النة نضر

The brightness of delight

النعيم ة في وجوههم نضر

تعرف

You will recognize in their faces the brightness of delight (83:24).

اسم ربك The Name of Lord

Gح اسم ربك الا سب

Glorify the name of your Lord, the most high (87:1).

ÏΘ$ yèsÛ È Å3ó¡ Ïϑø9$#

Feeding of the poor

مسكين طعام ال G ون

اض

ولا تحAnd urge not one another on the feeding of the poor (89:18).

الله

رسول

The Messenger of Allah

هم ل

قال

ف الله

رسول

But the Messenger of Allah said to them: (91:13).

اكمين

الح

حكم ا

The best of the judges

اكمين

الح

حكم با يس الله

ل

اIs not Allah the best of judges? (95:08).

قدر ة ال

يل

ل

The Night of Decree

قدر بسم ة ال

يل

ناه في ل

ل Ê

ا

ª حيم ا ن الر حم الر قدر Oالله ال

ة

يل

دراك ما ل

Oوما ا

ةيل

ل

ف شهر ل

قدر خير » ا ال

Verily, we have sent it (Al-Quran) down in the Night of Decree. And what will make you know what the Night of Decree is? The Night of Decree is better than a thousand months (97:1-3).

نصر اللهThe Help of Allah

فتح وال ذا جاء نصر الله ا

When there comes the help of Allah (110:1).

د� اللهThe Deen of Allah

يت ا واجاورا

ف

ا ون في د� اللهاس يدخل لن

And you see the people enter Allah’s Deen (Islam) in crowds (110:2).

82

Use of Relative Phrase in Sentences of Daily Usage:

قـلم الأستاذ Teacher’s pen

الطاولة قـلم الأستاذ على The teacher’s pen is on the table.

مكتب المدير The director’s office

مكتب المدير قريب من مكتبى The director’s office is near to my office.

مسجد الجامعة The mosque of university

الجامعة كبير و واسع مسجد The mosque of the university is big and vast.

رأس الرجل The man’s head

هذا رأس الرجل This is the man’s head.

حكم القرأن The command of Al-Quran

ات هذا هوحكم القرأن فى الحقوق والواجب This is the command of Al-Quran about rights and obligations.

حقوق الوالدين The parent’s rights

حقوق الوالدين كثيرة جداThe parent’s rights are very much.

احترام الأستاذ The teacher’s respect

جدا الأستاذ مهم احترام The teacher’s respect is really necessary.

دعوة الرسول The Prophet’s call

هذه دعوة الرسول It is the Prophet’s call.

رس كتاب المد The teacher’s book

رس هذا كتاب المد This is the teacher’s book.

ب غرفة [ The door of room

ب غرفة المدير مفتـوح [ The door of the director’s room is opened.

اب قـواعد المرك ��الإض� � في (The Rules of the Relative Compound/Phrase)

The following rules apply to the relative phrase or the annexation ( ضافة :(الإ1. To convey the meaning of “of” ضمة (dhammah), pesh (ـ) is placed on the first word, and

.on the second word, e.g (--◌ --) (double kasra) كسر6ن

i. (Hud’s people) قـوم هود

ii. محمد ت بـي (Muhammad’s house).

iii. كتاب طالب (A student’s book).

iv. لباس رجل (A man’s dress).

v. .(A women’s voice) صوت إمرأة

83

2. As usual, if the second word has “ أل” attached to it, instead of كسر6ن (double kasra) (-

◌--), the single kasra(ـ) is placed on the second word, e.g.

i. بـيت الله (Allah’ house).

ii. ق الله خل (Allah’ creation).

iii. حكم القرآن (The command of Al-Quran).

iv. رسالة الصديق (The friend’ letter).

v. لبن البـقرة (The milk of cow).

In these incomplete sentences, every first word is مضاف and every second word is مضاف

ه ي ل إ which is in genitive case ( ة جري حالة ).

In the above mentioned examples, it .(determined noun) مضاف is never placed on ”ال “ .3

will be incorrect to say: اللبن البـقرة، الحكم القرآن، البـيت الله. 4. Like “ تـنوين ,”ال (tanwin) they are also never placed on مضاف. In the above mentioned

examples, it will be incorrect to say, الله ، رسالة الصديق، بـيت البـقرة لبن .

5. If المضاف is a تـثنية (dual) or مذكر سالم جمع (sound plural masculine), إعرابى نـون is dropped,

e.g.

Sentence with نـون اعرابى Sentence without نـون اعرابى كتا[ن الطالب

Two books of the student.

كتا[ الطالب Two books of the student.

مسلمون الهند The Muslims of India.

مسلموا الهند The Muslims of India.

يدان أبى لهب Abi Lahab, two hands (111:1).

يدا أبى لهب The two hands of Abi Lahab (111:1).

[[ن المسجد Two doors of the mosque.

[[ المسجد Two doors of the mosque.

طالبـتان الجامعة Two (female) students of the university.

طالبـتا الجامعة Two (female) students of the university.

is سيارة Here .(the director, car) سيارة المدير ,.e.g ,مضاف اليه always comes before المضاف .6

اليه المضاف is المدير and المضاف .

84

المضاف .7 may be مرفـوع (nominative), may be منصوب (accusative) and may be مجرور

(genitive), e.g.

المرفـوع المضاف المنصوب المضاف المضاف المجرور كتاب الطالب

The student’ book

كتاب الطالب قرأت I read the student’ book.

قرأت فى كتاب الطالب I read the student’ book

جرة [ب الحThe door of the room.

جرة مفتـوح ان [ب الحVerily, the door of the room is

opened.

الحجرة نظرت إلى [ب I saw to the door of the

room.

◌ كتاب الله Allah’s book.

ان كتاب الله Vفع Verily, Allah’s book is beneficial.

الله قرأت فى كتاب I read in Allah’s book.

8. If the مضاف اليه is معرفة (definite), the مضاف will become معرفة (definite), e.g., هذا كتابرسالمد (This is the teacher’s book). Here and (definite) معرفة and it is مضاف is هذا كتاب

رس المد is مضاف إليه and it is also معرفة .

مضاف مضاف إليهرس المد هذا كتاب

معرفة معرفة 9. There may be more than one اليه مضاف in one اضافة (Idhaafah), e.g.

مركب fقص Incomplete Compound

مركب wم Complete Compound

ين مالك يـوم الدSovereign of the Day of

Recompense. All (Praise) is (due) to Allah, Rabb of the world. The Most Gracious, the Most Merciful. Sovereign of the Day of Recompense.

�� ۔�� ۔ ��

غرفة عميد الكلية Room of the Dean of the

faculty

لة يـ غرفة عميد الكلية واسعة و جمRoom of the Dean of the faculty is spacious and beautiful.

صلى الله عليه وسلمبنت رسول الله The daughter of Allah’s

Prophet(صلى الله عليه وسلم)

؟صلى الله عليه وسلمرسول الله )رضى الله عنها(هل فاطمة بنت Is Fatima رضى الله عنها the daughter of Allah’s Prophet (صلى الله عليه وسلم)?

صالحة [ب بـيت The gate of Saleha’s home

[ب بـيت صالحة هذا This is the gate of Saleha’s home.

85

10. If حرف النداء (Interjection) comes before المضاف, it is read as .e.g ,19 منصوب

Relative Compound without حرف نداء Relative Compound with حرف النداء عبد الله

Allah’s slave \عبد الله

O! Allah’s slave. طالب الجامعة

The students of the university \ طالب الجامعة

O! Students of university. رئيس المدرسة

The principle of the school \ رئيس المدرسة

O! principle of the school أبـو بكر

Abu Bakr (the father of Bakr) \ ا[ بكر

O! Abu Bakr. صديق أخى

My brother, friend أخى \ صديق

O! my brother’ friend. 11. The adjective of a construct comes after the genitive; as:

i. ابن الرجل الصالح (The man’s good son).

ii. بنت الرجل الصالحة (The man’s good daughter).

iii. ياسية حقوق المرأة الس (The women’s political rights).

افالمض .12 is often attached with a personal as مضاف اليه, e.g., ته his) بستانه ,(his house) بـيـ

garden), علمهن (their knowledge).

When a noun is annexed to an attached personal pronoun, it will be in the following pattern:

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

قـلمهم Their pen

قـلمهماTheir pen

قـلمه His pen


قـلمهن Their pen

قـلمهماTheir pen

قـلمهاHer pen


قـلمكم Your pen

قـلمكماYour pen

قـلمك Your pen


قـلمكن Your pen

قـلمكماYour pen

قـلمك Your pen


قـلمناOur pen

قـلمناOur pen

قـلمىMy pen


19 If the noun is not المضاف, it is called منادى مفرد, and is مرفـوع, but has no تـنوين (tanwin), e.g., طالب\ (O student), محمد\ (O

Muhammad). If المنادى is with “ ايـها ,”ال for مذكر (masculine) and أيـتـها for مونث (feminine) is placed after \, e.g., ايـها\.(!O self! O soul) \ ايـتـها النـفس ,(O mankind) الناس

86

If any preposition ( جر حروف ) is prefixed to any attached noun with personal pronoun,

ته بـي ـ ,.e.g ,(kasra) كسرة is changed into (dammah) ضمة (his house),

بـيته فى (in his house), تـهما فى ,(your house) بـيتك ,(in their house) فى بـيتهما ,(their house) بـيـيتك ب ـ (in your house), نÑبـيـو (their house), نÑفى بـيـو (in their house), etc.

All the above attached personal pronouns are indeclinable ( مبنى), and remain in their

original form even as اليه المضاف , however, they are considered in genitive place محل فى

مجرور محلاor ß جر .

13. The اضافة (Idhafah) construction has a حرف الجر which is omitted/hidden. This الجر حرف gives

meaning to the اضافة (Idhafah). There are three different حروف الجر that اضافة can have:

)اللام(ل .3 (from/part of) من .2 (in) فى .1 (for/belonging to).

At the moment we have only taken one meaning of الإضافة (the Idhafah) the م حرف (ل ) اللارشيد كتاب which has the meaning of for/belonging to/possession. So we have say الجر , it

literally means “the book belongs to Rasheed or Rasheed’s book) لرشيد كتاب .

كتاب رشيد المضاف المضاف اليه

مجرور دائما Always Majroor

ن يـنـو لا Does not accept tanween

لا يـقبل ال Does not accept alif laam.

14. In Arabic, the construction of مضاف and اليه مضاف automatically takes care of the “ ’s”

or “of” as shown in the above mentioned examples.

15. The construction of مضاف and اليه مضاف automatically implies specific person or thing.

Therefore, “he” is always added in English translation of this phrase, e.g.

Relative Phrase English Translation

الصلاة إقامة 1 The establishment of prayer.

.The obedience to parents اطاعة الوالدين 2

.The Allah’s earth ارض الله 3

.The people’s rebellion طغيان الناس 4

.The house of the Hereafter دار الآخرة 5

.The sinner’s food طعام الأثيم 6

87

.The Allah’s words كلام الله 7

صلى الله عليه وسلمسنة الرسول 8 The Messenger’s (صلى الله عليه وسلم) way.

نسان 9 .The man’s doubts ريب الإ

ن ذكر الرحم 10 The remembrance of the Most Beneficent.

.The Allah’s Grace فضل الله 11

ين 12 .The Day of Judgment يـوم الد

.The student’s book كتاب الطالب 13

.On the teacher’s desk على مكتب المدرس 14

.The door of the house [ب البـيت 15

.The Imam of the mosque امام مسجد 16

Note: 1. The possessed noun (Mudhaf) takes different cases while the mudhaf ilaihi (the

possessor) takes the genitive case only (see example no. 14, 15).

2. The Mudhaf is definite by position, while the mudhaf ilaili can either be definite ( ة معرف )

or indefinite ( نكرة). (See example no. 16, 17).

المكالمة بين سعيد و sسر The Conversation Between Saeed and Yasir

Translation Arabic Saeed: Is this Muhammad’s book? Yasir: No, this is Hamid’s book.

سعيد: أكتاب محمد هذا؟ كتاب حامد.\سر: لا، هذا

Saeed: Where is Muhammad’s book? Yasir: It is there on the desk.

سعيد: أين كتاب محمد؟\سر: هو على المكتب هناك.

Saeed: Where is Ammar’s note book? Yasir: It in on the teacher’s desk.

دفتر عمار؟سعيد: أين المدرس. \سر: هو على مكتب

Saeed: Whose pen is this? Yasir: This is the teacher’s pen.

من هذا؟ سعيد: قـلم .رس سر: هذا قـلم المد \

Saeed: Where is the teacher’s bag? Yasir: It is under the desk.

بة المد رس؟سعيد: أين حقيـ \سر: هى تحت المكتب.

88

QUESTIONS

ةسئل


سئل

جب e الا :ا

ـ ی ف ي التـوص ركب م ال عرف ـ 1 ب ـ 2 ـ ی ف ي التـوص [لمركب المتـعلقة القواعد أهم ينفة التي دة ي ف الم مل الج اكتب ـ 3 هاالص ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى والموصوف وتـرجمها فيـفة في الجنس سم ا ها مطابـقة ي ـف التي الجمل اكتب ـ 4 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى ثم تـرجمها الموصوف والصفة الموصوف سم ا ها في ـ التي الجمل اكتب ـ 5 نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى والنكرة ثم تـرجمها ة ف ر المع سم ا في والصفة ف الموصو مطابـقة هافي ـ التي الجمل اكتب ـ 6 عراب و تـرجمها في والص ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى الإفة ها في ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 7 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها والموصوف ثم الصضافي ا المركب هافي ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 8 نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم )ه ي ل مضاف ا و اف ض (م لإ ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم )الإضافي ب المرك ( إليه ومضاف المضاف هافي ـ التي الجمل اكتب ـ 9

ـ 10 ضافي المركب قـواعد بين ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى الأمثلة و تـرجمها ذكر مع الإ و\سر سعيد بين مكالمة ال إلى نظرا والطالب الأستاذ بين المكالمة اجعل ـ 11

89

وحدة

اء :الرابعة ال سم

� � � � � � � � الاUnit No.04-The Nouns-4

شارى ۔4.1 المركب الإThe Demonstrative Composite/Pharase

المركب الجارى ۔4.2The Genitive/Prepositional Composite

) 1(المركب العددى ۔4.3

The Addadi/Numeral Composite (1)



�مید خان عبا�� الأستاذ الدکتور : إعداد�عبد ا

شکیل احمد الأستاذ ا1�اضر :راجعالم

Written by : Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Reviewed by : Mr. Shakeel Ahmad

90

شارى ۔4.1 ب الا مرك

ال

The Demonstrative Composite/Phrase

اسم الإشارة (The Demonstrative Pronouns)

للبعيد (For distance)

للقريب (For near)

مشار اليه (The Demonstrated Noun)

أولئك -ذانك -لك ذ أولئك -6نك -تلك

ؤلاء ه -ذان ه -ذاه ؤلاء ه -ها6ن -ذه ه

اسم الإشارة (The Demonstrative Pronouns)

The Demonstrative Composite

المركب الإشارى

91

Introduction to 1st part of Unit No.04 The 1st part of this Unit is about المركب الإشارى (the demonstrative composite/phrase)

which is the type of incomplete composite ( Vقص مركب ). This composite consists of merely

two parts:

شارة In .(The demonstrated noun) مشار إليه and (the demonstrative pronoun/noun) اسم الإ

these two parts of اشارى مركب , there is always a coordination/ agreement ( مطابـقة) in العدد (number), الجنس (gender), الوسعة (the capacity, معرفة ونكرة) and in اب ر ع لإ ا (case-ending). Or

(Declension)

Insha Allah, you will find that all the sentences in this unit confirm to the above

mentioned four rules.


After completing this first part of Unit No.04, you would be able:

1. to define المركب الإشارى (the demonstrative composite).

2. to identify the two parts of : مركب اشارى . مشار إليه and اسم اشارة

3. to present the examples of demonstrative composite from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.

4. to present the examples of demonstrative phrase from daily usage sentences.

5. to know about the demonstrative pronouns for both near and far.

( شارة للقريب أسماء و البعيد الإ ).

92

شارى ۔4.1 المركب الإThe Demonstrative Composite

مجموعة اسم الإشارة و مشار إليه.المركب الإشارى هو The demonstrative composite/phrase is the combination of شارة the demonstrating) اسم الإ

pronoun) and مشار إليه (the demonstrated noun), e.g., هذا الكتاب (this book), القلم ذلك (that

pen), هؤلاء الطلاب (these students), اولئك الرجال (those men), etc.

In these examples, the first word is called اسم الإشارة and second word is مشار إليه. When

these two words are joined together, they constitute a composite or a phrase or a sentence

which is called قصV مركب (incomplete composite/phrase/ sentence). This kind of

sentence is known as جملة غير مفيدة (unbeneficial sentence). So, the demonstrative

composite is a kind of incomplete composite ( بات الناقصة .(المركUses of Demonstrative Phrase in Sentences of Daily Usage

(This) هذا .1

In complete مركب fقص Composite

Complete Composite مركب wم

اسرتىهذا الرجل من This man هذا الرجل This man is from my family.

.This book is for the M.A هذا الكتاب لطلاب الماجستير This book هذا الكتاب students.

This door is one among هذا الباب من ابـواب المسجد This door هذا الباب the doors of the mosque.

ساتذة هذا العميد من الأ This Dean هذا العميد This Dean is from teachers.

هذا المكتب لمدير This office هذا المكتب المركز الإسلامى

This office is for the

Director of Islamic Center.

(.These two m) هذان .2



من طلاب الدكتـوراه هذان الطالبان These two students هذان الطالبان These two students are

from the students of Ph.D.

الرجلان هذان These two men مجتهدان جدا هذان الرجلان These two men are very hard working.

These two teachers are هذان المدرسان من [كستان These two teachers هذان المدرسان from Pakistan.

العالمان هذان These two scholars هذان العالمان من علماء الإسلام These two scholars are from the scholars of Islam.

93

These two pupils are هذان التلميذان شريـران These two pupils هذان التلميذان naughty.


Incomplete مركب fقص Composite


All these men are from هؤلاء الرجال كلهم من [كستان These men هؤلاء الرجال Pakistan.

هؤلاء العلماء من علماء These scholars هؤلاء العلماء التـفسير و الحديث

These scholars are from the scholars of Tafseer and Hadith.

هؤلاء الصلحاء

These pious (people)

All these pious people هؤلاء الصلحاء كلهم من المسلمين are Muslims.

These doctors are from هؤلاء الأطباء من ايـران These doctors هؤلاء الأطباء Iran.

هؤلاء الطلاب من These students هؤلاء الطلاب طلاب البكالوريـوس

These students are from the B.A. students.

(This) هذه .4



ة جدا This student هذه الطالبة This student is very هذه الطالبة مجتهدhard working.

This car is made in هذه السيارة مصنـوعة من اليا[ن This car هذه السيارة Japan.

هذه الجامعة من الجامعات This university هذه الجامعة الإسلامية

This university is from

Islamic Universities.

المعلمات هذه These teachers هذه المعلمات مجتهدات جدا These teachers are very hard working.

These nurses are from هذه الممرضات من انجلتر These nurses هذه الممرضات England.

(These) هاwن .5



6ن These two students ها6ن الطالبـتان These students are hard ها6ن الطالبـتان مجتهدworking.

الطاولتان جديد6ن ها6ن These two tables ها6ن الطاولتان These two tables are new.

6نيـر شر ها6ن التـلميذ6ن These two pupils ها6ن التلميذ6ن These two pupils are naughty.

مفتـوحتان ها6ن النافذ6ن These two windows ها6ن النافذ6ن These two windows are open.

94

ها6ن الساعتان

These two watches ها6ن الساعتان جديد6ن These two watches are new.

(These female) هؤلاء .6



These daughters are هؤلاء البـنات طالبات These daughters هؤلاء البـنات students.

علمات علمات مجتهدات These teachers هؤلاء الم

These teachers are hard هؤلاء المworking.

بات هؤلاء الطبيـ These doctors بات ماهرات These doctors are هؤلاء الطبيـexperts.

هؤلاء الزوجات

These wives هؤلاء الزوجات مطيعات لأزواجهن These wives are obedient to their husband.

الممرضات هؤلاء These nurses نشيطات جداهؤلاء الممرضات These nurses are very active.

(حالة نصبية ) Accusative Case (These two) هذين .7 In-complete مركب fقص

Composite Complete Composite مركب wم

الجامعة رأيت هذين الولدين فى These two boys هذان الولدان I saw these two boys in the university.

هذان الأستاذان

These two teachers لقيت هذين الأستاذين فى المسجد بـعد الصلاة

I met these two teachers in the mosque after the prayer.

.I read these two books قـرأت هذين الكتابين These two books هذان الكتا[ن

تان البـيـتين اشتريت هذين These two houses هذان البـيـ I bought these two houses.

هذان المسجدان

These two mosques المسجدين هل رأيـتم هذين قـبل هذا الوقت؟

Have you seen these two mosques before this time?

(حالة جرية ) Genitive Case (These two) هذان .8



.I saw these two boys نظرت إلى هذين الولدين These two boys هذان الولدان

.I read these two books قرأت فى هذين الكتابين These two books هذان الكتا[ن

المنـزلان هذان These two houses انظر إلى هذين المنـزلين Look at these two houses.

95

I prayed in these two صليت فى هذين المسجدين These two mosques هذان المسجدان mosques.

\ن عت عن هذين These two soldiers هذان الجند ينين الجند أV سمما من المسلمين أ«

I heard about these two soldiers that both of

them are Muslims.

) Accusative Case (.These two f) هاwن .9 الة نصبية ح )



These two ها6ن الطالبـتان

students I advised these two نصحت هاتين الطالبـتين

students (f.).

.I bought these two cars اشتريت هاتين السيارتين These two cars ها6ن السيار6ن

I cleaned these two نظفت هاتين الغرفـتين These two rooms ها6ن الغرفـتان rooms.

Have you broken these هل كسرت هاتين المنضدتين These two tables ها6ن المنضد6ن two tables?

الإمرأ6ن ها6ن These two

women مرأتين I saw these two رأيت هاتين الإ

women.

(These two f.g.-Genitive Cases) هاwن .10


Complete مركب wم Composite

These two note ها6ن الكراستان books

Who wrote in these من كتب فى هاتين الكراستين two note books?

ها6ن السجاد6ن

These two carpets من فضلكم اجلسوا على هاتين السجادتين

Please sit on these

two carpets.

الشجر6ن ها6ن These two trees انظر إلى هاتين الشجرتين Look at these two trees.

يـقتين تكلمت مع هاتين الصد These two friends ها6ن الصديـقتان I talked to these two friends.

Look at these two انظر إلى هاتين البـقرتين These two cows ها6ن البـقر6ن cows.

In the above mentioned 50 sentences, the following demonstrative pronouns/ nouns for

near ( الإشارة للقريب ء اسما ) are used:

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هؤلاء All these (m.)

هذان/ هذين These two (m.)

هذاThis

ر ك ذ م

هؤلاء All these (f.)

ها6ن/ هاتين These two (f.)

هذه This

ث ن ؤ م

96

Use of Demonstration Composite ( اشارى مركب ) in Sentences of Daily Usage

(That) ذلك .1



.That book is very useful ذلك الكتاب مفيد جدا That book ذلك الكتاب

That man is an expert ذلك الرجل طبيب ماهر That man ذلك الرجل doctor.

That student is from ذلك الطالب من أفريـقا That student ذلك الطالب Africa.

مغلق وهذا مفتوح ذلك الباب That gate ذلك الباب That gate is closed and this is opened.

.That driver is very expert ذلك السائق حاذق That driver ذلك السائق

(.Those two m) ذانك .2



الولدان مطيعان ذانك .Those two boys ذانك الولدان Those two boys are obedient.

Those two books are very ذانك الكتا[ن Vفعان جدا .Those two books ذانك الكتا[ن beneficial.

/Those two bulls ذانك الثـوران oxes.

Those two bulls are for ذانك الثوران للذبح slaughter.

سان Those two ذانك المهند engineers.

سان جديدان Those two engineers are ذانك المهندnew.

ذانك الصديـقان

Those two friends. ذانك الصديـقان طالبان فى الجامعة

Those two friends are students in the university.

ئك أول .3 (All those m.)



ئك الرجال أول Those men بـون حاذقـون جداأول ئك الرجال طبيـ All those men are very expert.

ئك أول الطلاب

Those students ئك الطلاب كلهم أول يدرسون فى المركز

All those students study/ are studying in the Islamic center.

ئك الصلحاء أول Those pious (people)

الصلحاء من المديـنة المنـورة ئك أول Those pious (people) are

from Al-Madinah Al-

Munawarah.

ئك التجار أول Those traders ئك التجار كلهم أول حاذقـون فى مجالهم

All those traders are expert in their fields.

97

ئك الفلاحون أول Those farmers ئك الفلاحون من القرىأول Those farmers are from the villages.

(.That f) تلك .4



النافذة مفتـوحة تلك That window تلك النافذة That window is opened.

.That woman is pious تلك المرأة صالحة That woman تلك المرأة

That blackboard is very تلك السبـورة قديمة جدا That blackboard تلك السبـورة old.

الممسحة تلك That duster تلك الممسحة جديدة That duster is new.

لة و معروفة That picture تلك الصورة يـ That picture is beautiful تلك الصورة جمand famous.

مليحة تلك البطلة That hero تلك البطلة That heroin is pretty.

w (Those two f.)نك .5



Those two 6نك المدرستان Teachers

6نك المدرستان تدرسان فى الجامعة

Those two teachers are

teaching at the university.

ستان Those two 6نك المهندengineers

ستان من اليا[ن Those (two lady) 6نك المهندengineers are from Japan.

Those two trees are very 6نك الشجر6ن طويـلتان جدا Those two trees 6نك الشجر6ن tall.

Those two 6نك الكراستان notebooks

Those two notebooks are 6نك الكراستان لأحمد for Ahmad.

الطالبـتان 6نك Those two students

6نك الطالبـتان مجتهد6ن و نشيطتان

Those two students are hard working and active

ئك أول .6 (All those f.)



ئك الممرضات أول Those nurses ئك الممرضات كلهن أول ىيـعملن فى المستشف

All those nurses are working in the hospital.

ئك النساء أول Those women ئك النساء كلهن صالحات أول All those women are pious.

ئك الطالبات أول Those students ئك الطالبات يدرسن أول ين فى كلية اصول الد

Those students are studying in the Faculty of Usul-ud-din.

ئك الدراجات أول Those bicycles قط ئك الدراجات للأطفال ف ـأول Those bicycles are for children only.

ئك الدجاجات أول Those chickens ئك الدجاجات كلهن للأكل أول All those chicken are for eating.

98

ئك المسلمات أول Those Muslim women

ئك المسلمات أول عالمات كلهن

All those Muslim women are scholars.

In the above 32 sentences, the following demonstrative pronouns/ nouns for distance

شارة للبعيد ) :are used (أسماء الإ

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ئك أول All those (m.)

ذانك Those two (m.)

ذلك That/ this

ر ك ذ م

ئك أول All those (f.)

6نك Those two (f.)

تلك That/ this

ث ن ؤ م

Note: The accusative and genitive case of ذانك and 6نك is ذينك and تـينك. These forms have

neither been used in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem nor in the modern usage except ذانك. Keep in mind that in a demonstrative phrase/composite, there is always an agreement

between اسم الإشارة and مشار إليه in the following aspects:

.(gender) الجنس .2 .(numbers) العدد .1

عراب .4 .(معرفة و نكرة -capacity) الوسعة .3 .(case-ending) الإ

99

ارى ۔4.2

ب الج مرك

ال

The Genitive/Prepositional Composite

المجرور اسم The Genitive Noun

حرف الجر The Preposition

The Genitive/Prepositional Composite

المركب الجارى

100

المركب الجارى ۔4.2The Genitive/Prepositional Composite

مجموعة حرف الجر و اسم المجرور.: المركب الجارى هو ه تـعريـف The genitive composite/phrase is the combination of الجر حرف (the particle of Jarr) and

المجرور اسم (the genitive noun).

When any جر حرف (preposition) enters upon a اسم (noun), it changes/converts it from

nominative case ( حالة رفعية) or accusative case ( نصبية ة حال ) to genitive case ( جرية حالة ).

So, if حرف جر and are joined together, it constitutes a compound or a phrase or اسم مجرور

a sentence, e.g. فى (in) and الجيب are two مفرد (mufrad) words. But, if they are joined as

الجيب فى (in the pocket), it becomes an incomplete phrase or composite or sentence which

is called مركب جارى (genitive/prepositional composite).

In short, when prepositions, present before a noun, make its end in jarr or the genitive

case. There are seventeen prepositions as such:

،مذ، خلا ، ذ ن اؤ، م و و،م ، لا و اف ـؤ، ك ؤ، 6 [ ، إلى تى ، ح لى ، ع ن ، ع ا، فى د ، ع ا، من اش ، ح ب ر

The prepositions can be divided in to two groups: attached and detached or inseparable

and separable prepositions20:

1. Inseparable/attached prepositions: These are four:

i. (bi) ب ii. (ta) ت

iii. (lam) ل iv. .(ka) ك

2. Separable/detached prepositions: These are Thirteen:

i. (fi) فى ii. (un) عن iii. (ala) على .iv (min) من

v. vi .(ila) إلى (waw) و vii مذ (muz)

viii ذمن (munz) ix خلا (khala) x رب (rubba)

xi حاشا (hasha) xii (Ada) عدا xiii حتی(hatta)

20 See unit no.1, part 3, which is about prepositions ( حروف جر).

101

عددى ۔4.3ب ال

مرك

)1(ال

The Addadi/Numeral Composite(1)

المعدود The Numbered Noun

العدد The Number

The Addadi/Numeral Composite

المركب العددى

102


This 3rd part of unit no.04 is a very important which is about المركب العددى (the addadi

compound/ phrase), and consists of the following points:

1. Definition of مركب عددى 2. Some examples of العدد (the number) and المعدود (the counted/numbered noun) from Al-

Quran Al-Hakeem.

3. Use of مركب عددى in sentences of daily usage.

4. The rules for number one (1) and number two (2).

5. The rules for numbers 3 to 10, and the utilization of these numbers in sentences.

6. The rules for numbers 11 and 12, and the usage of these two numbers in sentences of

daily usage.

7. The accusative and the genitive case of the numbers 11 and 12.

8. The rules for numbers 13 to 19, and usage of these numbers in daily sentences.

9. The rule for the uqood ( عقود), and usage of these two numbers in daily sentences.

10. Methods for reading the Arabic numbers.

11. The rules for numbers 21 and 22, and usage of these two numbers in daily sentences.

12. The rules for numbers 23 to 29, and usage of these numbers in daily sentences.

13. The ordinal numbers from 1st to 29th, and usage of these ordinal numbers in sentences of

daily usage.

14. Some fractions and their examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem. Leady


After going through this 3rd part of Unit No.04, which is very essential, you will be able:

1. to define the Addadi compound ( المركب العددى). 2. to present the examples of عدد and معدود from Al-Quran Al-Majeed.

3. to use the Arabic number in sentences of daily usage from number one onwards.

103

4. to know the rules for number one onwards together with the عقود (uqud).

5. to read the Arabic numbers like 101, 1940, 2,755, 2009, etc.

6. to know the rules of ordinal number from 1st onwards, and to use these numbers in

sentences of daily usage.

7. to know the fractions and their examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.

104


The Addadi Composite (1)

العدد والمعدود المركب العدددى هو مجموعة :تـعريـفة Definition: The Addadi Composite is the combination of the number ( العدد) and the counted

noun ( المعدود, Al-madud).

When two words are joined together, it constitutes a Composite, or a phrase or a sentence

كتاب words. But when they are joined as (mufrad) مفرد are two واحد and كتاب ,.e.g ,جملة it becomes an ,(three books) كتب ثلاثة ,(two books) كتا[ن اثـنان ,(one book) واحد

incomplete Composite or phrase. The first part of this incomplete Composite is called

.(the numbered noun) المعدود and the second is called (the numbers) العدد

So, the murakkab ( المركب) which is made from the number ( العدد) and the counted noun

.(the Addadi c Composite) المركب العددى is (المعدود )


Quranic Verses English Translation

ö/ä3ßγ≈s9Î) uρ ×µ≈s9Î) Ó‰Ïn≡ uρ And your Ilah (Allah) is one Ilah(Allah) (2:163).

z óÁ −/u�tItƒ £ ÎγÅ¡à�Ρr' Î/ sπyè t/ö‘r& 9� åκ ô−r& #Z� ô³tãuρ (The widows) they shall wait concerning themselves four months and ten days (2:234).

y7ù=Ï? ×οu�|³tã ×' s# ÏΒ% x. This makes ten days in all (2:196).

öΝs9 r& t� s? ’n< Î) tÏ% ©!$# (#θ ã_t� yzÏΒ öΝ ÏδÌ�≈tƒ ÏŠ öΝ èδ uρ î∃θä9é&

Did you not turn your vision to those who

abandoned their homes, and they were thousands

(in number) (2:243).

t Ï%©! $# ã≅ sW ¨Β tβθ à)Ï�Ζãƒ óΟ ßγ s9≡uθ øΒ r& ’ Îû È≅‹ Î6y™ «! $# È≅ sV yϑx.>π ¬6 ym ôM tF u; /Ρr& yìö7 y™ Ÿ≅Î/$uΖy™ ’Îû Èe≅ä. 7' s#ç7 /Ψ ß™ èπ sT ($ ÏiΒ 7π ¬6ym

The likeness of those who spend their wealth in the way of Allah is as the likeness of a grain (of corn). It grows seven ears, and each ear has a hundred grains (2:261).

Èβ$uΖøO $# # uρ sŒ 5Α ô‰tã öΝ ä3Ζ ÏiΒ (Then take) the testimony of two just men among you (5:106).

š†ÎΤ$rO È ÷oΨ øO $# øŒ Î) $yϑ èδ †Îû Í‘$tóø9$# The second of the two; when they were in the cave (9:40).

ÏMt/ r'‾≈ tƒ ’ÎoΤ Î) àM÷ƒr& u‘ y‰ tnr& u�|³tã $Y6x. öθ x. O my father! Verily, I saw eleven stars (12:4).

ô‰s) s9uρ $oΨ ÷�s?# u 4 y›θãΒ yìó¡ Î@ ¤M≈ tƒ# u ;M≈oΨÉi� t/ And indeed we gave Moses nine clear signs

(17:100).

105

tβθä9θà) u‹ y™ ×π sW≈ n=rO óΟ ßγãèÎ/# §‘ óΟ ßγç6 ù= x.šχθä9θ à)tƒuρ ×π |¡÷Η s~ öΝ åκ ÞUÏŠ$y™ öΝ åκ â:ù= x.

(Some) say they were three, the dog being the

forth among them and (others) say they were five,

the dog being the sixth (18:22).

$ yϑ‾ΡÎ* sù }‘Ïδ ×οt� ô_ y— ×οy‰ Ïn≡ uρ Then it will be a single (compelling) cry (37:19).

… çµè=≈ |Á Ïùuρ tβθèW≈n= rO #�� öκy− And the weaning (period) is thirty months (46:15).

uθ èδ ãΑρ F{ $# ã� Åz Fψ$# uρ He (Allah) is the First (nothing is before Him) and

the Last (nothing is after Him) (57:3).

¢Ο èO ’Îû 7' s# Å¡ù= Å™ $yγ ããö‘ sŒ tβθ ãèö7 y™ %Yæ# u‘ ÏŒ çνθä3 è=ó™ $$sù Then fasten him with a chain whereof the length

is seventy cubits (69:32).

ö≅è% uθèδ ª! $# î‰ym r& Say (O Muhammad SAW), He is Allah, the one

and only (112:1).

Use of مركب عددى in Sentences of Daily Usage According to the Rules for Numbers ( العدد):

الجنس Gender


المركب العددى الناقص The Incomplete Addadi

Comosite

المركب العددى التام The Complete Addadi

Composite

مذكر m.

واحد (One)

رجل واحد One man

هذا رجل واحد This is one man

ر تثنية ك

مذ

Dual (m.)

اثـنان (Two)

اثـنان رجلان Two men

هذان رجلان اثـنان These are two men

مؤنث f.

واحدة (One)

واحدة امرأة One women

تلك امرأة واحدة That is one woman

ث تثنيةمؤن

Dual (f.)

اثـنـتان (Two)

امرأ6ن اثـنـتان Two women

ها6ن امرأ6ن اثـنـتان These are two women

Note: In these examples for masculine singular noun ( مذكر واحد) is رجل واحد (one man), and for

feminine singular noun is واحدة إمرأة (one woman). Similarly اثـنان رجلان (two men), and

.21(two women) إمرأ6ن اثـنـتان

It may be noted that العددى المركب is also التـوصيفى المركب (the adjective composite)

because رجل is موصوف and واحد is صفة.

21 If we say رجل or إمرأة, it means one man or one woman, and رجلان or امرأ6ن, it means two men or two women, even

if العدد (the numbers) واحد / واحدة and اثـنان / اثـنـتان is not mentioned. However, to emphasize, these numbers can be

added.

106

The Rules for 3 to 10:

1. From عدد three to ten, there is no agreement between العدد (the number) and المعدود (the

noun counted/ numbered), i.e., if the معدود is مذكر (masculine) the عدد (number) is مؤنث (feminine).

2. Secondly, the معدود of 3-10 is genitive plural

الجنس Gender


العددى الناقص المركب The Incomplete

Addadi Composite


Composite

ثلاثة مذكر Three

ثلاثة طلاب Three students.

؟هل انـتم ثلاثة طلاب Are you three students?

ثلاث مؤنث Three

ثلاث طالبات Three students.

؟ثلاث طالبات هل أنتن Are you three students?

اربـعة مذكر Four

اربـعة طلاب Four students.

ربـعة طلاب أ هم They are four students.

اربع مؤنث Four

ربع طالبات أ Four students.

ربع طالبات أ ن ه They are four students.

خمسة مذكر Five

خمسة طلاب Five students.

ذهب خمسة طلاب Five students went.

خمس مؤنث Five

خمس طالبات Five students.

ذهبت خمس طالبات Five students went.

ستة مذكر Six

تة طلاب س Six students.

تة طلاب قد كتب س Six students have written.

ست مؤنث Six

ست طالبات Six students.

قد كتـبت ست طالبات Six students have written.

سبـعة مذكر Seven

سبـعة طلاب Seven students.

عة طلاب جاء سبـSeven students come.

سبع مؤنث Seven

سبع طالبات Seven students.

قـتـلت سبع طالبات Seven students killed.

ثمانية مذكر Eight

لاب ثمانية ط Eight students

لاب ثمانية ط دخل Eight students entered.

107

ثمانى مؤنث Eight

ثمانى طالبات Eight students

التحقت ثمانى طالبات هناEight students took admission here.

تسعة مذكر Nine

تسعة طلاب Nine students

التحق تسعة طلاب هناك Nine students took admission there.

تسع مؤنث Nine

تسع طالبات Nine students

جاءت تسع طالبات Nine students come.

عشرة مذكر Ten

عشرة طلاب Ten students

نجح عشرة طلاب Ten students succeeded.

عشر مؤنث Ten

عشر طالبات Ten students

فازت عشر طالبات Ten students successed.

Note: If the numbered noun ( المعدود) is definite ( معرفة), there are two possible constructions: ثلاثة

الثلاثة الأقلام or الأقلام (three pens).

(The Rules for 11 and 12) القواعد لأحد عشر واثنى عشر

The number 11 and 12 agree in gender with the counted noun ( المعدود), and المعدود (the

numbered noun) is accusative singular ( واحد منصوب), e.g.

الجنس Gender


المركب العددى الناقص The Incomplete Addadi

Composite


Composite

حد عشر أ مذكر Eleven

حد عشر رجلا أ Eleven men

حد عشر رجلا أ ذهب Eleven men went.

ةإحدى عشر مؤنث Eleven

إمرأة ةإحدى عشر Eleven women

قد ذهبت إحدى عشر إمرأة Eleven women have gone.

إثـنا عشر مذكر Twelve

رجلا ةإثـنا عشر Twelve men

رجلا ةقد دخل إثـنا عشر Twelve men have entered.

نـتا عشرة ث ـا مؤنث Twelve

عشرة إمرأة نـتا ث ـا Twelve women

ثـنـتا عشرة إمرأة ا قد جاءت Twelve women have come.

Accusative case: رأيت اثنى عشر طالبا (I saw twelve male students).

.(I saw twelve female students) رأيت إثـنتى عشرة طالبة

108

Genitive case:

نـتا عشرة حد أ الحالة النصبية والجرية للعدد ):۱۲،۱۱(عشر/ إحدى عشرة وإثـنا عشر/ إثـ(The Accusative and the Genitive Case of the Number 11 and 12 are as Follow):

11 العدد .1

لبا رأيت احد عشر طا 1.1 I saw eleven (male) students (Accusative case m.).

.I saw eleven (female) students (Accusative case f.) رة طالبة رأيت إحدى عش 1.2

.I looked at eleven (male) students (Genitive case m.) ر طالبارت إلى احد عش ظ ن 1.3

.I looked at eleven (female) students (Genitive case f.) رة طالبة رت إلى إحدى عش ظ ن 1.4

12 العدد .2

.I read twelve books (Accusative case m.) قـرأت اثنى عشر كتا[ 2.1

رة كراسة اشتريت اثـنتى عش 2.2 I bought twelve notebooks (Accusative case f.).

.I read in twelve books (Genitive case m.) قـرأت فى اثنى عشر كتا[ 2.3

.I wrote in twelve notebooks (Genitive case f.) كتـبت فى اثـنتى عشرة كراسة 2.4

من ثلاثة عشر إلى تسعة عشر القواعد للأعداد (The Rules for Numbers 13 to 19)

1. From numbers 13 to 19, the second part of العدد (the number) agrees with المعدود (the

numbered noun), and the first part is opposite gender.

2. The معدود (madud) of 13 to 19 is accusative singular as mentioned below:

الجنس Gender


المركب العددى الناقص The Incomplete

Addadi Composite


Composite

مذكر ثلاثة عشر Thirteen

ثلاثة عشر رجلا Thirteen men

جاء ثلاثة عشر رجلا Thirteen men came.

مؤنث عشرة ثلاث Thirteen

عشرة إمرأة ثلاث Thirteen women

عشرة إمرأة رأيت ثلاث I saw thirteen women.

مذكر ربـعة عشر أ Fourteen

ربـعة عشر رجلا أ Fourteen men

ربـعة عشر رجلا أ نظرت إلى I looked at fourteen men.

مؤنث ربع عشرة أ رة إمرأة عش ربع أ ربع عشرة إمرأة أ قدذهبت

109

Fourteen Fourteen women Fourteen women have gone.

مذكر خمسة عشر Fifteen

خمسة عشر رجلا Fifteen men

رجلا قد أكل خمسة عشر Fifteen men have eaten.

مؤنث عشرة خمس Fifteen

عشرة امرأة خمس Fifteen women

رة امرأة عش س خم قد كتـبت Fifteen women have written.

مذكر ستة عشر Sixteen

ستة عشر رجلا Sixteen men

تكلم ستة عشر رجلا قد Sixteen men have spoken.

ة ر ست عش مؤنث Sixteen

ر إمراة ست عش Sixteen women

قد ذهبن ست عشر إمراة Sixteen women have gone.

مذكر عشر سبـعة Seventeen

رجلا عشر سبـعة Seventeen men

عشر رجلا ؤلاء سبـعة ه There are seventeen men.

مؤنث عشرة سبع Seventeen

عشرة إمرأة سبع Seventeen women

عشرة إمرأة ئك سبع أول That are seventeen women.

مذكر عشر ثمانية Eighteen

عشر رجلا ثمانية Eighteen men

عشر رجلا هل هم ثمانية Are they eighteen men?

مؤنث عشر ثمانى Eighteen

عشر إمرأة ثمانى Eighteen women

؟إمرأة عشر هل أنتن ثمانى Are you eighteen women?

مذكر ة ر تسعة عش Nineteen

رجلا ة تسعة عشر Nineteen men

؟رجلا ة ماجآء تسعة عشر Nineteen men did not come.

مؤنث رة تسع عش Nineteen

رة إمرأة تسع عش Nineteen women

رة إمرأة ماجاءت تسع عش Nineteen women did not come.

(The Rule of the Uqud numbers) القاعدة للعقود

In Arabic, the following numbers are called العقود (the uqud):

ربـعون أ ,(Thirty) ثلاثـون ,(Twenty) عشرون (Forty), خمسون (Fifty), ستـون (sixty), عون سبـ(seventy), ثمانـون (Eighty), تسعون (Ninety). It is the nominative cases

( الة الرفعية الح ), and accusative and genitive form/case ( والجرية النصبية الحالة ) is as below:

ربعين أ ,(30) ثلاثين ,(20) عشرين خمسين ,(40) .(90) تسعين ,(80) ثمانين ,(70) سبعين ,(60) ستين ,(50)

These عقود (uqud) have the same form with the masculine as well as the feminine madud

ر و المؤنث ) .as given in the following Sentences of Daily Usage (المعدود المذك

110

Use of العقود (the uqud) in Sentences of Daily Usage:

والعقودالجنس Gender &

Uqud

الحالة الرفعية (The Nominative

Case)

الحالة النصبية (The Accusative Case)

الحالة الجرية (The Genitive Case)

مذكر عشرون

جاء عشرون طالبا20 students came.

عشرين طالبارأيت I saw 20 women.

نظرت إلى عشرين طالباI looked at 20 students.

مؤنث عشرون

كتـبت عشرون إمرأة 20 women wrote.

أرسلت عشرين إمرأة I sent 20 women.

امرأة ارسلت إلى عشرين I sent to 20 women.

مذكر ثلاثـون

ضرب ثلاثـون ولدا30 boys beaten.

ضربت ثلاثين ولداI beated 30 boys.

ثت عن ثلاثين ولدا تحدI talked to about 30 boys.

مؤنث ثلاثـون

تاذهبت ثلاثـون بنـ 30 daughters went.

تا درست ثلاثين بنـI taught 30 daughters.

تا تكلمت مع ثلاثين بنـI talked to 30

daughters.

مذكر اربـعون

ربـعون رجلا أ جلس 40 men sat.

ربعين رجلا أ حمد أ قـتل Ahmad killed 40 men.

ربعين رجلا أ فكرت عن I thought about 40 men.

مؤنث اربـعون

امرأة اربـعون قد نصرت 40 women have

helped.

ربعين امرأة أ نصرت قد I have helped 40

women.

إمرأة ربعين أ قد نظرت إلى I have looked at 40

women.

مذكر خمسون

خمسون تلميذا ز فا 50 pupils

succeeded.

انـتخبت خمسين تلميذاI chose 50 pupils.

هل ذهبت مع خمسين تلميذاDid you go with 50

pupils?

مؤنث خمسون

فازت خمسون تلميذة 50 pupils

succeeded.

لميذة ستاذ خمسين ت اتخب الأ The teacher chose 50

pupil.

تكلمت عن قضية لميذة خمسين ت

I talked about the issue

of 50 pupils.

مذكر ستـون

با جاء ستـون طبيـ60 doctors came.

با نصرت ستين طبيـI helped 60 doctors.

با بحثت عن ستين طبيـI searched for 60

doctors.

مؤنث ستـون

بة حضرت ستـون طبيـ60 lady doctors

were present.

بة شهدت ستين طبيـ I observed 60 lady

doctors.

بة لقيت بستين طبيـI met 60 lady doctors.

111

مذكر عون سبـ

دخل سبـعون معلما70 teachers entered.

احترمت سبعين معلماI respected 70 teachers.

ذهبت إلى سبعين معلماI went to 70 teachers.

مؤنث عون سبـ

عون معلمة دخلت سبـ70 lady teachers

entered.

احترمت سبعين معلمة I respected 70 teachers.

معلمة نظرت إلى سبعين I looked at 70 teachers.

مذكر ثمانـون

جاء ثمانـون مدرسا80 teachers came.

رأيت ثمانين مدرساI saw 80 teachers.

جلست بقرب ثمانين مدرسا

I sat near 80 teachers.

مؤنث ثمانـون

جاءت ثمانـون مدرسة 80 teachers came.

رأيت ثمانين مدرسة I saw 80 teachers.

ثمانين مدرسة نظرت الي I looked at 80 teachers.

مذكر تسعون

\ رجع تسعون جند90 soldiers returned

back.

\ لقيت تسعين جندI met 90 soldiers.

\ تكلمت مع تسعين جندI talked to 90 soldiers.

مؤنث تسعون

ية عادت تسعون جند90 lady soldiers

returned back.

ية لقى رشيد تسعين جندRashid met 90 lady

soldiers.

ية سألت عن تسعين جندI asked about 90 lady

soldiers.

إلى مليـون مائة ن القواعد م (Rules from 100 to 1000000)

مائة/ مئة طالبOne hundred students.

مائة / مئة طالبة One hundred female students.

مائتا/ مئتا طالب Two hundred students.

مائتا/ مئتا طالبة Two hundred female students.

ثلاث مئة طالب Three hundred students.

ثلاث مئة طالبة Three hundred female students.

ربع مئة طالب أ Four hundred students.

ربع مئة طالبة أ Four hundred female students.

خمس مئة طالب Five hundred students.

خمس مئة طالبة Five hundred female students.

ست مئة طالب Six hundred students.

ست مئة طالبة Six hundred female students.

سبع مئة طالب Seven hundred students.

سبع مئة طالبة Seven hundred female students.

ثمانى مئة طالب Eight hundred students.

ثمانى مئة طالبة Eight hundred female students.

112

تسع مئة طالب Nine hundred students.

تسع مئة طالبة Nine hundred female students.

لف طالب أ One thousand students.

ألف طالبة One thousand female students.

لفا طالب أ لفان / أ Two thousand students.

لفا طالبة أ لفان / أ Two thousand female students.

لاف طالب آثلاثة Three thousand students.

لاف طالبة آثلاثة Three thousand female students.

لاف طالب آاربـعة Four thousand students.

لاف طالبة أ ربـعة أ Four thousand female students.

ف طالب آلا خمسة Five thousand students.

خمسة الاف طالبة Five thousand female students.

لاف طالب آستة Six thousand students.

ستة الاف طالبة Six thousand female students.

عة الاف طالب سبـSeven thousand students.

عة لاف طالبة آسبـ Seven thousand female students.

لاف طالب آثمانية Eight thousand students.

لاف طالبة آثمانية Eight thousand female students.

لاف طالب آتسعة Nine thousand students.

لاف طالبة آتسعة Nine thousand female students.

لاف طالب آعشرة Ten thousand students.

لاف طالبة آعشرة Ten thousand female students.

طالب مئة ألف One hundred thousand male students.

طالبة مئة ألف One hundred thousand female students.

مليـون = الف الف 1000000

مليـون = الف الف 1000000

مليـون طالب One million male students.

مليـون طالبة One million female students.

The numbered noun ( المعدود) of these is in the genitive singular as in the above examples.

Methods for Reading the Numbers

There are two methods for reading the numbers:

1. From left to right, e.g., 4532.

“. لاف و خمس مائة / مئة و اثـنان و ثلاثـون آربـعة أ ”

113

2. The 2nd method for reading the numbers is this:

To start with the units, then go to tens, to hundreds, and then to thousands, e.g.

i. if المعدود (the numbered noun) is مذكر (m.g.):

a. 5,743 men: رجل ربـعون و سبـعمائة وخمسة الاف أ ثلاثة و

b. 6,754 dollars: عمائة و ستة ر أ لاف دولاراآبـعة وخمسون وسبـ .

ii. if المعدود (the numbered noun) is مؤنث (f.g.):

a. 4,455 women: لاف إمرأة آربـعة أ خمس و خمسون و اربـعمائة و .

b. 7,654 Rupees: عة الاف روبية ربع أ وخمسون و ستمائة وسبـ .

نين ثـ (The Rules for 21 and 22) القواعد لواحد/ لإحدى والإثـنين/ لإ

1. For 21 ( إحدى وعشرون /واحد ) the first part of العدد (the number) with المعدود المذكر (the

masculine madud) is واحد and with المعدود المؤنث (the feminine madud) is إحدى, e.g.,

عشرون رجلا واحد و (21 men) and احدى وعشرون امرأة (21 women).

Use of وعشرون واحد (21) and وعشرون ىاحد in Sentences of Daily Usage:

(m.) العدد المذكر (m.) والمعدود المذكر

(f.) العدد المؤنث (f.) والمعدود المؤنث

ذهب واحد و عشرون طالبا21 students left.

ذهبت إحدى وعشرون طالبة 21 students left.

\ قد نصر واحد وعشرون جند21 soldiers have helped.

ية قد نصرت إحدى و عشرون جند21 female soldiers have helped.

[لجامعة واحد وعشرون [حثاقد التحق 21 researchers have taken admission in the

university.

حدى وعشرون [حثة إ قد التحقت [لجامعة 21 (female) researchers have taken

admission in the university.

با يـعملون فى المستشف واحد ىوعشرون طبيـ 21 doctors are working in the hospital.

بة يـعملن فى المستشف ى إحدى و عشرون طبيـ 21 lady doctors are working in the hospital.

درسة يدرس واحد وعشرون مدرسا فى الم 21 teachers are teaching in the school.

تدرس إحدى وعشرون مدرسة فى المدرسة 21 teachers are teaching in the school.

114

2. For 22 ( اثـنـتان و عشرون /اثـنان ), the first past of العدد (the number) with المعدود المذكر (the

masculine madud) is اثـنان and with المعدود المؤنث (the feminine madud) is اثـنـتان, e.g., اثـنان

معلمة اثـنـتان وعشرون and (teachers 22) و عشرون معلما (22 lady teachers).

Use of نان وعشرون نـتان و عشرون and (.m 22) اثـ :in daily usage sentences (.f 22) اثـ

(m.) عدد مذكر

(m.) ومعدود مذكر

(f.) عدد مؤنث

(f.) ومعدود مؤنث

طالب. اثـنان و عشرون رجلا خمسة نصر 22 men helped 5 students.

طالبة. نصرت اثـنـتان و عشرون إمرأة خمس 22 women helped 5 female students.

جلس اثـنان و عشرون عاملا على الفرش.22 workers sat on the floor.

جلست اثـنـتان و عشرون عالمة على الفرش.22 lady workers sat on the floor.

اثـنان و عشرون طالبا يكتـبـون الدرس.22 students are writing the lesson.

الدرس.اثـنـتان وعشرون طالبة يكتبن 22 (lady) students are writing the lesson.

رأيت اثـنين و عشرين قـلما فى الدكان.I saw 22 pens in the shop.

رأيت اثـنـتين و عشرين كراسة فى الدكان.I saw 22 notebooks in the shop.

و عشرين رجلا.نظرت إلى اثـنين I looked at 22 men.

نظرت إلى اثـنـتين و عشرين إمرأة I looked at 22 women.

For 22 to 29, the first part of العدد (the number) with the masculine madud ( المذكر المعدود )

is feminine ( مؤنث), and with the feminine madud ( المعدود المؤنث) the number is masculine

:as mentioned below in sentences of daily usage (مذكر )

Figure ث العدد مذكر و المعدود مؤن العدد مؤنث و المعدود مذكر قد ذهب ثلاثة و عشرون رجلا إلى بـيـوÑم. 23

23 men have gone to their houses.

قد ذهبت ثلاث و عشرون امرأة إلى بـيـوÑن.23 women have gone to their houses.

.الجديدة س ر عشرون طالبا الد ربـعة و أ كتب 24 24 students wrote the new lessons.

ربع و عشرون طالبة دروسهن الجديدة.أ كتـبت

24 (female) students wrote their new

lessons.

25 و عشرون باحثا مقاأ

ت رسل خمسة

Aم لا

25 researchers sent their theses.

Aن بحو قد ارسلت خمس و عشرون [حثة إلى ث

هن. ي ف ر مش

115

25 students have sent their theses to their

supervisors.

قد أكل ستة وعشرون عاملا الخبـز. 2626 workers have eaten the bread.

. ت قد شرب ست وعشرون عاملة الماء واللبن 26 lady workers have drunk the water

and the milk.

قرأ سبـعة و عشرون تلميذا القرآن. 2727 pupils read the Quran.

وعشرون تلميذة الحديث.قرأت سبع 27 pupils read the Hadith.

و عشرين معلما. لقيت ثمانية 28 I met 28 teachers.

رسلت إلى ثمان وعشرين مدرسة كتـبـهن [لبريد. أ

I sent to 28 teachers their books by post.

قد وصل هنا تسعة وعشرون طالبا. 2929 students reached here.

قد ذهبت تسع و عشرون طالبة من هنا.29 students have gone from here.

116

عددى ۔4.4ب ال

مرك

)2(ال


Introduction to 4th part of Unit No.04

This 4th part of Unit no 04, which you are going to study, is about the numeral compound

( العددى المركب ), and contains of the following aspects of this very important compound:

1. The ordinal numbers from first to tenth/ 1st to 10th ( /تيبية من الأول / الأولى إلى العاشر الأعداد التر .(العاشرة

2. The ordinal numbers with ال (Al).

3. The ordinal numbers after 10th/tenth:

(i) From 11th to 19th

(ii) From 21st to 29th

4. The noun بضع (Past).

5. The age ( العمر). 6. The fractions in Arabic.

7. Examples of fractions from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.

Objectives of 4th part of Unit No.04 With the grace and help of Allah Almighty, when you complete the study of this 3rd

important part of unit no.04, you will find yourself to be able to do the following work:

1. to describe the rules of ordinal numbers from the first ( الأول) to the tenth ( العاشر), and to

use them (both masculine and feminine singular forms) in beneficial sentences.

2. to use the ordinal numbers (both masculine and feminine singular forms) without ال (Al),

e.g., درس أول (first lesson), ی أول وحدة (first unit).

3. to know the rules of ordinal number ( تـرتيبية أعداد ) from:

(i) 11th to 19th and to use them in beneficial sentences

(ii) 21st to 29th and to use them in beneficial sentences.

4. to know about the noun بضع (past).

5. to know how to ask about the age ( العمر). 6. to know about the fractions in Arabic.

7. to present the examples of fractions from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.

117

) 2( المركب العددى ۔4.4

The Numeral Composite (2)

The Ordinal Numbers ( الأعداد الترتيبية) from First to Tenth

From الأول (the first) to العاشر (the tenth), the ordinal numbers ( الأعداد الترتيبية) are used as

common adjectives, and are presented below in sentences of daily usage:

Ordinal Number

M&F

مركب تـوصيفى Adjective Composite

Masculine Singular ) مذكر مفرد(

تـوصيفى مركب Adjective Composite

Feminine Singular ) مؤنث مفرد(

الأول The first

◌ الأولى

الدرس الأول The first lesson

هذا الدرس الأول This is the first lesson.

الوحدة الأولى The first unit

ولى الوحدة الأ هذه This is the first unit.

الثانى The second

الثانية

الدرس الثانى The second lesson

الدرس الثانى سهل The second lesson is easy.

الغرفة الثانية The second room

واسعة الغرفة الثانية The second room is spacious.

الثالث The third

الثالثة

الباب الثالث The third door

الباب الثالث مفتـوح The third door is opened.

النافذة الثالثة The third window

مغلقة النافذة الثالثة The third window is closed.

الرابع The forth

الرابعة

الكتاب الرابع The forth book

الكتاب الرابع صعب جدا The forth book is very difficult.

المسألة الرابعة The forth issue

ة من المسائل العصرية هذه المسألة الرابع It is the forth issue from the

contemporary issues.

الخامس The fifth

الخامسة

الرجل الخامس The fifth

الرجل الخامس من المسلمين The fifth man is among the

Muslims.

المرأة الخامسة The fifth women

المرأة الخامسة من المعلمات The fifth woman is from the

teachers.

السورة السادسة الجزء السادس السادس

118

The sixth

السادسة The sixth part

هذا هو الجزء السادس من القرآن It is the sixth part from Al-Quran.

The sixth Surah

ماهى السورة السادسة من القرآن المجيد Which is the sixth surah of Al-

Quran Al-Hakeem?

السابع Seventh

ا/ سل ا

عة

الطالب السابع The seventh student

قد حصل الطالب السابع الجائزة الأولى The seventh student has achieved

the first award.

الطالبة السابعة The seventh student

قد حصلت الطالبة السابعة على الجائزة الثانية The seventh student has achieved

the second prize.

الثامن The eight

الثامنة

المسجد الثامن The eighth mosque

المسجد الثامن قريب من بـيتى The eighth mosque is near my home.

الميضدة الثامنة The eighth table

الكتاب على المنضدة الثامنة The book is on the eight table.

التاسع The ninth

التاسعة

المحاضر التاسع The ninth lecturer

المحاضر التاسع للتـفسير والحديث موجود The ninth lecturer of Tafseer and

Hadith is present.

المحاضرة التاسعة The ninth lecturer (f.)

تـبدأ المحاضرة التاسعة متى When will the ninth lecture start?

العاشر The tenth

العاشرة

الدرس العاشر The tenth lesson

الدرس العاشر؟هل كتـبت Have you written the tenth lesson?

الواحدة العاشرة The tenth unit

قـرأت فى الوحدة العاشرة I read the tenth unit.

2. The Ordinal Numbers ( الأعداد الترتيبية) without ال (Al)

Ordinal Numbers (m. & f.)

(Masculine) مذكر

مركب تـوصيفى

(Feminine) مؤنث

مركب تـوصيفى

(awwalu) اول

◌ أولى (ula)

درس اول First lesson

وحدة أولى First unit

å (thanin)ن

å (thaniuatuan)نثة

درس åن Second lesson

وحدة åنية Second unit

å (thalithun)لث

å (thalithatun)لثة

درس åلث Third lesson

وحدة åلثة Third unit

(rabi‘un) رابع

(rabi‘atun) رابعة

درس رابع Fourth lesson

وحدة رابعة Fourth unit

119

(khamisun) خامس

(khamisatun) خامسة

درس خامس Fifth lesson

وحدة خامسة Fifth unit

(sadisun) سادس

(sadisatun) سادسة

درس سادس Sixth lesson

وحدة سادسة Sixth unit

(sabi‘un) سابع

(sabi‘atun) سابعة

سابع درس Seventh lesson

وحدة سابعة Seventh unit

å (thaminan)من

å (thaminatun)منة

درس åمن Eighth lesson

وحدة åمنة Eighth unit

(tasi‘un) 6سع

(tasiatun) 6سعة

درس 6سع Ninth lesson

وحدة 6سعة Ninth unit

(ashirun) عاشر

(ashiratun) عاشرة

درس عاشر Tenth lesson

وحدة عاشرة Tenth unit

Note: All the above mentioned ordinal numbers from first to tenth are:

1. Declinable ( معرب) except الأولى ◌ (the first). It is indeclinable ( مبنى).

2. Derived from the cardinals on the pattern of the active participle “ فاعل” except الأول (the

first) for مؤنث (feminine).

3. The Ordinal Numbers ( الأعداد الترتيبية) after Tenth

After tenth the ordinal numbers22 are used along with the ordinals23 as follow:

i. From 11 to 19

The ordinal numbers from 11 to 19 are indeclinable ( مبنى) numbers:

Ordinal No. in Figure مركب مذكر

Masculine Compound

مركب مؤنث Feminine Compound

الحادى عشر 11 اليـوم نـقرأ الدرس الحادى عشر

Today we will read the eleventh lesson.

الحادية عشرة أV كتـبت الوحدة الحادية عشر I wrote the eleventh unit.

الثانى عشر 12 الدرس الثانى عشر سهل جدا

الثانية عشرة الوحدة الثانية عشرة صعبة جدا

22 Ordinal number, whole number, for example 1, 2, 3, that show quantity. 23 Ordinal number, a number that shows the order or position of something in a series: First, second and third are

ordinal numbers.

120

The twelfth lesson is very easy. The twelfth unit is very difficult. الثالث عشر 13

الدرس الثالث عشر عن الإسلامThe thirteenth lesson is about Islam.

الثالثة عشرة الوحدة الثالثة عشرة عن علوم القرآن

The thirteenth unit is about Quranic Sciences.

الرابع عشر 14اليـوم؟من يدرس الدرس الرابع عشر

Who will teach the fourteenth lesson today?

الرابعة عشرة أV ارسلت الوحدة الرابعة عشرة للطباعة

I sent the fourteenth unit for publication.

الخامس عشر 15للفهم هل الباب الخامس عشر سهل

Is the fifteenth chapter easy to understand?

الخامسة عشرة هل الغرفة الخامسة عشرة واسعة؟

Is the fifteenth room spacious?

السادس عشر 16 الكتاب السادس عشر Vفع جداThe sixteenth book is very

beneficial.

السادسة عشرة اجستير لطلاب الوحدة السادسة عشرة مفيدة

الم

The sixteenth unit is useful for the students MA.

السابع عشر 17 من يـقرأ الباب السابع عشر

Who will read seventeenth chapter?

السابعة عشرة ؟من كتب الوحدة السابعة عشرة

Who wrote seventeenth unit? الثامن عشر 18

البـيت الثامن عشر لصديقى أحمدThe eighteenth house belongs to my

friend, Ahmad.

الثامنة عشرة قـرأت فى الوحدة الثامنة عشرة عن مكانة

سلام المرأة فى الإI read in eighteenth unit about the

status of women in Islam. التاسع عشر 19

الباب الباب الأخير من هذا الكتاب هو: الثاسع عشر

The last chapter of this book is nineteenth chapter.

التاسعة عشر بـيـنت فى الوحدة الثامنة عشرة عن أهمية اللغة

العربية.I stated in the nineteenth unit about the importance of the Arabic language.

121

ii. The Ordinal Numbers ( الأعداد الترتيبية) from 21 to 29 24

Ordinal No. in figure المذكر

Masculine

المؤنث Feminine

الحادى والعشرون 21والعشرون اليـوم نـبدأ الدرس الحادى

Today, we will start the 21st lesson.

الحادية والعشرون سلامى الوحدة الحادية والعشرون عن التاريخ الإThe 21st unit is about the Islamic

History. الثانى والعشرون 22

جتماع الإسلامىالباب الثانى و العشرون فى علم الإ The 22nd lesson is about Islamic

sociology.

الثانية والعشرون الوحدة الثانية العشرون فى اليـهودية

The 22nd unit is about Judaism.

والعشرون الثالث 23 الدرس الثالث والعشرون فى النصرانية

The 23rd lesson is about Christianity.

الثالثة والعشرون لوحدة الثالثة والعشرون تحتوى على علوم القرآن ا

The 23rd unit consists of Qurainc Sciences.

الرابع والعشرون 24 الدرس الرابع والعشرون يحتـوى على علوم الحديث The 24th lesson consists of Hadith

Sciences.

الرابعة والعشرون والعشرون طويـلة جداالوحدة الرابعة

The 24th unit is very long.

الخامس والعشرون 25قوق والواجبات الباب الخامس والعشرون فى الح

The 25th chapter is about the rights and the obligations.

الخامسة والعشرون ث عن د الوحدة الخامسة والعشرون تـتح

حقوق المرأة The 25th unit tells about the rights of

women.

السادس والعشرون 26رجة الطالب السادس والعشرون Vل على الد

الثانية فى الفصل The 26th student gained the second

position in class.

السادسة والعشرون الطالبة السادسة والعشرون حصلت على

الإمتحان النهائى الدرجات العالية فى The 26th students achieved the highest

mark in the final examination. السابع والعشرون 27

البـيت السابع والعشرون قديم جداThe 27th house is very old.

السابعة والعشرون النافذة السابعة والعشرون مفتـوحة The 27th window is opened.

الثامن والعشرون 28الدرس الثأمن والعشرون من هذا الكتاب فى

اللغة الفرنسية

الثامنة والعشرون هذا الكتاب فى الوحدة الثامنة والعشرون من

زية ليـ نج اللغة الإنكليزية/ الإ

24 The ordinal numbers from 21 to 29 and to 99 (except 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, …) are called معطوف because of واؤ العاطفة between two numbers, e.g., الثالث والعشرون.

122

The 28th lesson of this book is about the French language.

The 28th unit of this book is about the English language.

التاسع والعشرون 29 هذا الدرس التاسع والعشرون من هذا الكتاب This is the 29th lesson of this book.

التاسعة والعشرون الوحدة التاسعة والعشرون هى الوحدة الأخيرة

الكتاب من هذا The 29th unit is the last unit of this book.

4. The Noun بضع (Past)

The noun بضع (past) expresses an indefinite number between 3 and 10:

:(a few years) بضع سنين .1 لترا .(a few years ago, I was in England) قـبل بضع سنين كنت فى انج

:(a few men) بضع رجال .2 راسات الإسلامية نة، بضع طلاب التحقوا بكلية الد ,In this year) فى هذه الس

a few students registered in the Faculty of Islamic Studies).

:is used with larger number نيف .3

آ[د قد ذهب نيف وثلاثـون رجلا إلى اسلام :over (Forty something, or forty odd) نيف و اربـعون -.(Thirty something men have gone to Islamabad for work) للعمل

5. The Age (العمر) :(how old is he) كم عمره .1 .(he is 20 years old) عمره عشرين سنة or هو ابن عشرين

or أV ابن سبع :(?how old are you) كم عمرك .2 .(I am seven years old) عمرى سبع سنين

6. The Fractions in ArabicFraction is a noun. It means:

1. A small part or amount.2. A division of a number: ½ and ¼ are fractions25.Fractions in Arabic صف ن .1 ½.

ثـلث ,ثـلث .2 ⅓.

بع ر ، بع ر .3 ¼.

خمس ، خمس .4 1/5.

ثـلثان .5 ⅔.

ر[ع أ ثلاثة .6 ¾.

(once) مرة -

ی مثن , مرتين - (twice)

ثلاث مرات ، مثلث - (thrice)

25 Vulgar fraction: a number less than one that is shown as numbers above and below a line: ¾ and ⅝ are vulgar fractions.

123

7. Example of Fractions from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem

Quranic Verses English Translation

ÞΟ ä3ŠÏ¹θãƒ ª! $# þ’Îû öΝ à2Ï‰≈ s9 ÷ρ r& ( Ì� x.©%# Ï9ã≅ ÷VÏΒ Åeá ym È ÷u‹ sVΡW{$#.

Allah enjoins you, concerning your children, for the male is the share equivalent to that of two females (4:11).

βÎ) uρ ôM tΡ%x. Zοy‰ Ïm≡uρ $yγn=sù ß# óÁÏiΖ9 $# . And if there be only one female child (and no male child), for her is the one half (4:11).

βÎ*sù £ä. [ !$|¡ ÎΣ s− öθsù È ÷tGt⊥ øO$# £ßγn=sù $sVè=èO $tΒ x8t� s?. But, if there be more than two (or two) females only (and no male child), for them is two third of what (the deceased) left (4:11).

Ïµ ÷ƒ uθt/ L{uρ Èe≅ä3 Ï9 7‰ Ïn≡ uρ $yϑ åκ ÷]ÏiΒ â¨ ß‰ �¡9$#$£ϑ ÏΒ x8t� s? β Î) tβ%x. … çµ s9 Ó$ s!uρ .

And to the parents (of the deceased), for each of the two is one sixth of what he left-if he has a child (4:11).

βÎ* sù óΟ ©9 ä3tƒ …ã& ©! Ó$ s! uρ ÿ… çµ rOÍ‘ uρ uρ çν#uθ t/r& ÏµÏiΒ T|sù ß] è= ›W9$#. But he who has no child and only his parents inherit him, for his mother is one third (4:11).

βÎ* sù tβ% x. ÿ… ã& s! ×οuθ÷z Î) Ïµ ÏiΒT|sù â¨ ß‰ �¡9$#. But if he has brother and sister, for his mother is one sixth (4:11).

�∅ ßγs9 uρ ßìç/”�9$# $£ϑ ÏΒ óΟ çF ø. t�s? β Î) öΝ ©9 à6 tƒ öΝ ä3 ©9 Ó‰s9 uρ 4 βÎ* sùtβ$Ÿ2 öΝà6 s9 Ó$ s!uρ £ ßγn= sù ßßϑ ›V9$# $£ϑ ÏΒ Λ äò2t�s? 4 .ÏiΒ Ï‰÷è t/

7π§‹ Ï¹ uρ šχθß¹θè? !$yγÎ/ ÷ρ r& & øyŠ.

And for them is one forth of what you leave, if you have no child, but if you have a child, their share is one eighth after (paying) the bequest you may have bequeathed or a debt (4:12).

βÎ) uρ šχ% x. ×≅ã_ u‘ ß u‘θãƒ »' s#≈n= Ÿ2 Íρ r& ×οr& t� øΒ$# ÿ… ã& s!uρ îˆ r& ÷ρr&×M÷z é& Èe≅ä3 Î= sù 7‰ Ïn≡ uρ $yϑ ßγ÷ΨÏiΒ â¨ ß‰�¡9$# 4 β Î* sù (#þθ çΡ%Ÿ2

u� sYò2r& ÏΒ y7 Ï9≡sŒ ôΜ ßγsù â!% Ÿ2u� à° ’Îû Ï]è= ›W9$# .... .

And if a man or a woman, having no children and no parents, leaves estate to be inherited, and he (or she) has a single brother or single sister (on the mother’s side) for each of the two is one sixth, but if there are more than two, they shall all be sharers of one third… (4:12).

y7 tΡθçFø� tG ó¡o„ È≅è% ª!$# öΝà6‹ÏF ø�ãƒ ’ Îû Ï' s#≈ n= s3ø9 $# 4 ÈβÎ) (#îτ â÷ ö∆$#y7 n=yδ }§ øŠ s9 … çµs9 Ó$ s!uρ ÿ… ã& s!uρ ×M ÷z é& $yγn= sù ß#óÁ ÏΡ $tΒ x8t� s? 4

uθèδ uρ !$yγ èO Ì� tƒ β Î) öΝ©9 ä3 tƒ $oλ°; Ó$ s!uρ 4 βÎ* sù $ tFtΡ% x. È ÷ tFuΖ øO$#$yϑ ßγn= sù Èβ$ sV è=›V9$# $®ÿ ÊΕ x8t� s? ....

They request you a (legal) ruling. Say “Allah gives a ruling concerning (klalah), i.e., one having neither descendants, nor ascendants (as heirs). “If a man dies, leaving no child but (only) a sister, she will have half of what he left, and he inherits from her if she (dies and) and has no child But if there are two sisters, they will have two thirds of what he left,… (4:176).

السوال الأول: استخدم هذه الألفاظ فى الجمل:Use These Words in the Sentences:

. واحد، اثـنان، كوكبا، خمس، ثلاثـون، الأولى، نيف، طلاب، الاف، سنين، خمسينعنده قـلمان اثـنان . 2 كتاب واحد . 1 طالبات هن خمس . 4 احد عشر كوكبا . 3

124

المركبات The Compounds

(2) (1)

مركب fقص Incomplete Composite

جملة غير مفيدة(Incomplete/Unbeneficial Sentence)

مركب wم Complete Composite

جملة مفيدة Composite/Beneficial Sentence

(5) (4) (3) (2) (1)

مركب عددى (Numbering compound/

phrase) or (Numeral composite/

phrase)

مركب جارى (Prepositional

(Genitive) composite /

phrase)

مركب اشارى (Demonstrative

composite / phrase)

مركب إضافى (Relative

composite / phrase)

مركب تـوصيفى (Adjective composite /

phrase)

125

QUESTIONS

ةسئل


سئل

جب e الا :ا

شاري المركب هو ما ـ 1 ؟ الإشارة أسماء هي ما ـ 2 شارة اسم فيها التي المفيدة الجمل اجعل ، والبعيد للقريب الإ ليه إ ار ش وم الإ

ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم ها وت ـ؟ ر الج حروف هي وما ؟ الجاري المركب هو ما ـ 3 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى جمها ر اكتـبـ؟ المركب ا ذ يحتوى ه ما وعلى العددى المركب هو ما ـ 4 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم المفيدة الجمل في ،) 2 ، 1( ن نا إث ـو واحد عدد استخدم ـ 5 نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم المفيدة الجمل في ) 10 إلى 3 ن م ( عشرة إلى ثلاثة استخدم العدد من ـ 6اللغة إلى تـرجمها دة ثم ل المفي الجم في ) 12 ، 11( عشر ثـناوا /عشر أحد العدد من استخدم ـ 7

نجليزية الإ المفيدة الجمل في ) 12 ، 11( عشر ثـنـتا ا / عشر ثـناوا عشر إحدى /عشر استخدم العدد أحد ـ 8

ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم إلى تـرجمها ) في الجمل المفيدة ثم 19إلى 13عشر إلى تسعة عشر (من ة ثلاث استخدم العدد من ـ 9

ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم المفيدة الجمل في ) 90 إلى ، 20 من( تسعين إلى عشرين استخدم العدد من ـ 11

ـ نجليزية الإ ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم المفيدة الجمل في مليون إلى ائة م استخدم العدد من ـ 12اللغة إلى ثم تـرجمها المفيدة الجمل في ) 21( وعشرون وإحدى عشرون و استخدم العدد واحد ـ 13

نجليزية الإ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى ثم تـرجمها المفيدة الجمل في وعشرون ثـنـتا وا وعشرون ثـنان ا العدد عمل ست ـا ـ 14

126

ثم يدة المف الجمل في عشرون و تسعة / تسع إلى عشرون و ة ثلاث / ثلاث من العدد استـعمل ـ 15 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها

تيب العدد استـعمل ـ 16 إلى ثم تـرجمها المفيدة الجمل في ) 10إلى ، 1 من( العاشر إلى الأول من ة ي الترـ نجليزية الإ اللغة

تيب اكتب ـ 17 ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى ثم تـرجمها ل ا ن و د ب ة ي الأعداد الترتيب ـ 18 ة ر م ( المفيدة الجمل في ) 19 إلى 11 من( عشر التاسع إلى العاشر بـعد ة ي استخدم الأعداد التر

ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى ثم تـرجمها ) ا ثن و م ومرة ا مذكر تيب استـعمل الأعداد ـ 19 نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى ثم تـرجمها رينوالعش إلى التاسع ينر والعش الحادى من ة ي التر ـ نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى ثم تـرجمها الأعداد المختلفة فيها القرآنية التي \ت الآ اكتب ـ 20

127

ا وحدۃ

:ال

اء لخامسة سم

� � � � الا � � � �

Unit No.05-The Nouns-5

ية الجملة ۔ 5.1 الإسم

The Nominal Sentence

إعراب الإسم ۔ 5.2

The I’raab of the Noun

المعرب و المبنى ۔ 5.3The Declinable and the Indeclinable


حافظ معظم شاە:راجعالم

Written by : Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Reviewed by : Hafiz Moazam Shah

128

اءز ج ا ۔5.1

ية سم الا

ةمل

الج

Parts of the Nominal Sentence

(2) (1)

الخبر

The Predicate

تدأ المبـ

(The Subject)

(The Nominal Sentence)

ية الجملة الإسم

�مید خان عبا�� یونٹ نOار : پروفMسر ڈاکK' عبد ا

حافظ معظم شاەنظر ثاTی :

129

Introduction to 1st part of Unit No.05The 1st of this Unit No.05 is about ية الجملة الإسم (the nominal sentence) which is composed

of two parts. The first is called تدأ the) الخبر and the second is called ,(the subject) المبـ

predicate).

Inshallah, in this unit you will study some details about these two parts of nominal

sentence.


Dear students, when you will finish reading this 1st part of unit no.05, you will be able:

1. to define ي ة الجملة الاسم (the nominal sentence).

2. to differentiate between تد أ المبـ (the subject) and الخبر (the predicate).

3. to give examples of ي ة الجملة الاسم .

4. to conjugate تدأ and مبـ ية ) خبر ابواب ) according to the six groups of triliteral verb (جملة اسم (الفعل المجرد الثلاثى

5. to explain the agreement ( المطابقة) between the subject (تدأ .(الخبر ) and the predicate (المبـ6. to describe the types of subject (تدأ .(أشكال المبـ7. to give examples of every type of تدأ .(the subject) المبـ

8. to state the types of predicate ( أشكال الخبر). 9. to give the examples of every type of الخبر (the predicate).

130

ية ۔5.1 الجملة الإسمThe Nominal Sentence/The Noun Clause

ية (Definition of the Noun Clause) تـعريف الجملة الإسم

ية هى الجملة التى تـبدأ [س تدأ (مسند) والخبر (مسند إليه) مثل م الجملة الإسم : الجندى ما و تحتوى على المبـ اع .شج

The nominal sentence that starts with any name and consists of

Al-mubtada (the subject) and Al-khabar (the predicate), e.g., the soldier is brave.

تدأ و الخبر الفرق بين المبـThe Difference between Al-mubtada (the subject) and Al-khabar (the predicate)

The mubtada (subject) is the noun about which we want to say some thing, and the khabar

(predicate) my be a noun or verb by which we have to say about the mubtada (subject), e.g.

In this sentence, we want to inform some one .(The student is hard working) الطالب مجتهد

about the student.

This first part of the sentence in Arabic is called تدأ and the information, which (subject) مبـ

is given about the student that he is مجتهد (hardworking), is called in Arabic خبر(predicate). The sentence which consists of تدأ is called خبر and مبـ ية خبرية nominal) جملة اسم

statement).

ية البسيطة (Example of the Simple Nominal Sentences) أمثلة الجمل الإسم

.Allah is creator خالق الله

.Rasheed is a scholar رشيد عالم

.The Islam is a Deen (religion/way of life) الإسلام دين

.The house is big البـيت كبير

.The room is clean الغرفة نظيـفة

محمدصلى الله عليه وسلم رسول Muhammad صلى الله عليه وسلم is a messenger.

Conjugation of ية تدأ) جملة اسم According to the Six Groups of Trilateral Verb (مبـ

:(ابـواب الفعل الثلاثى المجرد )

131

1. Conjugation of تدا يـفتح ، فـتح from bab (Chapter) خبر and مبـ

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

المسلمون فاتحون All the Muslims are

openers

المسلمان فاتحان The two Muslims are openers

(They/ you/ we) هما/ انـتما/ انـتم

المسلم فاتح (One) The Muslim is

opener (He, you, I)

مذكر

المسلمات فاتحات All the Muslim

women are openers

هن، نحن، أنتن (They, we, you)

المسلمتان فاتحتان The two Muslim women are

openers

(They, you, we) هما، انـتما، نحن

المسلمة فاتحة The Muslim is opener

(She/you/I) Vهى، أنت، أ

مؤنث

2. Conjugation of تدا from bab (chapter) خبر and مبـ يضرب ، ضرب ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

أنـتم/ نحن ضاربـون هم/ They/ you all/ we are

beaters

هما/ أنـتما، نحن ضار[نBoth of Them/ Both of

you/ we are beaters

هو/ أنت، أV ضارب He is/you are/I am a beater

مذكر

هن/ انتن/ نحن ضار[ت They/ you all/ we are

beaters

انت هما/ انـتما، نحن ضارب ـ They/ you/ we are beaters

هى/ أنت/ أV ضاربة She is/you are/I am a beater

مؤنث

3. Conjugation of تدأ يـنصر ،نصر from bab (Chapter) خبر and مبـع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم/ أنـتم/ نحن Vصرون They/ you all/ we are

helpers

هما/ أنـتما، نحن Vصران They/ you/we are helpers

هو/ أنت، أV Vصر He is/you are/I am a helper

مذكر

انتن/ نحن Vصرات هن/ They/ you all/ we are

helpers

هما/ انـتما، نحن Vصر6ن They/ you/we are helpers

هى/ أنت/ أV Vصرة She is/you are/I am a helper

مؤنث

4. Conjugation of تدأ ع، from bab (Chapter) خبر and مبـ يسمع سمع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

المؤمنـون سامعون All the believers are

hearer

سامعان المومنان سامعان

The two believers are hearer

سامع المؤمن سامع

The believer is a hearer

مذكر

132

هم/ أنـتم/ نحن Vصرون They/ you/ we are

hearer

هما/ أنـتما، نحن Both of them/ Both of you/

we are hearer

Vهو/ أنت، أ He is/ you are/I am a hearer

سامعات المؤمنات سامعات

All the believers are hearers

هن/ انتن/ نحن Vصرات They/ you/ we are hearers

سامعتان المؤمنـتان سامعتان

The two believers are hearers

هما/ انـتما، نحن Vصر6ن They/ you/ we are hearers

سامعة المؤمنة سامعة

The believer is a hearer

ى/ أنت/ أV Vصرة ه She is/ you are/ I am hearer

مؤنث

5. Conjugation of ية تدأ) جملة إسم مبـ and خبر) from bab (Chapter) يحسب ، حسب ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

حاسبـون هم/ أنـتم/ نحن حاسبـون

They are/You are/We are thinkers

حاسبان هما/ أنـتما، نحن حاسبان

They are/You are/We are thinkers

حاسب هو/ أنت، أV حاسب He is/you are/I am

thinker

مذكر

حاسبات هن/ انتن/ نحن

The all your/you all are/ we all are thinkers

حاسبـتان هما/ انـتما، نحن

The both are/you both are/we both are thinkers

حاسبة Vهى/ أنت/ أ

She is/you are/ I am thinker

مؤنث

6. Conjugation of ية تدأ) جملة إسم مبـ and خبر) from bab (Chapter) كرم، يكرم ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

کريمون/کرماء هم They are all respecters

کريمان هما They both are respecters

کريم هو He is respecter

مذكر

کريمات/ کرائم هن They are all respecters

کريما6ن هما They both are respecters

هى

ريمة ک

She is respecter

مؤنث

بر تدأ و الخ تدأ) The agreement between the Subject] المطابقة بين المبـ and the Predicate (المبـ

or [(الخبر ) تدأ و الخبر مطابـقة المبـ (The agreement of the Subject and the predicate):

There should be an agreement between تدا :in the followings خبر and مبـ

1. Number: If تدأ ,مبـتدأ should be like خبر ,(plural) جمع or (dual) تـثنية or (singular) واحد is مبـ

e.g.

133

.The Muslim is present المسلم حاضر

.The two Muslims are present المسلمان حاضران

.All the Muslims are present المسلمون حاضرون

2. Masculine Gender: If the تدا .should be m., e.g خبر ,.is m مبـ

.The (male) student is active الطالب نشيط

.The students are hardworking الطلاب مجتهدون

3. Feminine Gender: if the تدأ .should be f., e.g خبر ,.is f مبـ

.The female student is active الطالبة نشيطة

.She is a Muslim هى مسلمة

6ن .The two female students are hardworking الطالبـتان مجتهد

.All the female students are hardworking الطالبات مجتهدات

4. When تدأ is a (the predicate) الخبر ,is a non-human feminine plural (the subject) المبـ

feminine singular in common usage, e.g.

.The winds are violent الر\ح شديدة

لة يـ .The houses are beautiful البـيـوت جم

.The avenues are wide الطرق واسعة

.The roads are narrow الشوارع ضيفة

.The buildings are high المبانى عالية

تدأ والخبرأشكال المبـ (Types of the Subject and Predicate)

In Arabic, following are some types of تدأ :مبـ

م س لإ ا .1 (the noun), e.g., موجود الرجل (The man is present), الله غفور (Allah is forgiver).

مدرس هو ,.e.g ,(the pronoun) الضمر .2 (He is a teacher), Vأستاذ أ (I am a professor).

المؤول المصدر .3 (Al-masdar Al-muawwal), i.e., a clause functioning as a مصدر (masdar),

e.g.

i. 3” uθø) −G= Ï9 ÛUt� ø% r& (#þθ à� ÷ès? β r&uρ (And that you give more, is nearer to righteousness (2:237)).

(# þθà�÷ès? βr& is المؤول المصدر which means كم عفو (your forgiving).

134

ii. وأن تصوموا خيرلكم (And that you fast is better for you (2:184)). Here in this verse, the clause

) is أن تصوموا المؤول المصدر ) which means كم صوم (your fasting).

المعرفة .4 (The definite): The subject (تدأ as indicated in the (definite) معرفة is normally a (المبـ

following examples:

i. هم مسلمون (They are Muslims). Here “ هم” is معرفة, because it is a pronoun ( ضمير) and الخبر(the predicate) is نكرة (an indefinite noun).

ii. هذا كتاب (This is a book). In this sentence, هذا is معرفة (a definite), because it is

الإشارة اسم (a demonstrative pronoun), and خبر (a predicate) is نكرة (an indefinite noun).

iii. الذى خلق فسوى (Who has created (everything), and then proportioned it (87:2)). In this

example, الذى is معرفة (definite noun), because it is الموصول اسم (the relative pronoun), and

تدأ which is الذى is the sentence after (the predicate) الخبر .(the subject) المبـ

iv. الله رسول صلى الله عليه وسلم محمد (Muhammad (صلى الله عليه وسلم) is the messenger of Allah). In this example, the word

د العلم اسم because it is ,(definite noun) معرفة is محم (the proper noun), and خبر is الله رسول(messenger of Allah), رسول is مضاف and the word “الله” is اليه مضاف . The combination of

تدأ is الذى ,So .(relative compound) ”مركب اضافى “ is called مضاف اليه and مضاف and مبـ

الله رسول It is .خبر is (مركب اضافى )

ية خبرية .جملة اسم

v. الله كلام القرآن (The Quran is the kalam (word) of Allah). Here القرآن is المعرفة (definite),

because it has the definite article “ ال”. So, القرأن is تدأ is an (predicate) خبر and (subject) مبـ

annexation ( ضافة كلام :(الإ is مضاف and the word “ ا” is “ إليه مضاف ”. The combination of

the both: مضاف and مضاف إليه is called المركب الأضافى. It is تدأ+ خبر .خبر مبـ ية جلمة = اسم

.خبرية

vi. سلان ك البـيت حارس (Guard of the house is lazy). In this example, حارس is معرفة (definite)

as its إليه مضاف (Mudaf ilaihi) “ البـيت” is معرفة (definite). So, البـيت حارس is اضافى مركبwhich is تدأ ,(indefinite) نكرة which in this case, is ,كسلان and the word ,(the subject) المبـ

and is الخبر (the predicate). تدأ ية= خبر+مبـ جملة اسمvii. مفتاح الجنة الصلاة (The key of Paradise is prayer). Here مفتاح is معرفة (definite) as its مضاف

the) الخبر And .”ال “ as it has the definite article ,(definite) معرفة is الجنة (mudaf ilaihi) إليه

predicate) in this case is a definite noun ( معرفة).

135

تدأ Sometimes :(genitive phrase) مركب جارى .5 مركب is خبر and sometime مركب جارى is مبـ.e.g ,جارى

i. هو فى عيشة راضية ف ـ (He will live in a pleasant life (in paradise) (101:7)). In this example,

تدأ is (pronoun) ”هو “ ر الخب and ,المبـ is and (preposition) حرف جر is فى Here .فى عيشة راضية

is called مجرور and حرف جر The combination of .مجرور is عيشة راضية the) المركب الجارى

genitive phrase).

ii. كتاب ى فى يد (There is a book in my hand). This sentence starts with and ”فى “ حرف جر

“ ى يد ” is مجرور. The combination of حرف جر and مجرور is called مركب جارى which is خبر(predicate) and كتاب as a common noun ( نكرة) is تدأ .(Subject) مبـ

,under, below) تحت ,(above, over, upon) فـوق (with, near) عند adverb like :(Azarf) الظرف .6

beneath), etc26, are ظرف which are related to place or time. In Arabic sentences, these words

are الخبر (Predicate), For example:

طفل فـوق السرير There is a child on the bed.

تحت السماء الأرض The earth is under the sky.

y‰Ζ Ïã öΝ Íκ Íh5u‘ àM≈Ζ y_ 5β ô‰tã With their Lord is Adn (Eden) Paradise (Gardens of Eternity)(98:8).

شمسية/مظلة عندى I have an umbrella (literally, there is an umbrella with me).

The four sentences that have just been mentioned, the first part of every sentence is خبر(the Predicate) and the second part is تدأ :(the predicate) المبـ

تد أمبـ خبر فـوق السرير طفل

تحت السماء الأرض عند رËم جنت عندى شمسية

26 These words are not prepositions ( حروف جر) like إلى، على، ل، ك، ت، ب. But they are nouns which are

declinable ( معرب), for example:

i. تجرى من تحتها الأ«ر (Under which the rivers are flowing or underneath which rivers flow (98:8)).

Here تحت is مجرور because of حرف جر (preposition) من.

136

ية خبرية جلمة اسم

تدأ الخبر المبـ الطفل/ طفل فـوق السرير الأرض الأرض/ تحت السماء

شمسية عندى

ية خبرية جلمة اسمتدأ :(The common/ indefinite) النكرة .8 if it is ,(indefinite) نكرة may also be (the subject) المبـ

an interrogative noun, like من (who), ما (what), كم (how many). These are indefinite

nouns, for example:

i. ؟مابك (What is wrong with you?). Here “ما” is تدأ which (the predicate) الخبر is بك and المبـ

is جارى مركب (prepositional compound/phrase).

ii. ؟من مسلم (Who is a Muslim?). Here من is تدأ .خبر is مسلم and مبـ

iii. كم دولارا فى الجيب؟ (How many dollars are in the pocket?). Here كم is تدأ and المبـ

prepositional phrase ( مركب جارى) الجيب فى is الخبر. تدأ .9 تدأ are prefixed (added) to (hal) هل and (a) أ The Particles :أو هل مع المبـ (the subject) المبـ

in order to make the sentence interrogative ( استفهامية), for examples:

i. د نشيط تدأ is أمحمد Here .(?Is Muhammad active) أمحم .خبر is نشيط and مبـ

ii. هل الطالب مجتهد (Is the student hardworking?). Here هل الطالب is تدأ and (The subject) مبـ

.(the predicate) خبر is مجتهد

iii. هل أنت مسلم (Are you a Muslim?). In this sentences, the first part هل أنت is تدأ and مبـ

second part مسلم is خبر.

تدأ .10 ية ) A nominal sentence :ما و ليس مع المبـ can be converted into a negative (جملة اسم

sentence by adding/prefixing the particle ما (no, not) or ليس (no, not) to تدأ the) المبـ

subject), and the letter “ ب” is prefixed to الخبر (the predicate) which assumes genitive

case ( حالة جرية), for example:

i. ماطبيب بحاضر (Doctor is not present).

137

ii. س بم اهر ليس المهند (The engineer is not expert).

In both of these sentences, the last part بحاضر and بماهر is خبر, and the first is تدأ In the .مبـ

second sentence, the تدأ خبر ليس is called خبر and the (Issmu Laisa) اسم ليس is called مبـ(khabaru laisa). The last past may be with preposition or without preposition “ب”

Conjugation of ليس with its اسم and تدأالجم :خبر ية = الخبر + المبـ لة الإسم (The Nominal

Sentence)

ية اسم ليس خبر ليس اسم ليس خبر ليس جملة اسم ليس المسلم بحاضر

The Muslim is not present

ليس المسلم حاضرا The Muslim is not

present

المسلم حاضر The Muslim is

present

واحد مذكر

ين ليسا المسلمان بحاضر Both the Muslims are

not present

ليسا المسلمان حاضرين Both the Muslims are not

present

حاضران المسلمان Both the Muslims are

present

تـثنيه مذكر

المسلمون بحاضرين ليسوا All the Muslims are not

present

المسلمون حاضرين اليسو All the Muslims are not

present

المسلمون حاضرون All the Muslims are

present

جمع مذكر

ليست المسلمة بحاضرة The Muslims (woman)

is not present

ليست المسلمة حاضرة The Muslims (woman) is

not present

المسلمة حاضرة The Muslim (woman)

is present

واحد مؤنث

المسلمتان بحاضرتين ستا لي Both the Muslims

(woman) are not present

ين ت ليستا المسلمتان حاضر Both the Muslims

(woman) are not present

المسلمتان حاضر6ن Both the Muslims

(woman) are present

تـثنية مؤنث

المسلمات بحاضرات يستل All the Muslims are not

present

ت المسلمات حاضرا تس ي ل All the Muslims are not

present

المسلمات حاضرات All the Muslims

woman are present

جمع مؤنث

لست بحاضر I am not present

لست حاضراI am not present

أV حاضر I am present

واحد متكلم

لسنا بحاضرين We are not present

لسنا حاضرين We are not present

نحن حاضرون We are present

جمع متكلم

خبر ليس مجرور بحرف جر "ب"

اسم ليس (مرفـوع

خبر ليس (منصوب)

اسم ليس (مرفـوع)

تدأ الخبر المبـ

ية الجلمة الإسم

138

(Types of the Predicate) اشكال الخبر

ثلاثة اشكال الخبر . There are three types of الخبر (predicate): مفرد (word), جملة (sentence) and

شبه جملة 27:

:is a word, for example الخبر المفرد .1

i. االله موجود (Allah is present). Here the word Allah is تدأ It is a word .خبر مفرد is موجود and مبـ

not a sentence.

ii. .and is a word not a sentence ,خبر مفرد is مفيد Here .(The book is useful) الكتاب مفيد

الجملة .2 28 is a sentence. It may be ية a verbal) جملة فعلية or (a nominal sentence) جلمة اسم

sentence), for example:

i. د استاذه ماهر تدأ is محمد ,In this sentence .(Muhammad, his teacher is an expert) محم مبـ(subject) and the nominal sentence استاذه ماهر is خبر. Without the word محمد this خبر has

two parts:

The first is استاذه which is تدأ .خبر which is ,ماهر and the second is مبـ

ii. فته ,What is the function/job/ of the director? Literally, it means the director) المديـر ما وظيـ

what is his function or his job?). Here المديـر is تدأ ظيفته و ما and مبـ is خبر.

iii. تدأ is ”الطالبات “ In this sentence, the word .(The female students went) الطالبات ذهبن المبـand the verb ذهبن is الخبر. Which is also a sentence with a verb “ تنبذھ ” and its subject

attached to this verb.

.e.g ,(zarf) ظرف or (a prepositional phrase) مركب جارى It is either a :29 شب ه جملة .3

i. هدى للمتقين (A guidance for those conscious of Allah). Here هدى is تدأ and المبـ

prepositional phrase ( مركب جارى) للمتقين is الخبر.

ن جزءا من الجملة بدون فعل، مثال:شبه الجملة هى عبارة عن مجموعة كلمات تكو : (phrase)شبه الجملة 27 . (I saw the man carrying a stick) أV رأيت الرجل يحمل شنطة

[لجملتين: الإسمية والفعلية. ق ح ل شبه جملة ت ـ-الجملة تـبدأ [لظرف مع المضاف إليه أو بحرف الجر مع مجروره. شبه -

6م، مثال: ی الجملة هى مجموعة كلمات تحتوى على فعل ولها معن : (clause)الجملة 28(I saw the man who was carrying a bag).أV رأيت الرجل الذى كان يحمل شنطة

-

139

ii. é الحمد (The praise be to Allah). In this example, الحمد is the subject (تدأ and é is the (المبـ

predicate ( الخبر). é is مركب جارى (prepositional phrase). Here, ل “ لام” is جر حرف and the

word “الله” is مجرور. The combination of both is called “ المركب الجارى”. Here, this preposition

phrase is in the place of rafa ( فى محل رفع).

iii. امام الطلاب اذ ت الأس (The professor is infront of the students). Here, the word الأستاذ is تدأ المبـand the امام is ظرف (zarf), which is الخبر (the predicate). As a zarf ( ف ر ظ ), it is منصوب, and

as a خبر it is the place of raf ( فى محل رفع).

(The Abstract) المستخلص

ية هى جملة تدأ والخبر مفيدة،الجملة الإسم وهى تتكون من المبـ (The nominal sentence is a beneficial

sentence, and is made up of two parts known as تدأ والخبر المبـ (the subject and the predicate).

تدأ .1 المبـتدأ .1.1 meaning the beginning or starting, and is so named الإبـتداء is from the Arabic word المبـ

because it comes at the beginning of the sentence.

تدأ .1.2 .and is the subject of discussion ,(Ism) اسم is an المبـ

تدأ .1.3 تان or (ـ dammah) ضمة meaning it takes a (marfuh) مرفـوع is المبـ ( dhammataan ) ضمon the last letter of the اسم (ism). Or addition of suffex ون, مسلمون

تدأ .1.4 .(the predicate) الخبر precedes (origin) أصل in its المبـ

تدأ .1.5 .(definite) معرفة is (origin) أصل in its المبـ

بر .2 الخ.(origin) اصل in its المبـتدأ is that which comes after الخبر .2.1

تدأ gives, about الخبر .2.2 information or news and by which it completes a benefit with ,المبـ

تدأ .المبـ.(indefinite) نكرة is (origin) أصل in its الخبر .2.3

تان or (ـ dahammah) ضمة meaning it takes a (marfug) مرفـوع is الخبر .2.4 on (dhammataan) ضم

the last letter of the اسم (ism).

140

سم ۔5.2 اعراب الاThe I’raab of the Noun

Case inflection is called “I’raab-ul-ismi” in Arabic:

(Genitive) مجرور ,(Accusative) منصوب ,(Nominative) مرفـوع

الإعراب @لحرف

The Change of Ir’aab (Case-Ending)

with Letter

عراب @لحركة الإ

The Change of I’raab (Case-Ending)

with Vowel Marks

141

Introduction 2nd part of Unit No.05

The 2nd part of this unit which you are going to study is about سم The I’raab of) إعراب الإ

the noun), and contains the following parts:

1. Definition of I’raab (case-ending).

2. Kinds of I’raab (changing of the endings of the nouns/words).

عراب [ .2.1 لحركة الإ (case-ending with vowel marks). Under this type of I’raab, you will also

study three kinds of the cases of the Ism ( انـواع حالات الإسم): (i) الحالة الرفعية (the nominative case).

(ii) الحالة النصبية (the accusative case).

(iii) الحالة الجرية (the genitive case).

عراب [لحرف .2.2 This change has two .(the change of I’raab with a letter/alphabet) الإ

categories:

(i) All masculine and feminine dual ( ر مؤنث .([لحرف ) are changed with letter (تـثنية مذك

(ii) All sound masculine plural nouns ( سالم جمع مذكر ) are changed with letter ( لحرف]).


With the help and grace of Allah ( سبحانه و تعالی), when you complete the study of this 2nd

part of Unit No.05, you will gain the following objectives of this unit, and Inshallah will

be able:

1. to define الإعراب (I’raab).

2. to know about the two kinds of I’raab ( اعراب): و [لحرف ركة الإعراب [لح (The change of

I’raab with vowel marks and with a letter/alphabet).

3. to know about the three different forms of the case of the noun ( الأنـواع الثلاثة لحالات الإسم): nominative, accusative and genitive cases ( جريةحالة رفعية، نصبية و ).

4. To know that the change of I’raab with a letter/alphabet ( الإعراب [لحرف) is eaffected in all

masculine feminine dual and all sound masculine plural nouns

( سالم ع مذكر جم + ث ن ؤ م و ر مذك تـثنية ).

142

سم ۔5.2 اعراب الا (The I’raab of the Noun)

عراب عراب هو: تـغ :تـعريف الإ ها لفظا أو تـقديـرا.يرو الإ خلة عليـ أواخر الكلم لإختلاف العوامل الد

The Definition of I’raab

The I’raab is: changing the ending of the word because of the changing of active

elements30 entering upon them. The change is either apparent or not apparent.

It means that the changing in the case-endings of the nouns is called “ الاسم إعراب ” (I’raab

of noun).

(Kinds of I’raab) أنـواع الإعراب

In the Arabic language, there are two kinds of إعراب (changing of the endings of the

words/nouns): لحركة] (by vowel marks) and لحرف] (by letter).

عراب @لحركة .1 الإ

In Arabic the change of I’raab (case-ending) with vowel marks is called

عراب [لحركة الإ , e.g.

/طالب الب ط ل ا .1.1 (A student/the student)

i. جاء طالب/ الطالب (a/the student came). Here, the word الطألب/طالب is in its original form

that is nominative form ( حالة رفعية), and with the change of vowels ( حركات), it may

become الطالب/طالبا in accusative case ( حالة نصبية) or الطالب/طالب in genitive case ( حالة.e.g ,(جرية

ii. رأيت طالبا/الطالب (I saw a student). Here, the word الطالب/طالبا now in accusative form

.(حالة نصبية )

iii. نطرت إلى طالب/الطالب (I looked at a/the student). And here, طالب/الطالب is in

.(genitive case) حالة جرية

نساء /النساء .1.2 (Women/The women)

i. ذهبت النساء/نساء (The women/women went). It is حالة رفعية (nominative case).

30 The active element is called العامل (al-aamil) in Arabic, and its plural is العوامل.

143

ii. ارسلت النساء/نساء (I sent the women/women). Here in this sentence, the word النساء or نساءis in حالة نصبية (accusative case).

iii. تكلمت مع النساء/ نساء (I talked to the women/women). It is genitive case

جرية حالة ( ) .

المعلمات /معلمات .1.3 (Teachers/The teachers)

i. المعلمات الكتاب كتـبت (The teachers wrote the book). Here the word المعلمات in رفعية حالة

(nominative case).

ii. رأيت المعلمات/ معلمات (I saw the teachers/teachers).

iii. نظرت إلى المعلمات/معلمات (I looked at the teachers/teachers). In the last two sentences,

only one change is used in this case which represents both the accusative as well as the

genitive form.

In all These cases, the vowel ( حركة) of the last consonant is changed.

(The Kinds of the Cases of Noun) انـواع حالات الإسم

In Arabic language, there are three kinds of the cases of the noun (اسم): nominative,

accusative and genitive.

I. الرفعية الحالة (The Nominative Case)

When a noun is used in a sentence as a subject ( فاعل) or a predicate ( خبر), it is a nominative

case ( رفعية حالة ), for example:

i. ذهب رشيد (Rashid went). Here, the noun “ رشيد” is in nominative case ( رفعية حالة ), because

.مرفـوع is فاعل and every ,(subject) فاعل is رشيد

ii. جالس الطالب (The student is sitting). Here, in this sentence, the word جالس is مرفـوع,because it is predicate ( خبر).

144

II. الحالة النصبية (The Accusative Case)

When a noun is used in a sentence as an object, it is regarded as an accusative case, e.g.

i. كتـبت الرسالة/رسالة (I wrote the letter/a letter), لبـنا/اللبن شربت (I took the milk/milk). Here,

the words “ رسالة /الرسالة ” and “ اللبن /لبـنا ” are in نصبية حالة (accusative case).

ii. ا جاء الأستاذ راكب (The teacher came riding), ذهب زيد ماشيا (Zaid went walking).

In these two sentences the words “راكبا” and “ ماشيا” are in .(accusative case) حالة نصبية

III. الحالة الحرية (The Genitive Case)

When a noun is genitive or comes after a particle, it is in genitive case, e.g.

i. يد سيارة نة حم ثميـ (Hameed’s car is expensive). In this sentence, the noun “ يد حالة is in ”حم

إليه مضاف because it is ,(genitive case) جرية .

ii. الغرفة فى الأستاذ (The teacher is in the room). Here, the word الغرفة is in genitive case ( حالة

جر حرف because of ,(جرية which is " فى" .

The change by I’raab bil harkah is affected by the following three kinds of noun:

A. All masculine and feminine singular nouns, for example:

حالة رفعية Nominative case

Original form

حالة نصبية Accusative cases Changed form

حالة جرية Genitive case

Changed form

جاء الطالب The (male) student came

With “ ال”

جاء طالب A student came

Without “ ال”

رأيت الطالب I saw the (male) student

With “ ال”

طالبا رأيت I saw a student

Without “ ال”

نطرت إلى الطالب I looked at the student

With “ ال”

نظرت إلى طالب I looked at a student

Without “ ال”

جاءت الطالبة The (female) student came

جاءت طالبة A (female) student came

رأيت الطالبة I saw the (female) student

رأيت طالبة I saw a (female) student

نظرت إلى الطالبة I looked at the student

نظرت إلى طالبة I looked at a student

B. All broken masculine and feminine nouns, e.g.

جآء رجال Men came

رأيت رجالا I saw men

نظرت إلى رجال I looked at men

نظرت إلى الرجال رأيت الرجال جآء الرجال

145

The men came I saw the men I looked at the men جآءت نساء

Women came

رأيت نساء I saw women

نظرت إلى نساء I looked at women

جآءت النساء The women came

رأيت النساء I saw the men

نظرت إلى النساء I looked at the women

C. All feminine sound plural nouns ( السالم المؤنث مع الج )

There is only one change in this kind/category which presents both the accusative and the

genitive case, e.g.

مسلمات ت كتـب Muslim women wrote

لقيت مسلمات I met Muslim women

مسلمات نظرت إلى I looked to Muslim women

كتـبت المسلمات The Muslim women wrote

لقيت المسلمات I met to Muslim women

نظرت إلى المسلمات I looked to the Muslim women

(Change of I’raab with Letter) الأعراب @لحرف .2

The change of I’raab with letter is for the following two kinds of nouns:

2.1. All masculine dual and feminine dual ( تـثنية مذكر و مؤنث) are changed with letter ( لحرف]),

e.g.

For masculine gender, the dual of طالب (a student) is طالبان (two male students) which is

in nominative case. It is changed into طالبين, representing the accusative and the genitive

case. Here, ان (aani) in changed into ين (maini).

For of feminine gender, the dual of طالبة (a female student is طالبـتان (two female students).

It is in nominative case جالة رفعية, and in original form is like طالبان. It ( طالبـتان) is changed

into طالبـتين, representing the accusative and the genitive case. In this case 6ن is changed

into تين. Here, in this category, نـون ) ن at the end with kassra) is indicative of a dual noun.

2.2. All sound masculine plural nouns ( جمع مذكر سالم) are changed, like all masculine dual and

feminine dual, with letter ( لحرف]), e.g.

مسلمون (Muslimona) is the nominative case, and the original form, and ( مسلمون) is

changed into مسلمين representing the both accusative and genitive case ( حالة نصبية و جرية).

In this case “ ون م ” is changed to “ ين م ”.

Here, in this category, نون ) ن at the end with fatha فـتحة) is indicative of a sound plural

noun.

146

Summary of the change of I’raab with letter ( [لحرف اعراب ) both the dual (m. & f.) and the

sound plural noun:

حالة رفعية Original form

حالة نصبية Changed form

حالة جرية Changed form

نظرت إلى مسلمين رأيت مسلمين جاء مسلمان مسلمتين نظرت إلى رأيت مسلمتين جاءت مسلمة نظرت إلى مسلمين رأيت مسلمين جاء مسلمون

سم ) حالات إعراب الإ The Cases of the I’raab of noun)

حالة جرية (Genitive Case)

Changed form-2nd

حالة نصبية (Accusative Case) Changed form-1st

حالة رفعية (Nominative Case)

Original form

عدد و جنس Number & Gender

واحد مذكر مسلم/ المسلم مسلما/ المسلم مسلما/ المسلم Masculine Singular

/ المسلمين / المسلمين مسلمين تـثنية مذكر مسلمان/ المسلمان مسلمينMasculine Dual

/ المسلمين / المسلمين مسلمين ر سالم مسلمون/ المسلمون مسلمين جمع مذكMasculine Plural

المسلمة مسلمة/ واحد مؤنث مسلمة/ المسلمة مسلمة/ المسلمة Feminine Singular

/ المسلمتين / المسلمتين مسلمتين تـثنية مؤنث مسلمتان/ المسلمتان مسلمتينFeminine Dual

جمع مؤنث سالم مسلمات/ المسلمات مسلمات/ المسلمات مسلمات/ المسلمات Feminine sound Plural

الكتب /كتب كتـبا/ الكتب كتب/ الكتب ر مكسر جمع مذكMasculine broken Plural

نساء نساء/ ال نسوة/ النسوة

نساء/ النساء نسوة/ النسوة

نساء/ النساء نسوة/ النسوة

جمع مؤنث مكسر Feminine broken Plural

Note:

1. In serial No. 1, 4, 6 and 7, the change marks الإعراب [لحركات.2. In serial No. 2, 3 and 5, the change of اعراب (I’raab) is affected by the letters عراب الإ

.[لحروف

3. In serial No. 2, 3, 5 and 6 the changed form 1st and 2nd are the same.

147

More About Cases

1. Nominative: A noun will be in the nominative case ( رفعية حالة ), if it is subject or an

object to a passive or a predicate in a sentence, for example:

i. ذهب رشيد (Rashid went).

ii. قتل اسد (A lion was killed).

iii. رسالة كتب محمد (Muhammad wrote a letter).

iv. .(He is wise) هو عاقل

2. Accusative: There are many kinds of a noun as accusative case ( نصبية حالة ), e.g.

i. Object accusative, e.g., يد كتا[ كتب حم (Hameed wrote a book).

ii. Cognative object, e.g., يلا اصبر صبرا جم (Be patient with good patience).

iii. Object of reason or cause, e.g., ديـباë ضربـته (I punished him to re-fine him).

iv. Object of time or place, e.g., يد صباحا جاء حم (Hameed came in the morning).

v. Object of accompanying circumstance, e.g., .(I went along the road) ذهبت والشارع

vi. Object of exception, e.g., يدا جاء القوم الا حم (All the people came except Hameed).

vii. Object of construct, e.g., عبد الله \ (O! servant of Allah)

viii. Accusative by negative لا, e.g., .There is nobody in the house) لا رجل فى البـيت

3. Genitive: A noun is in genitive case ( جرية حالة ), if it comes after a preposition or genitive,

for example:

i. فى بـيت الرجل (In the house of the man).

ii. كرسى خشب (A chair made of wood).

iii. الجهل كثير (Most foolish).

iv. امرأة الكثيرة المال (The rich woman).

تة (The I’raab of the Six Nouns) اعراب الأسماء الس

When the nouns اب (a father), اخ (a brother), حم (a father-in-law), فم (a mouth), هنو (athing) and ذو (a possessor of) are in construct state other than the first person singular,

their cases are as follows:

148

حالة جرية Genitive case

حالة نصبية Accusative case

حالة رفعية Nominative case

ابـو father (of) (The) أ[ أبى اخو brother (of) (The) اخا أخى حمو father-in-law (of) (The) حما حمى فـو mouth (of) (The) فا فى هنـو thing (of) (The) هنا هنى ذو possessor (of) (The) ذا ذى

) comes only in the construct state ذو اضافى مركب ), as: عقل ذو (intelligent).

سم خلاصة إعراب الإ (Summary of the I’raab of Noun)

سم حالات الإThe Cases of the Ism (Noun)

عراب الأصلية علامات الإThe Original Signs of I’raab

عراب انـواع الإTypes of I’raab

ـ / مرفـوع الرفع ـ / ـ منصوب النصب ـ / مجرور الجر

This table illustrates types of I’raab and its origin, signs:

الرفع .1 (ar-rafu) is when the end of the last letter ( حرف) of a word takes a ضمة (dhammah)

or تان بـيت /البـيت ,.e.g ,(dhammahtaan) ضم (the house/a house). So, when an ism (noun) is

in the state of لرفع ا (ar-raf’u), it is called مرفـوع (marfoo).

النصب .2 (an-nasbu) is when the end or the last letter of a word takes a فـتحة (fatha) or فـتحتان(fathataan), e.g., تا البـيت /بـيـ . So, when an ism (a noun) is in the state of النصب (an-nasbu),

it is called منصوب (mansoob).

الجر .3 (al-jarru) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a كسرة (khasrah) or نëكسر(khasrataan), e.g., البـيت /بـيت . So, when an ism (a noun) is in the state of الجر (al-jarru),

it is called مجرور (majroor).

(The Example) المثال

ين جاجة [لسك ذبح زيد الد (Zaid slaughtered the chicken with the knife).

149

This example shows the three types of إعراب (I’raab):

i. مل عا The .مرفـوع is زيد (active element), which is causing it to be مرفـوع, is the

ماض فعل (past tense verb) ذبح.

ii. is the ,منصوب which is causing it to be ,(active element) عامل The .منصوب is الدجاجة

ماض فعل (past tense verb) ذبح.

iii. ين ,مجرور which is causing it to be ,(active element) عامل The .مجرور is (the knife) السكis the ب " الجر حرف" .

The words, which fall into the definition of اعراب (I’raab) as mentioned above, are known

in Arabic as معرب (declinable).

150

و البناء عراب الا ��

سم المبنى سم المعرب و الإ الإ

The Indeclinable Noun The Declinable Noun

غير المنصرف/ الممنـوع من الصرف مبنى على ضمة مبنى على فـتحة مبنى على سكونThe Diptotes/The Declension OR Prevented from Tanween

المنصرف The Triptotes

Nouns which do not take nunation

and kasara (The Genitive (تـنوين )

Marker)

حالة جرية Genitive Case

حالة نصبية Accusative Case

حالة رفعية Nominative Case

151


The 3rd part of this Unit No.05 is about الأسماء المعربة (the declinable nouns) and الأسماء:and contains the following parts ,(the indeclinable nouns) المبنية

.(the definition of the declinable noun) تـعريف المعرب .1

:(the kinds of declinable noun) أنـواع المعرب .2

(i) المنصرف (the triptote or first declension). In this kind, the اعراب (I’raab), its ending,

changes under all the different conditions: ة حالة رفعية، حالة جرية، حالة نصبي (nominative, accusative and genitive conditions) and takes nunation.

(ii) غير المنصرف (The diptote or second declension): In this kind the noun does not

accept tanween ( تـنوين) in nominative case, and accepts only فـتحة (fatha) in both

the accusative and the genitive cases.

.(Definition of the indeclinable) تـعريف المبنى .3

:for examples ,(The kinds of indeclinable nouns/ words) أنـواع الأسماء المبنية .4

(i) فصلة و متصلة .(Detached & Attached pronouns) ضمائر منـ

(ii) أسماء موصولة (Relative Pronouns).

(iii) أسماء الإشارة (Demonstrative Pronouns).

(iv) حروف جر (Prepositions).

(v) أدوات استفهام (Interrogative pronouns).

(vi) الأفـعال (The Verbs).

(vii) الملكية ضمائر (Possessive Pronouns), etc.

Objectives of 3rd part of Unit No.05 With the help and the grace of Allah ( سبحانه و تعالی), when you complete the study of this 3rd part of Unit No.05 carefully, you will be able:

1. to define نى المعرب و المب (the declinable and indeclinable nouns).

2. to know about سم المعرب لا انـواع ا (the kinds of the declinable noun): منصرف (triptote) and

.(diptote) غير منصرف

3. to know about .(the kinds of the indeclinable nouns) أنـواع الاسماء المبنية

152

۔5.3 مبنىمعرب و ال

ال

The Declinable and the Indeclinable

عراب (Kinds of the Noun with Respect to the I’raab) انـواع الإسم من حيث الإ

In Arabic language, with respect to the I’raab (عراب معرب اسم :the noun has two kinds ,(الإ(declinable noun) and اسم مبنى (indeclinable noun).

المعرب .1 (The Declinable)

اخلة (The definition of Declinable):تـعريف المعرب المعرب هو: ما يـتـغير آخره بسبب العوامل الد، مسلمون، مسل هأ، مثلا: طالب، طالبا، طالب، رسول، رسولا، رسول، مسلمان، مسلمين .عليـ مين

Mu’rab ( معرب) is that the ending of a noun/word changes because of the active elements

entering upon it.

المعرب أنـواع (Kinds of the mu’rab)

The معرب is further divided into two types: منصرف and .غير منصرف

(The first declension1 OR triptote) المنصرف .1

The I’raab ( عراب the ending of a noun changes under all the different conditions as (الإ

shown under the title: “ سم .mentioned above in unit number 14, page 178 ”خلاصة إعرب الإ

المنصرف غير .2 (Diptote)

In Arabic language, there are certain nouns and adjectives that never take a تـنوين(Tanwin). This type of nouns and adjectives are called Diptotes in English and غير

.in Arabic language الممنـوع من الصرف or المنصرف

For this type, the noun does not accept تـنوين (tanween), and in the genitive case-ending,

it does not accept ةکسر It has only two case-endings namely nominative (original .ـ

form represented with ـ ضمة) and accusative (represented with ـ فـتحة) which is also

representative of genitive case.

Groups of the Un-nunated Nouns/Words

There are different groups/types/categories the nouns/words which never take a تـنوين(Tanween):

1 The forms of a word that change in some language according to the number, case and gender of the word.

153

1. Non Arabic Proper Nnouns

Most of the non Arabic proper nouns are un-nunated and, therefore, do not take a

Tanween, for example:

i. The Biblical Names

Most of the biblical names do not take a Tanween, e.g., names of most of the Prophets:

i.e., هارون ,اسحاق ,إسماعيل ,عيسى ابـراهيم ,يـوسف ,يـعقوب ,داود, , etc.

ii. Other Foreign Arabic’s Names

In Arabic all the foreign names do not have Tanween on them, i.e. لندن ,موسكو ,[كستان.etc ,يـنايـر ,طهران

Exception to this Rule

However, the non Arabic names comprising of three letters only are nunated (nun, noon,

nin) such as: نصر ,لوط ,نـوح, etc.

2. Feminine Names

All the feminine proper nouns (i.e., names), suffixed by the feminine sign or otherwise

never have Tanween, e.g., خديجة ,مكة ,زيـنب ,مريم ,حفصة ,عائشة , etc.

3. Adjectives on the Pattern of فـعلانThe adjectives on the pattern of فـعلان do not take the double vowel sign, i.e., they are

diptotes ( منصرف غير ), e.g., عطشان (thirsty), زعلان (angry), ملآن (full). Names of men on

the pattern of فـعلان or the nouns that end with “ ان”, e.g., غضبأن ,حيران ,نـعمان ,سلمان كامران ,.etc ,عمران ,سفيان ,رحمان ,عثمان

4. Masculine Names

The masculine proper nouns (i.e., names) with “ مربـوطة ”ة (closed ta) as the ending letter

do not take a Tanwin, e.g., سلمة ,معاوية كر\ ,امية ,حمزة ,طلحة ز, , etc.

5. Nouns ending with الف مقصورة There are some nouns ending with الف or زائدۃالف مقصورة (short الف) which never take a

Tanwin, e.g., دنـيا (world), ی ادن (near), اقصى ◌ (distant), ی موس ی عيس , , etc.

154

6. Nouns ending with ممدودة ألف There are some nouns ending with “ ـ اء ( ممدودة ألف ), prolonged vowel which never take

a Tanwen, e.g., راء خض (green), زرقاء (blue), حمراء (red), بـيضاء (white), سوداء (black), فـقراء(poor), شرفاء (nobles), رحماء (merciful). These nouns are on the pattern of فـعلاء and أفعلاء.

7. Some Additional Nouns

Some additional nouns, e.g., فرعون (pharaoh), جهنم (hell), ابليس (satan), ماجوج و Ùجوج

(Gog and Magog), etc.

8. Some of the Patterns of Broken Plural

The broken plural nouns with the pattern of مفاعل and مفاعيل never take a Tanween, e.g.

أقاويل ,(glass) قـواريـر ,(dirhams) دراهم ,(graves) مقابر ,(mosque) مساجد ,(bed) مضاجع (sayings), مصابيح (lamps), زلزال (earth quake), اماكن ,سواعد ,مناقب (places).

9. Masculine Proper Nouns with the Pattern of افـعلAll the masculine proper nouns (names), which has the pattern of افـعل, never have a

Tanween, e.g., احسن (beautiful, handsome), اكبر ,امجد ,افضل ,أحمد (the great), أنـور ، أسمر , etc.

10. The Adjectives with the Pattern of افـعلAll the adjectives with the pattern of افـعل are un-nunated, and hence, they never take a

Tanween, e.g., أحمر (red), أسود (black), أبـيض (white), زق أر (blue), أعلم (the most

knowledgeable scholar), أجهل (the most ignorant), أسرع (the most accelerative), اعمق (the

deepest), اعقل (the wisest), اجمل (the most beautiful).

11. Masculine Proper Nouns with Pattern of يـفعلAll the masculine proper nouns, which has the pattern of يـفعل, never have a Tanwin, e.g.,

.etc ,يزيد

Note:

i. It is never allowed to use a تـنوين (tanween) with any of these categories:

ii. Whenever they are مجرور (majroorun), one must use a فـتحة (fatha) instead of a كسرة (kasra),

unless the word is preceded by the definite article “ال”, e.g.

a. :(from the bed) عن المضاجع

155

﴿ öΝ ßγç/θãΖ ã_ 4’nû$ yf tFs? Çtã Æì Å_$ŸÒ yϑø9 $# …﴾

“Their sides part (i.e., they arise) from (their) beds; …” (32:16).

b. من شعآئر الله:

¨βÎ)” $x� ¢Á9 $# nο uρ ö�yϑ ø9 $# uρ ÏΒ Ì� Í←!$ yèx© .“ . . . «! $#“Indeed, the Safa and the Marwah are among the symbols of Allah…” (2:158).

c. :للفقراء $yϑ ‾Ρ Î)” àM≈ s% y‰¢Á9 $# .“ . . . Ï!# t�s) à� ù=Ï9

“Zakat expenditures are only for the poor …” (9:60).

d. الطاولة على (on the table), الزلزال من (from the earthquake), etc.

e. “ تـقويم احسن فى ”. “In the best stature/mould” (95:4).

Use of Un-nunated Noun/Words in Sentences of Daily Usage:

Arabic Sentence Translation Reason of Un-nunation

Nadia went out of the house. Feminine Proper Noun خرجت Vدية من البـيت.

// .This is Asma, she is my sister هذه أسماء، هى أختى.

// .Maryam ate the food اكلت مريم الطعام.

صلى الله عليه وسلم.الله سول حمزة عم ر Hamza رضی الله عنہ was the paternal uncle of Prophet صلى الله عليه وسلم.

Masculine Proper Noun

with Ta Marbutah ( مربـوطة ة )

as the ending letter.

The teacher’s name is Ajmal. Masculine Proper Noun اسم الأستاذ أجمل.

with the pattern of أفـعل. Akram’s mother is a nice اكرم أمه إمرأة جيدة.

lady. Masculine with ta-e-

marbutah ( المربـوطة 6ء )

.Sara went to her house. Feminine Proper Noun ذهبت سارة إلى بـيتها.

خرجت من الفصل وأV غضبان.

I went out of the class room and I am angry.

Adjective with the

Pattern of فـعلان.

This color is green. Adjective with the هذا اللون أحضر.

Pattern of أفـعل. .Pakistan is a Muslim country. Foreign Arabicised Noun [كستان بـلد مسلم.

.Ishaq is an intelligent student. Biblical Noun اسحاق طالب ذكى.

January is the first month of يـنايـر اول الشهر فى السنة.the year.

Foreign Arabicised Word.

Where are colleagues? Broken Plural on the أين زملاء.

156

Pattern of فـعلاء. الشوارع.فـقراء فى Poor people are in the street. //

// .All partners went together شركاء ذهبـومعا.

They are friends. Broken Plural on the هم أصدقاء.

Pattern of أفـعلاء. // .These merchants are rich هؤلاء التجار أغنياء.

س كثيرة.فى هذه القرية مدار There are a lot of schools in this village.

Broken Plural on the

Pattern of مفاعل.

لة. يـ // .These mosques are beautiful هذه مساجد جم

// .These are wooden desk هذه مكاتب خشبية.

Golden keys are for the houses. Broken Plural on the مفاتيح ذهبية للبـيت.

Pattern of مفاعيل.

المبنى .2 (The Indeclinable)

(Al-binaa) البناء

are words that do not change their endings, and are considered by the (al-binaa) البناء

grammarians to be the opposite to words which take الإعرب (al-I’raab), as mentioned

above. The words which fall into this category are called مبنى (mabni-indeclinable).

ها. (Definition of Mabniyy): المبنی يف تـعر اخلة عليـ المبنى هو: مالا يـتـغير آخره بسبب العوامل الدis that the ending of a noun/word doesn’t change of the active elements (mabni) مبنى

entering upon it.

The definition explains that the ending of مبنى words do not change because of the عوامل(active elements) entering upon them, rather they are built upon one ending which doesn’t

change at all. However, these words can grammatically have place in I’raab, but they will

be in the position or state of الرفع ، النصب ، الجر due to their place in the sentence.

Kinds of the مبنى (Indeclinable) Words/Nouns

The words, whose vowel endings do not change, in order to indicate their function, are

called indeclinable words ( مبنية الفاظ ), and have to remain unchanged. In Arabic language,

most of the nouns (about 90%) are معرب (declinable). However, some words (nouns,

pronouns) are مبنى (indeclinable), for example:

1. Detached Pronouns ( فصلة (ضمائر منـ

157

Most of the detached (personal) pronouns are indeclinable مبنى like: ,هن ,هى ,هم ,هما ,هو

.نحن ,أV ,انتن ,انت ,انـتم ,انـتما ,أنت

2. Demonstrative Pronouns ( شارة (ضمائر/ أسماء الإ

Except the dual 1(6نك ، ذانك ، ها6ن ، هذان ) األتـثنية all demonstrative pronouns

( شارة اسماء الإ ) are مبنى: هذه، هذا (this), هؤلاء (these), ،ذلك تلك (that), اولئك (those). These are indeclinable words.

3. Prepositions جر حروفMost of the prepositions are على، عن، فى، و, ل، ك، ت، ب :مبنى ، .etc ,إلى، حتى

4. Relative Pronouns ( الموصولة الأسماء )

Except the dual (اللتين، اللتان، اللذين/اللذان ) ,التـثنية all the relatives pronouns are مبنى(indeclinable): الذى (who), ئى ,التى ,الذين .اللا

5. Interrogative Pronouns ( ستفهام أسمأء الإ )

All the interrogative pronouns/articles are indeclinable ( مبنى), e.g., من (who), ماذا، ما(what), اين (where), كيف (how), كم (how much), لما (for what), لماذا (why) etc.

6. Possessive Pronouns ( الملكية ضمائر )

All the possessive pronouns are indeclinable ( مبنى) i.e., ه هما ,(he alone) ا\ هم ,ا\ ها ,ا\ ,ا\هن ك ,إ\ كما ,إ\ ك ,إ\ كن ,ا\ ى ,إ\ V ,إ\ .(we alone) إ\

7. Attached Pronouns ( متصلة ضمائر )

All the attached pronouns are مبنى i.e., ه (his), هما (their), ها (her), هن (they), ك (your),

.V (our) ,(my) ى ,(your) كن ,(your) ك ,(your) كم ,(your) كما

8. Cardinal Numbers

Cardinal numbers from eleven to nineteen (11-19) are مبنى, e.g., عشر أحد عشر اثـنا , ثلاثة ,

.etc ,تسعة عشر ,عشر

9. Verbs of All Kinds

All kinds of verbs are مبنى e.g., لاتـقتل ,اقـتل ,يـقتل ,قـتل along with passive forms ( مجهول) of

all verbs e.g., يـقتل ,قتل, etc.

1 These dual demonstrative pronouns are معرب (declinable) because of having three cases: nominative, accusative

and genitive, i.e. هذين، هاتين ، ذينك ، تـينك .

158

(Types of Al-binaa) انـواع البناء

مبنى على ...Built upon …

أمثلة Examples

انـواع البناء The Types of Al-binaa

نـعم، فى من، هذا، مبنى على سكون ـسكون: ـضمة: نحن، حيث مبنى على ضمة ـفـتحة: أين، ذهب، أنت مبنى على فـتحة ـكسرة: هذه، أنت، ل، هؤلاء مبنى على كسرة

This above table shows that مبنى can fall into four types of ending which do not change

due to the عوامل (active element) entering upon them, but rather they are fixed or builtupon that particular ending. There are four possible endings:

.etc , ,فـتحة ,ضمة ,سكون كسرة

(?Whose book is this) كتاب من هذا؟

This example shows that the word “ من” is إليه مضاف which is always مجرور (Majrurun

means it takes a kasrah), however, the word من (who) is سكون على مبنى (built upon a

sukun). So, the ending will always show a سكون (sukun) even though it is in the position

or state of الجر (al-jarr) due to its place in the sentence. So, the عامل (active element) does

not effect the ending of a word that is مبنى (mabni).

كتاب من هذا

مضاف اليه (Possessor)

سكون على مبنى

مضاف (Possessed)

مركب اضافى

السکون خبر مبنى على تدأ مبـ

ية خبرية جملة اسم

159

QUESTIONS

ةسئل


سئل

جب e الا :ا

ية ـ الجملة عرف ـ 1 الاسمتد ال بين الفرق ام ـ 2 ؟والخبر ء امبـتدأ على تحتوي مل التي الج اكتب ـ 3 بر ثم تـرجمها المبـ الآتية: الأبـواب من نجليزية الإ اللغة إلى والخ

يضرب ضرب [ب ـ 2 يـفتح فـتح [ب ـ 1 يسمع [ب سمع ـ 4 [ب نصريـنصر ـ 3 يكرم كرم ـ 6 يحسب [ب حسب ـ 5

تداء مطابـقة فيها التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ـ 4 بروالمبـ ـ نجليزية الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم الختداء إشكال هي ما ـ 5 ؟ المبـتداو فيها الخبر التي المفيدة الجمل مع "ليس" استخدم ـ 6 ـ نجليزية الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم ء المبـبر شكال أ هي ما ـ 7 ؟ الخعراب عرف ـ 8 ليزية ـنج الإ و [لعربية الإعراب؟ أنـواع هى ما ـ 9 الإ

الاسم؟ حالات أنـواع هى ما ـ 10تة ـ الأسماء اب ر ع ا هى ما ـ 11 الس ـ ليزية نج الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم "ن يكو " الناقص الفعل مع صيغ لم استخدم ـ 12 ال ث بم حهاووض الاسم إعراب خلاصة اكتب ـ 13عراب حيث من الاسم أنـواع هى ما ـ 14 ؟ الإ عرف المعرب ـ 15 ه أنـواع وبين ب و المبني عرف ـ 16 ه أنـواع ين؟ البناء أنـواع هي ما ـ 17

161

وحدۃ

� � � � �� الأفـعال السادسة : ال

Unit No.06: The Tenses (1)

تـعريف الفعل الماضى ۔6.1

Definition of the Past Tense

اقسام الفعل الماضى ۔6.2

Kinds of the Past Tense


�ق الأستاذ الدکتور : راجعالم� سمیع ا

Written by: Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Reviewed by: Prof. Dr. Sami ul Haq

162

اقسام الفعل الماضى Kinds of the past tense

(6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)

الفعل الماضى المعلوم الفعل الماضى المجهول الفعل الماضى القريب الفعل الماضى البعيد الفعل الماضى المنفى الفعل الماضى الجارى(The Past

Continuous Tense),

e.g., كان يـفعل (He

used to do)

(The Negative Past

Tense), e.g., لم يـفعل(He did not do)

and مافـعل He did

not do

(The Distant Past

Tense), e.g., كان (He had done) فـعل

(The Near Past

Tense) OR (Present

Perfect Tense),

e.g., قدفـعل (He has

done)

(The Passive Past

Tense), e.g., فعل (He

was done)

(The Active Past

Tense), e.g., فـعل (He

did)

163

Introduction to Unit No.06

Insha’Allah, in this unit, you will study about the following topics:

الماضى تـعريف الفعل .1 (Definition of the past tense).

الماضى اقسام الفعل .2 (Kinds of the past tense).

i. المعروف الفعل الماضى (The active past tense).

ii. الفعل الماضى المجهول (The passive past tense).

iii. الفعل الماضى القريب (The near past tense).

iv. الفعل الماضى البعيد (The distant past tense).

v. الفعل الماضى المنفى (The negative past tense).

vi. الجارى / الفعل الماضى المستمر (The past continuous tense).

Objectives of Unit No.06

When one completes the study of this unit, one will be able to gain the following

objectives:

1. To define the Past Tense.

2. To define the active Past Tense and to conjugate it, e.g., فـعل (He did), قـتل (He killed), etc.

3. To define the passive Past Tense and to conjugate it, e.g., فعل (He was done), قتل (He was

killed).

4. To define the near Past Tense and to conjugate it, e.g., فـعل قد (He has just done).

5. To define the distant Past Tense and to conjugate it, e.g., فـعل كان (He had done).

6. To define the negative Past Tense and to conjugate it, e.g., يـفعل لم (He never do) and ما

.(He did not do) فـعل

7. To define the Past Continuous Tense and to conjugate it, e.g., يـفعل كان (He was doing).

164

ماضى تعريف ۔ 6.1فعل ال

ال

(Definition of the Past Tense) The Past (form of the) Tense denotes an action that has been completed and finished at

the indicated time and it is often referred to the past. In other words we can say that past

tense denotes a completed action, e.g., كتب (He wrote), ضرب (He beated), etc.

ماضى 6.2فعل ال

اقسام ال

(Kinds of the Past Tense)There are five kinds of Past Tense:

م و ل ع م ال الماضى ل ع ف ل ا .1 (The Active Past Verb)

The active form of the Past Tense is called “ م و ل ع / م ف و ر ع م ” (literally, known) in which

the subject ( فاعل) is known.

ذكر معه فاعله، مثلا:ي الفعل الذى و ه م و ل ع م ال ل ع ف ل ا

1. The student wrote the lesson. 1. كتب الطالب الدرس

2. Allah created. الله خلق .2

In these two examples, ب ال ط ل ا and the word “ الله” are subjects of the verb. The subject

may be in form of مستتر ضمير (hidden pronoun) as “he” in “ كتب” and “ خلق”, or it may be

mentioned as an apparent noun as“ ب ال لط ا ” in الطالب كتب and the word “ ◌ الله ” in “ خلق

.”الله

:Conjugations1 of the Past Tense (Active form)) صي غ الف عل الماضى المعروف

i. Conjugation table for the Active Verb فـعل ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

فـعلواThey did

فـعلا Both of them did

فـعل He did


فـعلن They did

فـعلتاBoth of them did

فـعلت She did


ر اض ح ر ك ذ م فـعلت فـعلتما فـعلتم

1 The Inflection (دان��) of a particular verb.

165

All of you did Both of you did You did 2nd person m.

فـعلتن All of you did

فـعلتماBoth of you did

فـعلت You did


فـعلناWe did

فـعلنا(Both of us did) We did

فـعلت I did


2. Conjugation table for the Active Verb قـتل

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لوا قـت ـ They killed

قـتلا Both of them killed

قـتل He killed


لن قـت ـ They killed

لتاقـت ـ Both of them killed

لت قـت ـ She killed


لتم قـت ـ You killed

لتماقـت ـ Both of you killed

لت قـت ـ You killed


لتن قـت ـ You killed

لتماقـت ـ Both of you killed

لت قـت ـ You killed


لناقـت ـ We killed

لناقـت ـ (Both of us) We killed

لت قـت ـ I killed


ل و ه ج م ال ل ع ف ل ا .2 (The Passive Past Tense)

The Passive form of the Past Tense is called ل و ه ج م ال (Al-Majhul, Literally, unknown), in

which the subject ( الفاعل) is not known.

ل من و ه ج م فاعل. ويـبنى ال ب ى يحذف فاعله ويجعل المفعول به Vئ ذ ال ل ع ف ال و ه ل و ه ج م ال الماضى ل ع ف ل ا تـعدى ال

، مثلا:م و ل ع م الم

1. The lesson was written كتب الدرس .1

2. The earth was created الأرض ق ل خ .2

The passive Past Tense is formed on the pattern of فعل (it was done) by placing a ضمة(dhammah) on the first letter and كسرة (kasrah) on the middle letter as the example below:

Active verb ( فـعل) Passive verb ( فعل) (He did) فـعل (It/ was done) فعل

(He wrote) كتب (It was written) كتب

166

(He drank) شرب (It was drunk) شرب

(He killed) قـتل (He was killed) قتل

(He entered) دخل (He was entered) دخل

(He descended) نـزل (He/It was descended) نزل

ل جهو الم الماضى عل الف غ صي (Conjugations of the Past Tense (Passive form):

i. Conjugation Table for the Passive Verb فعلع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

فعلواThey were done

فعلا Both of them were done

فعل He was done


فعلن They were done

فعلتاBoth of them were done

فعلت She was done


فعلتم You were done

فعلتماBoth of you were done

فعلت You were done


فعلتن You were done

فعلتماBoth of you were done

فعلت You were done


فعلناWe were done

فعلناWe were done

فعلت I was done


ii. Conjugation Table for the Passive Verb ل قتع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لوا قت They were all killed

لا قت They were both killed

ل قت He was killed


لن قت They were all killed

لتا قت They were both killed

لت قت She was killed


لتم قت You were killed

لتماقت You were both killed

لت قت You were killed


لتن قت You were killed

لتماقت You were both killed

لت قت You were killed


لنا قت We were killed

لنا قت We were killed

لت قت I was killed


167

Other Kinds of the Past Tense ( رى خ انـواع الفعل الماضى الأ ):

1(The Near Perfect) الماضى القريب .3

When the particle ( ق د – qad) is prefixed to any غة of the Past Tense2, it will give (form) صيـ

the meaning of near perfect 3 ( م اض ى ق ر ي ب) e.g., قد قـتل (he has just killed), he has) قد ذهب

just gone), قد خرج (he has just come out), قد نصر (he has just helped).

Conjugation of ب ي ر ق ى اض م (Near Past Tense)

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

قد فـعلواAll of them have just

done

قد فـعلا Both of them have just

done

قد فـعل He has just done


قد فـعلن All of them have just

done

قد فـعلتاBoth of them have just

done

قد فـعلت She has just done


قد فـعلتم All of you have just done

قد فـعلتماBoth of you have just done

قد فـعلت You have just done


قد فـعلتن All of you have just done

قد فـعلتماBoth of you have just done

قد فـعلت You have just done


قد فـعلناWe have just done

قد فـعلناBoth of us have just done

قد فـعلت I have just done


Note: (i) قد is a حرف (i.e., particle), so, it does not change its, form with the changing form of

the verb, as mentioned above.

(ii) When the particle قد or لقد is prefixed to any ة غ ي ـص (form) of the Past Tense (Present

Perfect Tense), it also gives an emphasis and denotes certainty ( كيدë) to the meaning of

the verb, e.g.

a. قد دخل المحاضر غرفة المحاضرة (The lecturer has already entered the classroom).

b. قد افـلح المؤمنـون (Indeed, the believers are successful).

c. نسان فى احسن تـقويم لقد خلقنا الإ (Indeed, we (Allah) created man in the best state/mould).

4(The Distant Past Tense) الفعل الماضى البعيد .4

When the incomplete verb ( ص اق ن ال ل ع ف ال is prefixed to the Past Tense, it will give the كان (

meaning of distant Past Tense. e.g., نصر كان (He had helped), ,(He had gone) كان ذهب

.(He had killed) كان قـتل

1 It is also called “Immediate past or Present Perfect Tense”. 2 It is also called “Perfect Tense”. 3 Or it will give the sense of Present Perfect Tense. 4 According to some grammarian, the distant past verb/tense is also called “distant perfect tense” or “past perfect

tense”.

168

Inflection/Conjugation of the Distant Past Tense

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

فـعلوا كانـو All of them had done

Vفـعلا كا Both of them had done

فـعل كان He had done


فـعلن كن All of them had done

تافـعل كانـتا Both of them had done

ت فـعل كانت She had done


تم فـعلتم كنـ All of you had done

تما فـعلتما كنـ Both of you had done

فـعلت كنت You have done


فـعلتن كنتن All of you had done

تما فـعلتما كنـ Both of you had done

فـعلت كنت You had done


فـعلنا كنا We had done

فـعلنا كنا Both of us had done

فـعلت كنت I had done


(The Negative Past Tense) الفعل الماضى المنفى .5

5.1. When “ لم” is prefixed to a Present ( ع ار ض م ) Tense, then the ( لم) converts the Present Tense

to negative Past Tense. e.g., يكتب (He writes), لم يكتب (He did not write), يذهب (He

goes), لم يذهب (He did not go), يـنصر (He helps), لم يـنصر (He did not help).

Conjugation of the Negative Past Tense

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

علواف ي ـ لم All of them did not do

علا ف ي ـ لم Both of them did not do

عل ف ي ـ لم He did not do

ب ائ غ ر ك ذ م

3rd person m.

يـفعلن لم All of them did not do

تـفعلا لم Both of them did not do

تـفعل لم She did not do


لم تـفعلواAll of you did not do

لم تـفعلا Both of you did not do

لم تـفعل You did not do


لم تـفعلن All of you did not do

لم تـفعلا Both of you did not do

لم تـفعلىYou did not do


لم نـفعل We did not do

لم نـفعل Both of us did not do

لم افـعل I did not do


Beside converting the meaning of Mudarig ( ع ار ض م [Present Tense]) into negative Past

Tense, “ لم” brings the following changes in ع مضار :

169

1. The جزم is replaced by مضارع at the end of ضمة i.e., the ,مضارع مجزوم becomes مضارع مرفـوع which makes it مجزوم (Majzoom), e.g., ,اكتب ,لم يكتب ,يكتب ) Allah says in Al-Quran Al-Hakim .لم نجعل ,نجعل ,لم اكتب يßا لم نجعل له من قـبل سم ). (We have

given that name to none before (him) [19:7].

2. The نـون اعرابى is removed from the مضارع, for example: ,يذهبـون ,لم يذهبا ,يذهبان يذهبـوا لم نـوالم يـؤم ,يـؤمنون , .

Note: When لم is prefixed to an incomplete verb , قصV فعل :the conjugation is as follows يكون

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

يكونـوا لم They were (all) not

يكوV لم They were (both) not

يكن لم He was not


3rd person m.

يكن لم They were (all) not

تكوV لم They were (both) not

لم تكن She was not


لم تكونـواYou were (all) not

Vلم تكو You were (both) not

تكن لم You were not


لم تكن You were (all) not

Vلم تكو You were (both) not

لم تكونى You were not


لم نكن We were (all) not

لم نكن We were (both) not

اكن لم I was not


Usage of لم with the Conjugation of يـقول

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

يـقولوا لم All of them did not say

قولا ي ـ لم Both of them did not say

يـقل لم He did not say


3rd person m.

يـقلن لم All of them did not say

ولا تـق لم Both of them did not say

لم تـقل She did not say


لم تـقولواAll of you did not say

ولا تـق لم Both of you did not say

لم تـقل You did not say


لم يـقلن All of you did not say

ولا تـق لم Both of you did not say

لم تـقولى You did not say


170

نـقل لم All of us did not say

ولا لم نـق Both of us did not say

لم اقل I did not say


5.2. When “ما” prefixed to any of the past tense, it will give the meaning of the negative past

tense ( الماضى المنفى الفعل ), e.g., ما قال (He did not say), ,(He did not go) ما ذهب ما كتب

(He did not write).

Conjugation of فـعل with ماع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

فـعلواما They did not do

فـعلا ما Both of them did not do

فـعل ما He did not do


فـعلن ما They did not do

فـعلتاما Both of them did not do

فـعلت ما She did not do


فـعلتم ما All of you did not do

فـعلتماما Both of you did not do

فـعلت ما You did not do


فـعلتن ما All of you did not do

فـعلتماما Both of you did not do

فـعلت ما You did not do


فـعلناما We did not do

فـعلناما We did not do

فـعلت ما I did not do


الجارى / ر ستم الفعل الماضى الم .6 (The Past Continuous Tense)

When the word “ كان” and its derivatives (forms) are prefixed to the appropriate Present

Tense ( فعل مضارع), it ( ان ك ) changes its (Present Tense) meaning to the Past Continuous

Tense (or it gives the sense of having used to do something), for example:

i. كان يـعبد (He was worshipping or he used to worship).

ii. كنت اكتب (I was writing or I used to write).

iii. .(The (all m.) were eating or they used to eat) كانـوا Ùكلون

iv. كنت تـفعلين (You (f.) were doing or you used to do).

Conjugation (Infection) of Present Tense يـفعل with Incomplete Verb “ كان”

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ن علو ف ي ـ نـواكا They used to do

Vنعلا ف ي ـ كا Both of them used to do

عل ف ي ـ كان He was doing/ He used to do


171

يـفعلن كن They used to do

تـفعلان كانـتا Both of them used to do

تـفعل كانت She used to do


تم تـفعلون كنـAll of you used to

do

تماك تـفعلان نـ Both of you used to do

تـفعل نت ك You used to do


كنتن تـفعلن All of you used to

do

تما تـفعلان كنـBoth of you used to do

كنت تـفعلين You used to do


كنا نـفعل We used to do or we

were doing

كنا نـفعل We used to do or we

were doing

كنت افـعل I used to do or I

was doing


172

QUESTIONS

ةسئل

الاAnswer the following Questions: جب

تية ا ة الاسئل

:e الا

ثم الماضي الفعل عرف ـ 1 أقسامه بين ؟ المعلوم الماضى الفعل هو ما ـ 2 ـ 3 ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم والقتل " " "الفعل مصدر من المعروف ضي الما الفعل صيغ بين ؟ المجهول الماضي الفعل هى ما ـ 4ـ ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم النصر " و " القتل " و "الفعل " مصدر من المجهول صيغ الماضي اكتب ـ 5 ؟ القريب [لفعل الماضي المراد ما ـ 6ـ ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم النصر "و " الجلوس " و " القتل " مصدر من القريب الماضي صيغ اكتب ـ 7 ؟ الماضي البعيد الفعل ما هو ـ 8 ـ نجليزية الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم " ر"النص و " القتل "و " الفعل " مصدر من البعيد الماضى الفعل صيغ اكتب ـ 9

؟ الفعل الماضى المنفى ماهو ـ 10 ـ نجليزية الإ تـرجمهاإلى اللغة " ثم "النصر و " القتل "و " الفعل " مصدر من الفعل الماضى المنفى صيغ اكتب ـ 11 ـ ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم " ن و ك ي " ص اق الن الفعل استخدم "لم" مع صيغ ـ 12 ـ ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم الفعل المضارع "يـقول" استخدم "لم" مع صيغ ـ13 ـ ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم " ل ع "ف ـ الماضى ل ع ف صيغ ال ع م فية النا ل مام ع ت ـس ا ۔14 ؟ي ار الج /مستمر ال الفعل الماضى و ما ه ۔15 ـ ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم " ل ع ف "ي ـ الفعل المضارع مع صيغ " ان "ك ص اق الن استخدم الفعل ـ 16 ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم "يكون" ص اق الن الفعل استخدم "لم" مع صيغ ـ 17 ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم الفعل المضارع "يـقول" استخدم "لم" مع صيغ ـ 18 ـ ليزية نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم فـعل "الماضى الفعل صيغ مع فية النا ما استـعمل ـ 19 ؟ي ار الج /مستمر ال الفعل الماضى ماهو ـ 20 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم يـفعل " المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " كان " ص اق الن استخدم الفعل ـ 21

173

وحدۃ

ال

ابعة س

� � � � �� الأفـعال : ال

Unit No.07:The Tenses (2)

تـعريف الفعل المضارع ۔7.1Definition of the Present Tense

انـواع الفعل المضارع ۔7.2Kinds of the Present Tense

)١(انـواع الفعل المضارع الأخری ۔7.3

Other Kinds of the Present Tense (1)

)٢(انـواع الفعل المضارع الأخری ۔7.4

Other kinds of the Present Tense (2)


�ق الأستاذ الدکتور : مراجع� سمیع ا


174

انـواع الفعل المضارعKinds of the Present Tense

(2) (1)

الفعل المضارع المجهول

(The Present Tense-Passive Voice)

الفعل المضارع المعروف/المعلوم

(The Present Tense -Active Voice)

e.g., الدرس كتب

The lesson is written.

e.g., كتب الطالب الدرس.

The student wrote the lesson.

المعروف و المجهول الفعل المضارع The Present Tense-Active and Passive Form

175

Introduction to 1st part of Unit No.07 The first part of this Unit is about the Present Tense ( الفعل المضارع), and it includes the

following points:

1. Definition of the Present Tense ( تـعريف الفعل المضارع. 2. Kinds of Present Tense ( اقسام الفعل المضارع):

i. The Present Tense, active voice ( الفعل المضارع المعروف). ii. The Present Tense, passive voice ( الفعل المضارع المجهول).

3. Rules for making the Present Tense �� ا �� ( ) active voice.

4. The pattern of dual ( تـثنية) and plural ( جمع).

5. Some other rules of Present Tense.

6. Rules for changing Present Active Voice ( مضارع معروف) to Passive Voice ( مجهول مضارع ).


After studying this 1st part of unit no.07 one will be able to gain the following objectives:

1. to define the Present Tense.

2. to know about the two kinds of Present Tense.

3. to know the rules for making the Present Tense, active voice form ( معروف).

4. to know the pattern of dual ( تـثنية) and plural ( جمع).

5. to know the rules for changing Present Active Voice ( معروف مضارع ) to Passive Voice

( مجهول مضارع ).

176

��

مضارع ال

فعل

ال

The Present Tense In Arabic language, present ( حال) and future ( مستـقبل) are represented by a single tense

known as the “Present Tense”1.

The Present Tense (Mudharig) is also known as the “Imperfect Tense”, because it denotes

an incomplete action. It includes both the Present and the Future Tense, e.g.

i. .means: he goes, he is going or he will go يذهب

ii. .means: he writes, he is writing or he will write يكتب

iii. .means: I do, I am doing or I will do افـعل

مضارع ۔ 7.2فعل ال

اقسام ال

(Kinds of the Present Tense) There are two kinds of the Present ( ع ار ض م ) tense:

(i) معروف (Active) (ii) مجهول (Passive)

:(The Present Tense, Active Voice) الفعل المضارع المعروف .1

Conjugation of مضارع معروف (Present Active Voice)

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ن علو ف ي ـ They (all) do

نعلا ف ي ـ They (both) do

عل ف ي ـ He does


يـفعلن They (all) do

تـفعلان They (both) do

تـفعل She does


تـفعلون You (all) do

تـفعلان You (both) do

تـفعل You do


تـفعلن You (all) do

تـفعلان You (both) do

تـفعلين You do


نـفعل We (all) do

نـفعل We (both) do

افـعل I do


1 There are some prefixes which sometimes help in distinguishing the Present Tense from the Future Tense (like

.but mostly this verb represents both the tense (سوف and س

177

Rules/Methods of Making the Present ( ع ار ض م ) Tense Active Voice

This kind of Present Tense is derived from the trilateral verb ( د فعل الثلاثى المجر ال ) by the

following rules and methods:

1. For the Present Tense ( ع ار ض م ) one of the four indicative letters which are called ( علامات

ارع ة فـتح is prefixed with ,(المضـ (fathah) to the simple past verb ( ى يط الفعل الماضـ البسـ ). These

signs/ indicators ( ــ م ات مـــــــــــــــ لا عـــــــــــــــ ع ار ضــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ) are " اتـــــــــــــــين = ا، ت، ى، ن, or

:They are prefixed as follows .”يـتان = ى، ت، ا، ن

ا .1.1 – This letter is prefixed to only to the form ( يـغة ,.of first person singular, e.g (صــ

افـعل – ت .1.2 This alphabet is attached to only eight forms:

2 Forms ( صي غ) of 3rd person singular and dual

6 Forms ( صي غ) of 2nd person singular, dual and plural: 3 masculine and 3 feminine

= 06

ى .1.3 – is attached to only 4 forms ( صيغ):

3 forms of 3rd person: singular and plural.

1 form ( ص يغة) of 3rd person plural.

ن .1.4 – This letter is prefixed to only the form (يـغه نـفعل ,.of first person plural, e.g (صـ

[we (both or all, m. and f.) do/ shall do or we are doing].

The pattern of Dual ( تـثنية) and Plural ( جمع)

The pattern of dual and plural forms ( يغ or for Present Tense (Imperfect Tense) is as (صـــ

follows:

i. For making تـثنية (dual) "ان" is added to the four forms ( ي غ صـــــ ) of Present Tense singular

( د اح و ع ار ض م ):

Two 3rd person + 2nd person: 04 forms ( صيغ), e.g., the dual ( ت ـث ن ي ة) of يـفعل are يـفعلان(They (two m.) do/ will do/ are doing. The " ن" at the end is called

" اعرابى ن نـو ", and the sign ( ة م لا ع ) of dual is " نون الف ".

Note: please, study the rules and the methods after memorizing the conjugation of the Present Tense.

178

ii. For making the plural form ( يغة الجمع يغ ) is added to the two forms "ون " ,(صـــــــــــــ ــ of (صـــــــــــ

Present Tense plural ( م ض ار ع جم ع): one 3rd person + one 2nd person plural = 02 forms, e.g.,

تـفعلون and يـفعلون .

The “ ن” at the end is called رابى ون الاعــــــــ is the sign of plural ”ن “ before ”و“ and ,نـــــــــ

( الجمع علامة ).

iii. For making the 3rd person feminine plural form ( غة الجمع يـ is added at the end for ”ن “ (صــــ

instance: يـفعلن. The نـون مفتـوحة here is called وة or (feminine nun) نـون نســــــــــــ مير نـون ضــــــــــــ

(pronoun nun).

iv. For making the 2nd person feminine plural form ( ــ ر يـغة جمع م ؤ ن ث ح اضـ ــ is added at ”ن“ ,(صـ

the end, e.g., تـفعلن (You (all f.) do/will do/are doing).

The “ نـون مفتـوحة” here is called وة ــ or (the feminine nun) نـون النســ مير ــ the pronoun) نـون الضــ

nun).

v. For making 2nd person feminine singular form ( يـغة واحد م ؤ ن ث ح اضــــ ر is added to ”ين “ (صــــ

the end of تـفعلين (you (one f.) do/will do/ are doing). The نـون (nun) at the end is called

.نـون اعرابى Other Rules of Present Tense

1. For Present ( ارع ــ ) Tense, the first letter (مضـــــ ة م ل فاء ك ) of all the 14 forms ( يغ ــ is made (صـــــ

اكن ــ In this Present Tense, the first .(he does/will do/ is doing) يـفعل ,.e.g ,(sakin) ســــــــــــ

alphabet of the root word ( لى اكن which is ”ف“ is (حرف اصـــ ــ ســـكون because of ,مجزوم or سـor جزم on it.

2. For Present Tense, the middle letter ( عين الكلمة) of the root word ( لى ــ may have (حرف اصـ

one of the three signs: .(ـ) ضمة or (ـ) كسرة ,(ـ) فـتحة

These three ات ركـــــــ can be known through the following six groups of the (vowels) حـــــ

trilateral verbs:

الحركة على الحرف الثانى الأصلى فى المضارع المضارع الماضى ى ارع مفتوح و هو "ت" فى الماضــــــــ لى هنا فى المضــــــــ الحرف الأصــــــــ

مفتـوح، أيضا.يـفتح فـتح .1

179

ى ــ ور وهو: "ر" فى الماضــــ ــ ارع مكســــ ــ لى هنا فى المضــــ ــ الحرف الأصــــ مفتـوح.

يضرب ضرب .2

الحرف الأصلى هنا مفتـوح وهو: "م" فى الماضى مكسور. يسمع سمع .3الحرف الأصلى "ص" هنا مضموم بينما هو فى الماضى مفتـوح. يـنصر نصر .4

ضموم وفى الماضى مضموم ايضا.الحرف الأصلى "ر" هنا م يكرم كرم .5 حسب .6 يحسب الحرف الأصلى فى المضارع وكذلك فى الماضى مكسور.

Exercise: Conjugate all the above mentioned verbs: both Past and Present Tense

( ع ار ض م و ى اض م ).

3. The last letter (لام الكلمة) of the root word in Simple Present Tense ( ــ ب ال ارع ض ـــالفعل الم ط ي سـ )

is marked with the following three signs:

3.1. 7 forms are marked with مة ,.forms of 3rd person, i.e 3 :ضــــ 2 + تـفعل، يـفعلون، يـفعل

forms of 2nd person, i.e., ــ ل عــــــ ــ فــــــ ــ ون، تـــــــ ــ لــــــ ــ عــــــ ــ فــــــ ــ 2 + تـــــــ forms of 1st person, i.e.,

.forms 7 = نـفعل، افـعل

3.2 4 forms ( غ يـــــــ ــ ة are marked with (صـــــــــــــــــــ حـــــــ تـــــــ ,.dual forms of 3rd person, i.e 2 :فــــــــ

.(صيغ ) forms 4 =تـفعلان ، يـفعلان .dual forms of 2nd person, i.e 2 + تـفعلان ، يـفعلان

3.3. 2 plural forms ( يغ ــ are marked with (صــ كون ,.plural f. form of 3rd person, i.e 1 :ســــ

,.plural f. form of 2nd person i.e 1 + يـفعلن .(صيغ ) form 2 = تـفعلن

3.4. 1 form ( غة ,.i.e ,كسرة is marked with the sign (صيـ .(2nd person feminine) تـفعلين

ع ار ض م - The Present Tense (Imperfect] الفعل المضارع المجهول .2 ) Tense- Passive Voice]

To change Present Active Voice ( ارع معروف ارع مجهول ) to Passive Voice (مضــ the sign ,(مضــ

on the prefixed letters (alphabets) (فـتحة ) ) الف + ت + ى + ن ين ت ا ) is changed مة and ضــــــــ

the 3rd letter (حرف) is marked with the sign فـتحة, e.g.

Active Verb Passive verb (It is opened or it will be opened) يـفتح .1 (He opens or He will open) يـفتح .1

(He is beaten or he will be beaten) يضرب .2 .(He beats or he will beat) يضرب .2

(He is heard or he will be heard) يسمع .3 (He hears or he will hear) يسمع .3

(He is helped or he will be helped) يـنصر .4 (He helps or he will help) يـنصر .4

(He is counted or he will be counted) يحسب .5 (He counts or he will count) يحسب .5

(He is respected or he will be respected) يكرم .6 (He respects or he will respect) يكرم .6

180

Exercise: Conjugate the above mentioned passive voice forms of the Present Tense

( ع ار ض الم للفعل المجهولة الصيغ ) with the pattern of the following inflection:

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

يـنصرون All of them are

helped/ All of them will be helped

يـنصران Both of them are

helped / Both of them will be helped

يـنصر He is helped/ He will

be helped


يـنصرن All of them are

helped/ All of them will be helped

تـنصران Both of them are

helped/ Both of them will be helped

نصر ت ـ She is helped/ She will

be helped


تـنصرون All of you are

helped / All of you will be helped

تـنصران Both of you are

helped/ Both of you will be helped

تـنصر You are helped/ You

will be helped


تـنصرن All of you are

helped/ All of you will be helped

تـنصران Both of you are

helped/ Both of you will be helped

تـنصرين You are helped/ You

will be helped


نـنصر We are helped/ We

shall be helped

نـنصر We are helped/ We

shall be helped

انصر I am helped/ I shall be

helped


181

��

اع فعل ا)خرى ال

مضارع الا

)1(ال

The Other Kinds (Forms) of Present Tense (1)

(9) (8) (7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)

الفعل المضارع ب كى

(The Present Tense with

(كى

ضارع الفعل الم [ذا


(اذا

الفعل المضارع ب إذا


(اذا

الفعل المضارع ïلا


(أن+لا=ألا

الفعل المضارع بلام التـعليل


(لام التـعليل

الفعل المضارع بـلن


(لن

الفعل المستـقبل

البعيد (The Distant

Future Verb)

الفعل بل ق المست ـ

القريب The Near

Future Tense)

الفعل الزمن الحال

(The Present Tense)

182

Introduction to 2nd part of Unit No.07

The 2nd part of this unit is about the following kinds of Present Tense:

1. The Present Tense ( الحال الزمن /الفعل ):

i. Its examples from sentences of daily usage.

ii. Its conjugation.

2. The Near Future Tense ( القريب الفعل المستـقبل ):

i. Its examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakim.

ii. Its examples from sentences of daily usage.

iii. Its conjugation.

3. The Distant Future Tense ( عل المستـقبل البعيد الف ):

i. Its examples from sentences of daily usage.

ii. Its examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakim.

iii. Its conjugation.

4. The Present Tense verb with Lan ( الفعل المضارع بلن): i. Its examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakim.


iii. Changes in the Present Tense after using of Lan “ لن”.

5. The Present Tense with Lam-e-Taleel ( الفعل المضارع بلام التـعليل): i. Its examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakim.


iii. Its examples from sentences of daily usage.

6. The Present Tense with Alla ( أن+ لا= ألا -الفعل المضارع ïلا ):




7. The Present Tense with ) اذا ل المضارع ب إذاالفع ) and its examples.

8. The Past Tense with (الفعل الماضى ب إذا) 39 إذا:

39 When اذا is prefixed to the past tense, then it conveys the sense that it will be done in future.

183


ii. Its examples from sentences of daily usage.

9. The Present Tense with :(الفعل المضارع ب كى ) كى i. Its examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.




With the help of Allah Almighty, after reading this 2nd part of Unit No.07, one will be

able to know about the following kinds of Present Tense ( المضارع الفعل ):

1. The present tense in Arabic language ( ة ة العربيـــــــ ال فى اللغـــــــ ــ ل الحـــــ its examples and (الفعـــــــ

conjugation.

2. The Near Future Tense in the Arabic language ( الفعل المستـقبل القريب فى اللغة العربية), its

examples and conjugation.

3. The Distant Future Tense ( الفعل المستـقبل البعيد) and its examples and conjugation.

4. The Present Tense with Lan .and its examples and conjugation (الفعل المضارع ب لن ) لن

5. The Present Tense with Lam-e-Taleel ( الفعل المضارع ب لام التـعليل), its examples and

conjugation.

6. The Present Tense with Alla .its examples and conjugation ,(الفعل المضارع ب أن+لا=ألا ) ألا

7. The Present Tense with Iza (ذاÚ الفعل المضارع), its examples and conjugation.

8. The verb with Iza (ذاÚ الفعل الماضى), its examples from the Quran and sentences of daily

usage.

9. The Present Tense with .its examples and conjugation ,(الفعل المضارع بكى ) كى

184

)1( المضارع الأخرى الفعل نـواع ا ۔7.3

The Other Kinds (Forms) of the Present Tense (1)

الحال الفعل (الزمن) .1 (The Present Tense)

When ل ( ة ح و ت ـف م ) is prefixed to the active form of the Present Tense, it will give the sense

of Present Tense or Present Continuous Tense, e.g.

.Indeed he goes/ indeed he is going ليذهب .1

.Indeed he drinks/ indeed he is drinking ليشرب .2

.Indeed he eats/ indeed he is eating ليأكل .3

.Indeed we write / indeed we are writing لنكتب .4

Conjugation of Present Tense ( ال ح ل ع ف )

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ن علو ف لي ـ They do/ They are

doing

ن علا ف لي ـ Both of them do/ Both

of them are doing

عل ف لي ـ He does/ He is

doing


ليـفعلن They do/ They are

doing

لتـفعلان Both of them do/ Both

of them are doing

لتـفعل She does/ She is

doing


لتـفعلون (All of) you do/ (All

of) you are doing

لتـفعلان Both of you do/ Both of

you are doing

لتـفعل You do/ You are

doing


لتـفعلن (All of) you do/ (All

of) you are doing

لتـفعلان Both of you do/ Both of

you are doing

لتـفعلين You do/ You are

doing


لنـفعل We do/ We are doing

لنـفعل We do/ We are doing

لافـعل I do/ I am doing


Exercise: Conjugate the verbs of present tense before the above verbs are conjugated.

In order to confine the meaning of Present Tense ( ــ م ع ار ضـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ )

مفتوحة لام ) is prefixed to it ”ل “ ع ار ض م ).

185

(The Near Future) الفعل المستـقبل القريب .2

When the letter س is prefixed to a Present Tense, it gives the meaning of near future, e.g.


Quranic Verses Translation 1 /ä3‹ Ï?$ t↔y™ $pκ ÷]ÏiΒ A�y9sƒ¿2 Soon I am going to bring you from there some information. (27:7)

2 tΑ$s% ü“Íρ$ t↔ y™ 4’ n<Î) 9≅t6y_ He said: I am going to take myself to a mountain. (11:43)

3 (#θ è=ø? r'y™ Νä3 øŠ n= tæ çµ÷ΖÏiΒ # �� ò2ÏŒ I am going to convey you a part of his story. (18:83)

4 … çµà) Ïδ ö‘é'y™ #�Šθãè|¹ I am going to oblige him to face a severe treatment. (74:17)

5 ö/ä3ƒ Í‘'ρ é'y™ u‘#yŠ t É)Å¡≈x�ø9$# Soon I am going to show you the homes of the wicked. (7:145)

6 Ïµ‹Î= ô¹ é'y™ t� s) y™ Soon I am going to cast him into hell-fire. (74:26)

Examples from Sentences of Daily Usage

.He is going to go to the university سيذهب إلى الجامعة .1

.I am going to write the letter سأكتب الرسالة .2

.We are going to eat meal سنأكل الطعام .3

.She is going to start the work ستـبدأ العمل .4

.I am going to drink the milk سأشرب اللبن .5

Conjugation of the Near Future مستـقبل قريب

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ن علو ف سي ـ They all are going to do

ن علا ف سي ـ They both are going to do

عل ف سي ـ He is going to do


سيـفعلن They all are going to do

ستـفعلان They both are going do

ستـفعل She is going to do


ستـفعلون You all are going to do

ستـفعلان You both are going to do

ستـفعل You is going to do


ستـفعلن You all are going to do

ستـفعلان You both are going to do

ستـفعلين You both are going to do


سنـفعل We all are going to do

سنـفعل We both are going to do

سافـعل I am going do


186

(The Distant Future) الفعل المستـقبل البعيد .3

When the word وف is prefixed to an Present Tense, it gives the sense of distant future ســ

( د ي ع ب ل ب ق ت ـس م ), e.g.

.He will travel (after some time) سوف يسافر 1

.He will go (after some time) سوف يذهب 2

.I will write a letter (after some time) سوف أكتب رسالة 3

.We will play football (after some time) سوف نـلعب كرة القدم 4

Examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakim:

Quranic Verses Translation 1 t∃ ôθy™ öΝ Íκ�Î= óÁçΡ # Y‘$ tΡ We will cast them into the Fire. (4:56)

2 t∃ ôθ y™ öΝ Îγ‹ Ï?÷σãƒ öΝèδ u‘θã_ é& We will give their (due) reward. (4:152)

3 tΑ$s% š’ôθ y™ ã� Ï�øó tG ó™r& Ν ä3 s9 He said: “I will ask my Lord for forgiveness for you”. (12:98)

4 ¨β r& uρ … çµ uŠ÷è y™ t∃ ôθy™ 3“ t� ãƒ That (the fruit of) his striving will soon come in sight. (53:40)

5 āξx. š’ôθ y™ tβθ ßϑn= ÷ès? But nay, you will know (the reality). (102:3)

6 §Ν èO āξ x. t∃ ôθy™ tβθßϑ n=÷ès? Again, you will know. (102:4)

Conjugation of the Distant Future " سوف يـفعل"

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ن علو ف سوف ي ـ They all will do

ن علا ف سوف ي ـ They both will do

عل ف سوف ي ـ He will do


سوف يـفعلن They all will do

سوف تـفعلان They both will do

سوف تـفعل She will do


سوف تـفعلون You all will do

سوف تـفعلان You both will do

سوف تـفعل You will do


تـفعلن سوف You all will do

تـفعلان سوف You both will do

تـفعلين سوف You will do


سوف نـفعل We all will do

سوف نـفعل You both will do

سوف افـعل I will do


187

بلن المضارع الفعل .4 (The Present Tense (Mudarig) with Lan)

When لن is prefixed to a Present Tense, it conveys the sense of never doing something in

the future. It can be called “Negative Future”, for example:

Quranic Verses Translation 1 øŒ Î)uρ óΟ çF ù=è% 4 y›θßϑ≈ tƒ s9 zÏΒ ÷σœΡ … y7s9 And remember when you said: “O Moses! We will

never believe in you …” (2:55). 2 (#θ ä9$s% uρ s9 Ÿ≅äzô‰ tƒ . . . sπ ¨Ψyf ø9$# And they say: “None will enter Paradise …”. (2:111)

3 ©9 Ÿ≅t6 ø)è? óΟßγçG t/öθ s? Their repentance will never be accepted. (3:90)

4 s9 (#θä9$ oΨs? §�É9ø9$# You will never attain righteousness. (3:92)

5 s9 yì‹ ÏÜtG ó¡ n@ zÉëtΒ #Z� ö9|¹ You will not be able to have patience with me. (18:67)

6 ©9 u‘Ï‰ ø) tƒ Ïµø‹ n=tã Ó‰ tnr& He thinks that none has power over him. (90:5)

Conjugation of the Aorist ( المضارع) with لن ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

علواف ي ـ لن They will never do

علا ف ي ـ لن Both of them will never do

عل ف ي ـ لن He will never do


يـفعلن لن They will never do

تـفعلا لن Both of them will never do

تـفعل لن She will never do


لن تـفعلوا(All of) you will never do

تـفعلا لن Both of you will never do

لن تـفعل You will never do


لن تـفعلن (All of) you will never do

لن تـفعلا Both of you will never do

لن تـفعلىYou will never do


لن نـفعل We shall never do

لن نـفعل We shall never do

لن افـعل I will never do


From this conjugation, it seems that when لن (Lan) is prefixed to the Present ( ــ م ع ار ضــــــ )

Tense, the following changes occur:

1. It changes its meaning into negative form and becomes “never” instead of no/not.

2. It brings فـتحة (Fathah) on the last letter of مضارع which makes it منصوب from مرفـوع, e.g.

With “ لن” Without “ غ صي ”لن يـفعل لن يـفعل ب ائ غ ر ك ذ م د اح و

لن تـفعل تـفعل ب ائ غ ث ن ؤ م د اح و

188

لن افـعل افـعل ث ن ؤ م و ر ك ذ م م ل ك ت م د اح و لن نـفعل نـفعل ث ن ؤ م و ر ك ذ م م ل ك ت م ع جم و ة ي ن ث ت ـ

3. The اعرابى نـون (nun I’rabi) is removed/dropped in all of the following seven cases:

3.1. Three 3rd person: 2 dual (m. & f.) + 1 plural (m.) = 3.

3.2. Four 2nd person: 2 dual (m. & f.) + 1 plural (m.) + 1 singular (f.) = 4.

The details are as follows:

With lan “ بلن” Without lan “ غ صي ”بدون لن (.m) يـفعلون لن يـفعلا ب ائ غ ر ك ذ م ة ي ن ث ت ـ ب ائ غ ر ك ذ م ع جم (.m) يـفعلون لن يـفعلوا ب ائ غ ر ك ذ م ة ي ن ث ت ـ (.f) تـفعلان لن تـفعلا

تـفعلا لن ر اض ح ر ك ذ م ة ي ن ث ت ـ (.m) تـفعلان ر اض ح ث ن ؤ م ة ي ن ث ت ـ (.f) تـفعلان لن تـفعلا ر اض ح ر ك ذ م ع جم (.m) تـفعلون لن تـفعلوا ر اض ح ث ن ؤ م د اح و (.f) تـفعلين لن تـفعلى

4. The meaning of the Simple ــ م ع ار ضـــــ (Present Tense) changes Negative Future ( تـقبل ــ مســـــ:for example ,(منفى

.He will never write لن يكتب 1

لن تذهب 2 She will never go.

لن تـنصروا 3 You will never help.

تكتبى لن 4 You (female) will never write.

لن اسمع 5 I will never listen to your talk.

على طعام واحد لن نصبر 6 We shall never endure one kind of food (2:61).

Note: The نـون نسوة or :always stays in these two cases نـون ضمير

With “ لن ب ” Without “ غ صي ”بدون لن لن يـفع لن ب ائ غ ث ن ؤ م ع جم لن يـفع

ن لن تـفعل ن تـفعل ر اض ح ث ن ؤ م ع جم

189

(The Present Tense with Lam-e-Taleel) الفعل المضارع بلام التـعليل .5

When ل “ لام التـعليل” is prefixed to a Present Tense, it conveys the meaning of that, so that,

in order to, should do, for example:

1 (#θ è= Ïϑò6çG Ï9 uρ nο£‰ Ïèø9 $# (#ρ ç� Éi9x6 çG Ï9uρ ©! $# (He wants you) to complete the prescribed period and to glorify Him. (2:185)

2 yìsÜø) u‹ Ï9 $]ùt� sÛ z ÏiΒ tÏ% ©!$# . . . (# ÿρ ã� x� x. That He might cut off a fringe of the disbelievers . . .. (3:127)

3 zΝ n= ÷èu‹ Ï9 uρ t Ï%©!$# (#θ à) sù$tΡ And that He might determine the hypocrites.(3:167)

4 Ÿωuρ £èδθè= àÒ÷è s? (#θ ç7 yδõ‹ tG Ï9 ÇÙ÷è t7Î/ !$ tΒ£èδθßϑ çF ÷� s?#u

Nor should you treat them with harshness, that

you may take away part of the dowry you have

given them. (4:19)

5 (# þθä9θ à)u‹ Ïj9 Ï Iωàσ‾≈ yδ r& �∅ tΒ ª!$# Ο ÎγøŠn= tæ .ÏiΒ !$uΖ ÏΨ÷� t/ That they (i.e. disbelievers) might say, are these they

whom Allah has favored among us? (6:53) 6 } uθó™ uθ sù $yϑçλ m; ß≈ sÜø‹ ¤±9$# y“ Ï‰ö7 ãŠ Ï9 $yϑ çλm; Then began Satan to whisper suggestions to

them, in order to reveal to them…. (7:20) 7 $tΒ uρ šχ% x. tβθãΖ ÏΒ÷σßϑø9 $# (#ρ ã� Ï�Ψ uŠ Ï9 Zπ©ù!$Ÿ2 Nor should the believers all go forth together.

(9:122)

Conjugation of Present Tense with ل “ لام تـعليل”

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

علواف لي ـ They should do

علا ف لي ـ Both of them should do

عل ف لي ـ He should do


ليـفعلن They should do

لتـفعلا Both of them should do

لتـفعل She should do


لتـفعلواYou (all) should do

لتـفعلا Both of you should do

لتـفعل You should do


لتـفعلن You (all) should do


لتـفعلىYou should do


لنـفعل We should do


لافـعل I should do


190

Use of “ ل” in Sentences of Daily Usage

I study the Arabic language in order to الحكيم أدرس اللغة العربية لأفـهم القرآن 1

understand Al-Quran Al-Hakim.

نذهب إلى المسجد لنؤدى الصلاة 2 We go/ are going to the mosque so that we can

offer the prayer.

ألتحق [لجامعة لأحصل على شهادة 3ير س ف التـ فى الماجستير

I register at the university so that I can gain the

Master Degree in Tafseer.

أستحم لأكون نشيطا 4 I take a bath so that I can became active.

تحصل على الأدوية ل ذهب إلى الصيدلية ا 5 Go to the pharmacy so that you can take

medicine.

) The Aorist Tense with Alla) الفعل المضارع �لا .6 الا –أن + لا )

When ألا (which is لا+أن ) is prefixed to a Present Tense (Mudare), it conveys the sense/

meaning of “may not”, “shall not”, “last” etc. It is used in Al-Quran Al-Hakim 45 times, for example:

1 ÷β Î) uρ ÷Λäø� Åz āω r& (#θäÜ Å¡ø)è? ’Îû 4‘uΚ≈tG u‹ ø9 $# (#θ ßsÅ3Ρ$$sù $tΒz>$sÛ Ν ä3 s9 z ÏiΒ Ï!$|¡ ÏiΨ9$# 4 o_÷WtΒ y]≈ n= èO uρ yì≈ t/â‘uρ ( ÷β Î* sù

óΟ çF ø�Åz āωr& (#θä9Ï‰ ÷ès? ¸οy‰ Ïn≡ uθ sù ÷ρr& $tΒ ôMs3 n=tΒ öΝ ä3 ãΨ≈ yϑ÷ƒ r& 4y7Ï9≡ sŒ #’ oΤ ÷Šr& āωr& (#θ ä9θ ãès?

And if you fear that you shall not be able to deal justly with the orphan girls then marry (other) women of your choice, two or three or four; but if you fear that you shall not be able to deal justly (with them), only one or (slaves) that your right hands possess. That will be more suitable to prevent you from doing injustice. (4:3)

2 āωr& (#ÿρ ß‰ ç7 ÷ès? āωÎ) ©! $# Worship none other than Allah (46:21)

3 āωr& â‘ Ì“s? ×οu‘ Î—# uρ u‘ø—Íρ 3“ t� ÷zé& That no person burdened (with sin) shall bear the burden (sins) of another. (53:38)

4 āωr& (# öθtó ôÜs? ’Îû Èβ# u”� Ïϑø9$# In order that you may not transgress (due) the balance. (55:8)

5 $tΒ uρ ö/ä3s9 āωr& (#θà) Ï�Ζè? ’Îû È≅‹ Î6y™ «!$# And what is the matter with you that you do not spend in the cause of Allah. (57:10)

6 āωr& $yϑŠÉ) ãƒ yŠρß‰ ãm «!$# That they (both parties) would be unable to keep the limits ordained by Allah. (2:229)

Conjugation of the Aorist Tense with ألا

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

علواف ي ـ ألا علا ف ي ـ ألا عل ف ي ـ ألا ب ائ غ ر ك ذ م 3rd person m.

191

That they do not do/should not do

That both of them do not do/should not do

That he does not do/should not do

يـفعلن ألا That they do not do/should not do

تـفعلا ألا That both of them do not do/should not do

تـفعل ألا That she does not do/should not do


ألا تـفعلواThat all of you do

not do/should not do

ألا تـفعلا That both of you do not do/should not do

ألا تـفعل That you do not do/should not do


ألا تـفعلن That all of you do

not do/should not do

ألا تـفعلا That both of you do not do/should not do

ألا تـفعلىThat you do not do/should not do


ألا نـفعل That we do not

do/should not do

ألا نـفعل That we do not

do/should not do

ألا افـعل That I do not

do/should not do


Use of ألا in Sentences Daily Usage

إن تخاف ألا تحصل على 1 الشهادة فـتـعود إلى بـيتك

If you fear that you would not get/gain the degree

return to your home.

إن تريد ألا تشرب اللبن 2 فـتشرب الماء فـقط

If you would not drink the milk drink the water only.

نا ألا تذهب إلى دار الخيالة 3 .It is our duty that we should not go to the cinema عليـ

عليك ألا 6كلى هذا 4 It is your duty not to eat it/ that you should not eat it.

اتـرك العمل الصالح على ألا 5 It is my duty that I should not leave the good deeds/ that I do not leave the good deeds.

(إذا The Present Tense with) الفعل المضارع ب إذا .7When إذا is prefixed to Present Tense, it gives the sense of “then”. e.g.

.Work hard then you will succeed ز إذا تـفو د جته ا 1

وا صلاة را إذا تصل ك ب ا م و استـيقظ 2الجماعة ع الفجر م

Wake up early in the morning then you can offer the

Fajar prayer congregationally.

را اذا تختمه و ف ـ ك ل م إبدأ ع 4 Start your work immediately then you will finish it.

اذ إ الفعل الماضى ب .8 (The Past Tense with ااذ )

When اذا is prefixed to the past tense, it conveys the sense of “will be done in the future”. :is used in Al-Quran 221 times, for example اذا

192

1 #sŒ Î) â!$uΚ¡¡9 $# ôM¤) t±Σ$# When the sky is rent (split) asunder. (84:1)

2 # sŒÎ) uρ ÞÚö‘ F{ $# ôN£‰ ãΒ And when the earth is flattened (84:3)

3 #sŒ Î) ß§ ÷Κ¤±9$# ôN u‘ Èhθä. When the sun is folded up. (81:1)

4 #sŒ Î)uρ ãΠθ àf–Ψ9 $# ôN u‘y‰ s3Ρ$# And when the stars shall fall. (81:2)

5 # sŒÎ) uρ ãΑ$t7 Åg ø:$# ôNu� Éi� ß™ And when the mountains shall be moved. (81:3)

6 # sŒÎ) uρ â‘$ys Î7 ø9$# ôN t�Édf ß™ A when the seas shall be made to overflow. (81:6)

7 Hξ x. #sŒ Î) ÏM ©. ßŠ Ù⇓ö‘F{ $# %y. yŠ % y. yŠ Nay, when the earth is ground to powder (89:21)

Use of اذا with ىاض م (Past Tense) in sentences daily usage

When the student writes the lesson, I will grant ة ز ئ فأمنحه الجا س ر د ال ب ال الط ب ت ا ك إذ 1him the prize.

.When I return to my home, I will see you ك ع م اء ق لل [ م و ق ـأ بـيتى ف ن اذا رجعت م 2

كى الفعل المضارع ب .9 (The Present Tense with ى ك )

When كى is prefixed to a Present Tense ( ــ م ع ار ضــ ), it conveys the meaning / sense of “so

that”, “in order to” as “ ل ــ يـــــــ ــ لـــــــ ــ عـــــــ ــ ــتــــــــ ى ) It .ل ”لام الـــــــ ــ is used only four times in (كـــــــ

Al-Quran Al-Hakim, e.g.

1 ö’ s1 y7ys Îm7 |¡èΣ # Z�� ÏVx. That we may celebrate your praise without stint. (20:33)

2 ö’ s1 §� s)s? $ yγãΨøŠ tã Ÿωuρ šχ t“ óss? That her eye might be cooled and she should not grieve. (20:40 and 28:13)

3 ö’ s1 Ÿω tβθ ä3tƒP' s!ρßŠ t ÷t/ Ï!$ uŠÏΨøî F{ $# öΝ ä3ΖÏΒ In order that it may not (merely) make a circuit between the wealthy among you. (59:7)

Conjugation of the Aorist Verb with كى

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

علواف ي ـ كى So that they may do

علا ف ي ـ كى So that both of them

may do

عل ف ي ـ كى So that he may do


يـفعلن كى So that they may do

تـفعلا كى So that both of them

may do

تـفعل كى So that she may do


193

كى تـفعلواSo that all of you

may do

كى تـفعلا So that both of you

may do

كى تـفعل So that you may do


كى تـفعلن So that all of you

may do

كى تـفعلا So that both of you

may do

كى تـفعلىSo that you may do


كى نـفعل So that we all may do

كى نـفعل So that we both may do

كى افـعل So that I may do


Use of “ ى ك ” in Sentences of daily usage

اذهب إلى المدرسة كى ادرس 1 I am going to school in order to read.

ذهبت إلى المسجد كى اعبد الله 2 I went to the mosque in order to worship.

هم يـنامون كى يستريحوا 3 They are sleeping in order to take a rest.

متحان هى تجتهد كثيرا كى تـنجح فى 4 الابدرجات عالية

She is working very hard in order to get the highest mark in the examination OR so that she may gain the highest mark in the examination.

كين كى يـقطع الأشياء س هو Ùخذ ال 5 He takes/ is taking a knife so that he may cut the things or in order to cut the things.

194

��

اع فعل ا) ال

مضارع الا )2(ى خرال

The Other Kinds (Forms) of the Present Tense (2)

(19) (18) (17) (16) (15) (14) (13) (12) (11) (10)

الفعل المضارع

المجهول ب "لام الأمر"

الفعل المضارع ب "لام الأمر"

الفعل المضارع ب "أين" أو "أيـنما"

الفعل المضارع ب

الشرطية "ما"


"من"

الفعل المضارع ب "إن" الشرطية


"لما"


"لا"


"أن"


" "حتى

The Present Passive Voice

Tense with “Lam of

command”

The Present

Tense with

“ الأمر لام ”

The Present

Tense with

or ”أين “

”أيـنما“

The Present

Tense with

”ما“Conditional

The Present

Tense with

”من “

The Present

Tense with

”إن “Conditional

The Present

Tense with

”لما“

The Present

Tense with

”لا “

The Present

Tense with

”أن “

The Present

Tense with

”حتى “

195


In this part of Unit No.07 will study about the other ten kinds of the Present Tense with

examples and their conjugations:

10. The Present Tense with ") حتى .(الفعل المضارع ب "حتى11. The Present Tense with .(الفعل المضارع ب "ان") ان 12. The Present Tense with ) لا "الفعل المضارع ب "لا ).

13. The Present Tense with .(الفعل المضارع ب "لما") لما14. The Present Tense with ان conditional ( الفعل المضارع ب "ان" الشرطية). 15. The Present Tense with .(الفعل المضارع ب " من") من 16. The Present Tense with ما conditional ( الفعل المضارع ب " ما " الشرطية). 17. The Present Tense with اين or .(الفعل المضارع ب " اين " أو " أيـنما") أيـنما18. The Present Tense with Lam of command ( ب لام الأمر الفعل المضارع ).

19. The Present Passive Voice Tense with Lam of command ( الأمر لام ب المجهول المضارع الفعل ).

Objectives of 3rd part of Unit No.07 When one studies this part of unit no.07, with the grace and help of Allah ( ◌ سبحانه و تعالى )

then one will be able to know about the ten kinds of Present Tense. Mentioned above,

their examples and their respective conjugations.

196

واع الفعل ال � � � � �� (2)ىمضارع الأخر انـ

The Other Kinds (types) of the Present Tense (2)

تى ح The Present Tense with) الفعل المضارع بحتى .10 )

When حتى is prefixed to a Present Tense ( ع ار ض ـم ), it conveys the meaning of “until”. It is

used in Al-Quran Al-Hakim 142 times, for example:

1 4 ®Lym “t� tΡ ©! $# Zο t�ôγy_ Until we see Allah manifestly (2:55)

2 4 ®Lym yìÎ6®K s? öΝ åκ tJ‾=ÏΒ Until you follow their form of religion (2:120)

3 4 ®Lym ãΝåκu� Ï? ù's? èπuΖ Éi� t7 ø9$# Until there should come to them clear evidence (98:1)

4 4®L ym (#θà)≈n= ãƒ æΛ ãι tΒöθ tƒ “Ï% ©!$# tβρ ß‰ tãθãƒ Until they meet that Day, which they have been promised (43:83)

5 4®L ym t ¨t7 oKtƒ öΝßγs9 Until it becomes manifest to them (41:53

Conjugation of the Aorist Verb with حتى ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

حتى يـنصرواUntil they help

حتى يـنصراUntil both of them help

حتى يـنصر Until he help


حتى يـنصرن Until they help

حتى تـنصراUntil both of them help

حتى تـنصر Until she help


حتى تـنصرواUntil both of you help

حتى تـنصراUntil both of you help

حتى تـنصر Until you help


حتى تـنصرن Until both of you help

حتى تـنصراUntil both of you help

حتى تـنصرىUntil you help


نصر ن ـحتى Until we help

نصر ن ـحتى Until we help

نصر ا حتى Until I help


Use of حتى in daily usage

انـتظر هنا حتى اعود من بـيتى. 1 Wait here until I return from my house.

.Do not buy this thing until you smell it لا تشترى هذا الشىء حتى تشمه. 2

تخرج من الفصل حتى تـفهم الدرس لا 3ïكمله.

Don’t leave the class until you understand the

lesson completely.

197

حتى ات ر ائ الط لن نـعود من محطة 4ة المطلوبة.ر ائ الط تصل

We never return back from the airport until the

aeroplan reached required.

I will never start the lesson until you enter the لن ابدأ الدرس حتى تدخل الفصل. 5classroom.

ن ا – The Present Tense (Mudarig) with an) الفعل المضارع ب أن .11 )

When أن is prefixed to Present Tense ( ــ م ع ار ضـــ ), it conveys the sense of “that”. It is used

637 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, for example:

1 èŒθãã r& «! $$Î/ ÷βr& tβθ ä. r& z ÏΒ šÎ=Îγ≈ pgø:$# Allah saves me from being an ignorant (fool). (2:67)

2 tβθãè yϑôÜ tG sù r& βr& (#θãΖ ÏΒ÷σ ãƒ öΝä3 s9 Can you (O men of faith) entertain the hope that they will believe in you? (2:75)

3 ÷Π r& šχρ ß‰ƒÌ� è? β r& (#θ è=t↔ó¡ n@ öΝä3 s9θß™u‘$yϑx. Ÿ≅ Í×ß™ 4 y›θãΒ ÏΒ ã≅ ö6s%

Would you question your Messenger as Moses was

questioned before that. (2:108)

4 }§øŠ ©9 §�É9ø9 $# βr& (#θ —9 uθè? öΝä3yδθ ã_ ãρ Ÿ≅ t6Ï%É−Î�ô³ yϑø9$# É> Ì�øó yϑø9 $# uρ

It is not righteousness that you turn your face

towards East or West. (2:177)

5 }§øŠs9 öΝà6 ø‹n=tã îy$oΨ ã_ βr& (#θäótG ö;s?WξôÒ sù ÏiΒ öΝ à6În/ §‘

It is not a crime upon you if you seek the bounty of

your Lord (during pilgrimage). (2:198)

6 ÷Πr& óΟ çFö6Å¡ ym βr& (#θè= äzô‰ s? Or do you think that you shall enter the Garden (of Bliss). (2:214)

Conjugation of the Present Tense with أن

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

علواف ي ـ أن That they will do

علا ف ي ـ أن That both of them will do

عل ف ي ـ أن That he will do


يـفعلن أن That they will do

تـفعلا أن That both of them will do

تـفعل أن That she will do


أن تـفعلواThat (all of) you will do

أن تـفعلا That both of you will do

أن تـفعل That you will do


أن تـفعلن That (all of) you will do

أن تـفعلا That both of you will do

أن تـفعلىThat you will do


أن نـفعل أن نـفعل م ل ك ت م أن افـعل

198

That we will do That we will do That I will do 1st person m. & f.

Use of أن in Sentences of Daily Usage

.My teacher ordered me to sit here أمرنى أستاذى أن أجلس هنا. 1

واء 2 نصحنى الطبيب أن أخذ الد. فى الوقت المعين

The Doctor advised me to take medicine in

time.

.We have been ordered to worship Allah امرV أن نـعبد الله . 3

?What do you want to drink ماذا تريد أن تشرب. 4

.We like to stay here نـود ان نقف هنا. 5

.He wants to go to the market هو يريد أن يذهب إلى السوق 6

.I want to go to the university اريد ان اذهب إلى الجامعة 7

(لا The Present Tense with) الفعل المضارع بلا .12

When the “ لا” is prefixed to a Present Tense ( ع ار ض ـــم ), it gives the sense/meaning of will

not + verb, is, are, am not + verb + ing, does not, do not + verb. لا is used 812 times in

Al-Quran Al-Hakim with nouns and verbs, for example:

1 Ÿω tβθãΖÏΒ ÷σãƒ They will not believe (2:6).

2 Ÿω tβθãèÅ_ö� tƒ They will not return (to the straight path) (2:18).

3 (#θ à)?$# uρ $YΒöθ tƒ āω “Ì“ øgrB ë§ ø� tΡ tã <§ ø�‾Ρ $\↔ ø‹ x© Then guard yourselves against a day when one soul shall not avail another (2:48).

4 Ÿω šχθ ßϑÎ= ôà s? Ÿω uρ šχθßϑn= ôàè? Deal not unjustly, and you shall not be dealt with unjustly (2:279).

5 # x‹≈ yδ ãΠöθ tƒ Ÿω tβθ à)ÏÜΖ tƒ That will be a day when they shall not be able to speak (77:35).

Conjugation of the Present Tense with لا

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ن علو ف ي ـ لا They will not do

علان ف ي ـ لا Both of them will not do

عل ف ي ـ لا He will not do


يـفعلن لا They will not do

تـفعلان لا Both of them will not do

تـفعل لا She not will do


199

لا تـفعلون (All of) you will not do

لا تـفعلان Both of you will not do

لا تـفعل You will not do


لا تـفعلن (All of) you will not do

لا تـفعلان Both of you will not do

لا تـفعلين You will not do


لا نـفعل We will not do

لا نـفعل We will not do

لا افـعل I will not do


Use of لا with the Present Tense in Sentences of Daily Usage

لا يـنصرههو 1 He will not help him OR He is not helping him Or He

does not help him.

I am not writing the letter OR I do not write the letter OR أV لا أكتب الرسالة 2

I will not write the letter.

الطعام تطبخ هى لا 3 She does not cook food OR She is not cooking food OR

She will not cook food.

The Muslims will not worship the idols OR The Muslim المسلمون لا يـعبدون الأصنام 4

do not worship the idols OR The Muslim are not

worshiping the idols.

We do not go there OR We shall not go there OR We are لا نذهب إلى هناك نحن 5

not going there.

.They do not drink coffee OR They will not drink coffee هم لا يشربـون القهوة 6

In order to, make negative Present Tense; active voice لا is prefixed, for example:

.(He does not/ will not help) لا يـنصر .1

.(We do not/ will not eat) لا Îكل .2

الفعل المضارع بلما .13 (The Present Tense with لما) When لما is prefixed to a Present Tense ( مضارع), it conveys the sense of “not yet”. لما isused 32 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim and only three times with the meaning of “not yet”.

1 ≅ t/ $£ϑ©9 (#θ è%ρä‹ tƒ É># x‹tã Nay, they have not yet tasted my punishment/ torment (38:8).

2 $£ϑ s9uρ È≅äzô‰tƒ ß≈ yϑƒ M}$# ’ Îû öΝ ä3 Î/θè=è% And faith has not yet entered your hearts (49:14).

3 tÌ�yz# uuρ öΝ åκ ÷]ÏΒ $ £ϑs9 (#θ à)ys ù=tƒ öΝ Íκ Í5 4 uθ èδuρâ“ƒÍ• yèø9$# ãΛÅ3 ptø: $#

And [He has sent him (Prophet Muhammad

S.A.W) also to] others among them (Muslims)

who have not yet joined them (62:3).

200

Conjugation of aorist verb with لما

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

اعلو ف ي ـ لما They have not done

yet

علا ف ي ـ لما Both of them have not

done yet

عل ف ي ـ لما He has not done yet


يـفعلن لما They have not done

yet

تـفعلا لما Both of them have not

done yet

تـفعل لما She has not done

yet


لما تـفعلوا(All of) you have not

done yet

لما تـفعلا Both of you have not

done yet

لما تـفعل You have not done

yet


لما تـفعلن (All of) you have not

done yet

لما تـفعلا Both of you have not

done yet

لما تـفعلي You have not done

yet


لما نـفعل We have not done yet

لما نـفعل We have not done yet

لما افـعل I have not done yet


Use of لما with عار ض م in Sentence of Daily Usage

.He has not gone home yet لما يذهب الى البـيت 1

ز 2 .I have not eaten the bread yet لما أكل الخبـ

.You (f.) have not written the letter to me yet لما تكتبى الرسالة إلى 3

.He has not returned from his work yet لما يـرجع من عمله 4

.The aeroplaen has not yet arrived لما تصل الطايرة 5

رطية الفعل المضارع ب "ان" الش .14 (The Present Tense with ان conditional)

When ان conditional ( شرطية) is prefixed to a Present Tense, it gives the meaning of “if”,

for example:

1 tΑ$s)sù ’ ÎΤθä↔ Î6/Ρr& Ï !$yϑ ó™ r'Î/ Ï Iω àσ‾≈ yδ βÎ) öΝ çFΖä. t Ï% Ï‰≈ |¹ And (He) said: Tell me the names of these if you are right (2:31).

2 !$‾ΡÎ)uρ β Î) u !$x© ª!$# tβρ ß‰tG ôγßϑ s9 We wish indeed for guidance, if Allah wills (2:70).

3 ö(#θ è?$yδ öΝ à6 uΖ≈yδ ö� ç/ βÎ) óΟ çGΖà2 š Ï% Ï‰≈ |¹ Produce your proof if you are truthful (2:111).

201

Note: A last ن اك س (Sakin) letter of some verbs is changed into كسرة (Kasra) when followed

by a definite article " ال" as in لما تصل الطائرة and مË(49:14) لما يدخل الإيمان فى قـلو.

4 ¨βÎ) ’ Îûš�Ï9≡ sŒ Zπtƒ Uψ öΝà6 ©9 βÎ) Ο çFΖä. šÏΖÏΒ ÷σ•Β In this is symbol for you if you, indeed have faith. (2:248)

5 β Î) óΟ çFΖä. tβθ™7 Ås è? ©! $# ‘ÏΡθ ãèÎ7?$$ sù ãΝä3 ö7Î6 ós ãƒ ª!$#ö� Ï�øótƒuρ ö/ ä3 s9 ö/ä3t/θçΡèŒ

Say: If you do love Allah follow me: Allah

will love you and forgive you your sins. (3:31)

6 βÎ) uρ (#ρç�É9óÁ s? (#θà) −Gs? uρ Ÿω öΝ à2•�ÛØ tƒ öΝèδ ß‰ø‹ x. $º↔ø‹ x© But if you are constant and do right, not the least harm will their cunning do to you. (3:120)

Note: Sometimes, for emphasizing “ل” is also prefixed to إن, for example:

7 È⌡s9 óΟ è?ö� x6x© öΝ ä3‾Ρy‰ƒÎ— V{ If you are grateful (by accepting faith and worshipping none but Allah) I will give you more (of my blessing). (14:7)

Conjugation of إن شرطية with the Present Tense ( ع ار ض الم )

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

اعلو ف ي ـ ان If they do

علا ف ي ـ ان If both of them do

عل ف ي ـ ان If he does


يـفعلن ان If both of them do

تـفعلا ان If both of them do

تـفعل ان If she does


ان تـفعلواIf you do

ان تـفعلا If both of you do

ان تـفعل If you do


ان تـفعلن If you do

ان تـفعلا If both of you do

ان تـفعلي If you do


ان نـفعل If we do

ان نـفعل If we do

ان افـعل If I do


Use of ان with the Present Tense in Sentences of Daily Usage

.If you eat, I will eat إن 6كل أكل 1

معه إن يذهب أذهب 2 If he goes, I will go with him.

أنم تـنم إن 3 If you sleep, I will sleep.

تصم أصم إن 4 If you fast, I will fast.

.If you marry, I will marry إن تـتـزوج أتـزوج 5

.If you drink, I will drink إن تشرب أشرب 6

202

ع ار ض م ال ل ع ف ل ا ب ”من “ .15 (The Present Tense with “ ن م ”)

When من (conditional) is prefixed to a Present Tense, it conveys the sense of “who,

whom, whoever”, e.g.

1 tΒ ö≅yϑ÷ètƒ # [þθ ß™ t“ øgä† Ïµ Î/ He, who does evil, shall be recompensed for it. (4:123)

.Whoever works hard/ struggles will succeed من يجتهد يـنجح 2

من يكسل يـندم 3 He, who is lazy will regret.

الشرطية "ما" الفعل المضارع ب .16 (The Present Tense with ما Conditional)

When ما conditional is prefixed to a Present Tense, it conveys the meaning of “whatever”,

e.g.

1 $ tΒuρ (#θ ãΒÏd‰s) è? / ä3Å¡ à�ΡL{ ô ÏiΒ 9�ö� yz çνρß‰ ÅgrB y‰ΨÏã «!$# And whatever good you send forth for your souls before you, you shall find it with Allah. (2:110)

2 $tΒ uρ (#θ è=yèø� s? ôÏΒ 9� ö� yz ¨βÎ* sù ©!$# Ïµ Î/ ÒΟŠÎ= tæ And whatever you do that is good, Allah knows it well. (2:215)

3 $ tΒuρ (#θà) Ï�Ζè? ôÏΒ 9�ö� yz öΝ à6 Å¡à�ΡL| sù Whatever of good you give benefits your own souls. (2:272)

4 $tΒ uρ (#θ à)Ï�Ζè? ô ÏΒ 9�ö� yz ¤∃ uθãƒ öΝà6 ö‹ s9 Î)÷Λ äΡr&uρ Ÿω šχθãΚn= ôà è?

Whatever good you give, shall be rendered

back to you, and you shall not be dealt

unjustly. (2:272)

5 $tΒuρ (#θ à)Ï�Ζè? ÏΒ & óx« ¨βÎ* sù ©! $# ÏµÎ/ ÒΟŠÎ= tæ And whatever you spend Allah knows it well. (3:92)

Use of ما شرطية with the Present Tense ( ع ار ض الم ) in Sentences of Daily Usage

ب ب أشر ما تشر 1 Whatever you drink, I will drink.

.Whatever you buy, I will buy ما تشتر أشتر 2

.Whatever you play, we will play ما تـلعبـوا نـلعب 3

.Whatever you write, they (all f.) will write ما تكتبى يكتبن 4

.Whatever you (both) do, we/I will do ما تـفعلا نـفعل/ افـعل 5

"أين" أو "ايـنما" الفعل المضارع ب .17 (The Present Tense with أين or نما (أيـWhen أين or أيـنما is prefixed to a Present Tense, it gives the sense/meaning of “where,

wherever”, e.g.

203

1 $yϑ oΨ÷ƒr& (#θ çΡθä3 s? ãΝ œ3. Í‘ô‰ ãƒÝVöθyϑø9$# Wherever you are, death will find you. (4:78)

2 $yϑ uΖ÷ƒr& –µγÅh_ uθãƒ Ÿω ÏN ù' tƒ A�ö� sƒ¿2 Whichever way he directs him, he brings no good. (16:76)

Use of أين and نما ) with the aorist verb أيـ ع ار ض الم الفعل ) in Sentences of Daily Usage

عش أ تعش أين 1 Where you live I live.

.Where you go, I go أين تذهب أذهب 2

.Where he prays I pray أين يصلى أصلى 3

.Where you play, we play أين تلعبـوا نـلعب 4

.Where you register, I register أين تـلتحق التحق 5

ذهب معكم تذهبـوا ن أيـنما 6 Wherever you go, we go (with you).

دكم 7 .Wherever you may be we find you أيـنما تكونوا نج

.Wherever you swim in the sea, we swim أيـنما تسبحوا فى البحر نسبح 8

معكم تعش أيـنما تـتـعشوا أ 9 Wherever you take dinner, I will take with you.

أمسکنأيـنما تسكن 10 Wherever you live, I will search you.

Note: إن (if), من (who, whom, whoever), ما (whatever), and أين or أينما (where, wherever) are

some conditional particles ( حروف شرط) which make the Present Tense ( ع ار ض م ال ”مجزوم “ (

majzum. In a conditional sentence, both the شرط (condition) and الشرط جواب (answer of

the condition) are مجزوم (majzum). Some of the words conveying condition (other than the

above mentioned four particles) are: لو (if), إذا (when), لما (not yet), كى (so that).

Question: Use these words in complete sentences Make three sentences from each word.

الأمر لام Active Voice will (The Present Tense) الفعل المضارع المعلوم ب "لام الأمر .18 (Lam of Command)

When لام الأمر is prefixed to a Present Tense active voice, it gives the meaning of

“should”, for example:

1 yϑ sù y‰Íκ y− ãΝ ä3ΨÏΒ t� öκ ¤¶9$# çµ ôϑ ÝÁ uŠ ù=sù So whoever is present (at his home) during that month should. (2:118)

2 ’ n?tã uρ «!$# È≅©. uθtG uŠ ù=sù tβθ ãΨÏΒ ÷σßϑ ø9$# And in Allah should the believers put their trust. (3:122)

3 š�Ï9≡ x‹ Ÿ2uρ $Ψ tG sù Ν åκ |Õ ÷èt/ <Ù ÷èt7 Î/ (# þθä9θà)u‹ Ïj9 Thus did we try some of them by comparison with others, that they should say. (6:53)

204

4 t ø⌠Î�ôØ u‹ ø9uρ £ ÏδÌ� ßϑ èƒ¿2 4’ n? tã £ ÍκÍ5θãŠ ã_ That they should draw their veils over their bosoms. (24:31)

5 ö� ÝàΖ tFø9uρ Ó§ ø� tΡ $Β ôM tΒ £‰s% 7‰tóÏ9 And let every person look to what he has sent forth for the morrow. (59:18)

Use of لام الأمر with the Present Tense ( ع ار ض الم الفعل ) in Sentences of Daily Usage

Every sick person should go to the hospital ليذهب كل مريض إلى المستشفى فـورا 1immediately.

فى المسجد ساكتا م ليجلس كل مسل 2 Every Muslim should sit in the mosque quietly.

ولنـقرأ القرأن المجيد كل الصبح 3بـعد صلاة الفجر

And We should recite Al-Quran Al-Hakim

every morning after the Fajar prayer.

And all of you (female) should write the home ولتكتبن عمل البـيت 4work.

بـعد صلاة العشاء ولنـنم 5 And we should sleep after the Isyak prayer.

Conjugation of the ( ع ار ض الم الفعل ) Active Voice of Present Tense with لام الأمر

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

اعلو ف لي ـ They should do

علا ف لي ـ Both of them should do

عل ف لي ـ He should do


ليـفعلن They should do

لتـفعلا Both of them should do

لتـفعل She should do


لتـفعلوا(All of) you should do


لتـفعل You should do


لتـفعلن (All of) you should do


لتـفعلي You should do




لافـعل I should do


Note: لام الأمر (Lam of command) becomes ساكن, when the letter ف or و is attached with it, e.g.,

so he should) فـليكتب ,(he should write) ليكتب ,(and he should do) وليـفعل (It should do) ليـفعل

write).

بلام الأمر المجهول الفعل المضارع .19 (The Passive Voice of Present Tense with لام الأمر)

When الأمر لام is prefixed to a passive voice of Present Tense, it gives the meaning of

“should be”.

.(He should be beaten) ليضرب ,(He is beaten) يضرب .1

205

.(You should be beaten) ليضرب ,(You are beaten) تضرب .2

.(You should be helped) لتـنصروا ,(You are helped) تـنصرون .3

لين تـقت .4 (You are killed), لىلتـقت (you should be killed).

.(And I should be helped in this field) ولانصر فى هذا المجال ,(I am helped) وانصر .5

206

QUESTIONS

ةسئل


سئل

جب e الا :ا

المضارع ـ الفعل عرف ـ 1 ؟ رع المضا الفعل أقسام ما ـ 2ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم الفعل " مصدر من المعروف المضارع الفعل صيغ اكتب ـ 3 ؟ المضارع الفعل قـواعد هي ما ـ 4 ؟ المجهول المضارع الفعل هو ما ـ 5ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم النصر " مصدر من المجهول المضارع الفعل صيغ اكتب ـ 6 الأخرى؟ الفعل المضارع ما هي أنـواع ـ 7 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم "لفعل ا "در مص من الحال الفعل صيغ اكتب ـ 8ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم القريب المضارع الفعل صيغ فيـها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 9

ـ زية لي نج الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها ثم المعروف المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " لن " حرف استخدم ـ 10ها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 11 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم التـعليل بلام المعروف المضارع الفعل صيغ فيــ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم التـعليل بلام المضارع الفعل صيغ اكتب ـ 12 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم "ألا "ب المضارع الفعل صيغ فيها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 13 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم الفعل " مصدر من المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " ألا "استخدم ـ 14 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " ألا " استخدام فيها التي الجمل اكتب ـ 15 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم الماضى الفعل صيغ مع " إذا " استعمال فيها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 16ها التي الجمل اكتب ـ 17 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " كى " استخدام فيـها التي الجمل اكتب ـ 18 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المختلفة المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " كى " استخدام فيـ ؟ الأخرى المضارع الفعل أنـواع هى ما ـ 19 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " حتى " استخدام فيـها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 20 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم النصر " صدر عل المضارع من م الف مع صيغ " أن " استخدم ـ 21

207

ها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 22 إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المختلفة المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " أن " استخدام فيـ ـ زية لي نج الإ

ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم ل ع ف ل "ا صدر الفعل المضارع من م صيغ " مع ن "أ استخدم ـ 23ها التي الجمل اكتب ـ 24 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المختلفة المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " أن " استخدام فيـ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم الفعل المضارع المختلفة صيغ " مع "لا ستخدام ها ا في ـ التي القرآنية \ت الآ اكتب ـ 25

ـ زية نجلي الإ ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم الفعل " مصدر من المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " ی ك " استخدم ـ 26ها التي الجمل اكتب ـ 27 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المختلفة المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " لا " استعمال فيـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " لما" استعمال فيـها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 28 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم الفعل " من مصدر المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " لما"استخدم ـ 29ها التي الجمل اكتب ـ 30 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المختلفة المضارع الفعل صيغ مع "لما" استخدام فيـ ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم شرطية ل ا " إن " استعمال فيـها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 31إلى تـرجمها " ثم القتل "و " النصر "و " الفعل " مصدر من المضارع الفعل صيغ مع شرطية ال " إن "استـعمل ـ 32

ـ زية لي نج الإ اللغة زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المختلفة المضارع الفعل صيغ مع شرطية ال " إن " فيـها التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ـ 33ها التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ـ 34 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها مضارع ثم ال الفعل صيغ مع " من " استعمال فيـها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 35 إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المضارع الفعل صيغ مع الشرطية " ما" استخدام فيـ

ـ زية لي نج الإ ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم رطية ش الا" دأ بـ "م تـب التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ـ 36 ـ زية لي نج الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها " ثم أيـنما" استعمال فيـها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 37 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم أيـنما" و " أين " بـ تـبدأ التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ـ 38ها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ـ 39 تـرجمهاإلى اللغة ثم المعلوم المضارع الفعل صيغ مع " الأمر لام " استعمال فيـ

ـ زية لي نج الإ تـرجمهاإلى اللغة ثم الفعل المضارع المختلفة " لام الأمر" مع صيغ ستخدام ها ا في ـ المفيدة التي الجمل اكتب ـ 40

ـ زية لي نج الإ

208

ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المعروف المضارع الفعل صيغ مع الأمر استخدم لام ـ 41 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم ل مع صيغ الفعل المضارع المجهو الأمر استخدم لام ـ 42

209

وحدۃ

ال

ن ام الث

� � � � �� الأفـعال : ة

Unit No.08:The Tenses (3)

فعل الأمر ۔8.1The Imperative

ى ه فعل النـ ۔8.2The Negative Imperative

اسم الفاعل ۔8.3The Active Participle

اسم المفعول ۔8.4The Passive Participle

الجملة الفعلية ۔8.5The Verbal Sentence

�مید خان عبا�� الأستاذ الدکتور إ عداد:�عبد ا

�ق مراجع: الأستاذ الدکتور � سمیع ا

Written by: Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi

Reviewed b: Prof. Dr. Sami ul Haq

210

مر ۔8.1 الا

فعل

The Imperative

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

افـعلوا All of you do

افـعلا Both of you do

افـعل You Do

حاضر ر ك ذ م m.

افـعلن All of you do

افـعلا Both of you do

افـعلى You Do

حاضر ث ن و م f.

211

Introduction to 1st part of Unit No.08 The 1st part of this unit is about the Imperative ( فعل الأمر), and it consists of the following

points:

1. Definition of the Imperative (فعل الأمر). 2. Examples of فعل الأمر from Al-Quran Al-Hakim.

3. Conjugation of the Imperative according to the six groups of triliteral verbs ( ابـواب الفعلتة .(الثلاثى المجرد الس

4. Some important rules for making فعل الأمر from the Present Tense ( فعل المضارع).

Objectives of 1st part of Unit No.8 With the help of Allah ( �� ), when one finishes studying this part of unit no.08 one

will then be able:

1. to define فعل الأمر (the Imperative).

2. to present the examples of فعل الأمر from Al-Quran Al-Hakim.

3. to conjugate فعل الأمر according to تة six groups/ forms of the) ابـواب الفعل الثلاثى المجرد الس

triliteral verb, e.g., .etc ,نصر، يـنصر، ضرب، يضرب، فـتح، يـفتح

4. to explain the rules for making imperative ( فعل الأمر) from رع فعل المضا ) the Present

Tense.

212

�� فعل الأمر � � � � ��The Imperative

The Imperative ( الأمر فعل ) is a verb which conveys the sense of command, request or

supplication. Like اكتب (write), اجلس (sit), افـعل (do), etc. Examples from Al-Quran Al-

Hakim:

øŒÎ) uρ $oΨù= è% (#θ è=äz ÷Š $# ÍνÉ‹≈yδ sπ tƒ ó� s) ø9$# (#θ è=à6sù $yγ ÷ΖÏΒ ß] ø‹ ym ÷Λ ä÷∞ Ï©#Y‰ xîu‘ (#θ è=äz÷Š $#uρ šU$t6ø9$# # Y‰¤f ß™ (#θ ä9θè% uρ ×π©Ü Ïm

And remember we said: Enter this town, and eat of the plenty therein as you wish: but enter the gate with humility, in posture and in words (2:58).

# sŒÎ) uρ Ÿ≅Š Ï% öΝ ßγs9 (#θãΨ ÏΒ# u When it is said to them: believe (2:13).

(#θãΖÏΒ#u uρ !$yϑÎ/ àM ø9t“Ρr& And believe in what I reveal (2:41).

ù&t� ø% $# ÉΟ ó™$$Î/ y7 În/u‘ “Ï%©!$# t, n= y{ Proclaim! (Or Read) in the name of the Lord who created (96:1).

(#ρ â t� ø%$$ sù $tΒ u� œ£uŠ s? çµ÷ΖÏΒ Therefore read as much of the Quran as may be easy (for you) (73:20).

# sŒÎ* sù |N ù&t� s% tβ#u ö� à) ø9 $# õ‹ ÏètGó™ $$sù «!$$ Î/ z ÏΒ Ç≈sÜ ø‹¤±9$# ÉΟŠ Å_§�9$# When you read the Quran, seek Allah’s protection from the satan the rejected one (16:98).

äí÷Š $$sù $oΨ s9 š� −/u‘ So, beseech the Lord for us (2:61).

$ pκš‰ r'‾≈ tƒ t Ï%©!$# (#θ ãΨtΒ# u (#ρä‹ è{ öΝà2 u‘õ‹ Ïm(#ρ ã� Ï�Ρ$$sù BN$t6 èO Íρ r& (#ρã� Ï�Ρ$# $ Yè‹Ïϑ y_

O you who believe: take your precaution and either go forth in parties or go forth all together (4:71).

Conjugation of the Imperative ( عل الأمر ف ) According to the Six Groups (form) of the

Triliteral Verbs

1. Conjugation of فـتح يـفتح from Bab مر فعل الأ After starting one conjugation of each ] ب (bab) of the ثلاثى مجرد six forms

( ر م أ فعل ، ، ل و ع ف م اسم ال ل ع الفا ،اسم ر د ص م ،ع ار ض م ،ى اض م ) for each verb are given. If we know

these six critical forms then we can construct the whole table of conjugation, insha Allah.

213

1.1. Conjugation of Bab (فـعل، يـفعل) فـتح، يـفتح

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

حوا افـت Open! (you all)

حاافـت Open! (you both)

ح افـت Open!

حاضر ر ك ذ م

حن افـت Open! (you all)

حاافـت Open! (you both)

حى افـت Open!

حاضر ث ن و م

Six Forms of يـفتح -فـتح :@ب Examples from

Al-Quran Al-HakeemEnglish

Translation اسم مصدر

فعول الم م س ا فاعل ال

◌

ماض مضارع امر

óΟs9 r& t� s? y#ø‹ x. Ÿ≅yèsù y7 •/u‘/Î'r¾õtp≈=É #$9ø�Ï‹≅È 40.

to do فـعل يـفعل افـعل فاعل مفعول فعل

)ÎŒs# _y$!u ΡtÁó�ã #$!« ρu#$9ø�xG÷xß 41 . to open, to give victory

فـتح يـفتح افـتح فاتح مفتوح فـتح

&r9sΟ †sgøèy≅ö .xŠø‰yφè/ö ûÎ’ ?sÒô=Î‹≅942 . to make, to place, to set up

جعل يجعل اجعل جاعل مجعول جعل

#$!©%Ï“ dsΗuìy Βt$ωZ ρuãt‰£Šyνç43. to gather, to collect

جمع يجمع اجمع جامع مجموع جمع

44. . . الصالحات لا الذين آمنوا وعملواإ to act righteously

صلح يصلح اصلح صالح مخلود مصلحة

ρuΒt$ †sƒø‰yããθχš )ÎωH &rΡ�à¡|γßΝö 45 . to deceive خدع يخدع اخدع خادع مخدوع خدع

ρu#$9ø‚y≈±ÏèÏt ρu#$9ø‚y≈±Ïèy≈MÏ46. to be humble خشع يخشع اخشع خاشع مشعور خشوع

Βt Œs##$!©%Ï“ „o±ô�xìß ãÏΨ‰yνç…ÿ )Îωā /Î*ÎŒøΡÏµÏ47

.

to intercede شفع يشفع اشفع شافع مشفوع شفاعة

#$9ø)s$‘Íãtπè .Βt$ #$9ø)s$‘Íãtπè 48 . to knock, to hit

قـرع يـقرع اقـرع قارع مقروع قـرع

40 Have you not considered, (O Muhammad s.a.w), how your Rabb dealt with the companions of the elephant (105:1).

41 When the victory of Allah has come and the conquest. (110:1) 42 Did he not make their plan into misguidance. (105:2) 43 Who collects wealth and (continuously) counts it (104:2). 44 Except for those who have believed and done righteous deed….( 103:3) 45 But they don’t deceive except themselves. (2:9) 46 Humble men and humble women (33:35). 47 Who is that can intercede with him except by His permission? (2:255) 48 The striking calamity. What is the striking calamity. (101:1-2)

214

ρuƒtϑôΖuèãθβt #$9øϑy$ããθβt 49. to stop, to prevent, to withhold

منع يمنع امنع مانع ممنـوع منع

ùsÁ|≅eÈ 9Ï�t/nÎ7y ρu#$Υùtp�ö 50. to sacrifice, to slaughter

نحر يـنحر انحر Vحر منحور نحر

1.2. Conjugation of مر فعل الأ from Bab: نصر، يـنصر ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

حاضر ر ك ذ م انصر انصرا انصروا

حاضر ث ن و م انصرى انصرا انصرن Six forms of نصر ، يـنصر :@ب


English Translation

اسم مصدر فعول الم

اسم فاعل ال

ماضى مضارع امر

)ÎŒs# _y$!u ΡtÁó�ã #$!« ρu#$9ø�xG÷xß 51 . to help, to deliver

نصر يـنصر انصر Vصر منصور نصر

y7Í× ‾≈s9 'ρé& Ü=≈ ptõ¾r& Í‘$ ¨Ζ9$#δèΝö ùÏ�κp$ zy≈#Î$àρβt52

to live forever خلد يخلد اخلد خالد مفسوق خلود

uθ èδ ª! $# ß, Î=≈y‚ ø9$# ä— Í‘$t7ø9$# â‘ Èhθ |Áßϑ ø9$#53

to create out of nothing

لق خ يخلق اخلق خالق مخلوق خلق

|M÷ƒ r&u‘ uρ } $Ψ9$# šχθ è= ä{ô‰tƒ ’ Îû Çƒ ÏŠ#$!« &rùøθu#`[% 54

to enter دخل يدخل ادخل داخل مدخول دخول

$tΒ uρ šχθ ããy‰ øƒs† HωÎ) öΝ ßγ|¡ à�Ρr& $ tΒuρ„o±ôèã�áρβt55

to perceive شعر يشعر اشعر شاعر مشعور شعور

ρu#$9Á¢≈‰Ï%Ït ρu#$9Á¢≈‰Ï%s≈MÏ 56 to be true صدق يصدق اصدق صادق مصدوق صدق

x‚$−ƒÎ) ß‰ç7 ÷è tΡ y‚$−ƒ Î)uρΣn¡óGtèÏÚ57

to worship to obey

عبد يـعبد اعبد عابد معبود عبادة

49 And (of their deed) withhold (simple) assistance. (107:4) 50 So pray for your Rabb and sacrifice. (108:2) 51 When the victory of Allah has come and the conquest. (110:1) 52 Those will be companions of the Fire, they will abide therein eternally. (2:39) 53 He is Allah, the Creator, the Inventor, the Fashioner. (59:24) 54 And you see the people entering into the religion of Allah in multitudes. (110:2) 55 But they don’t deceive except themselves but they perceive not. (2:9) 56 And men and women who give charity. (33:35) 57 You alone we worship and from You only we seek help. (1:4)

215

Ÿω uρ (#θçΡθä3 s? t Ï% ©!$% x. (#θÝ¡ nΣ ©! $# öΝßγ9 |¡Σ r' sùöΝåκ |¦à�Ρ r& 4 š�Í× ‾≈ s9 'ρ é& ãΝèδ šχθ à)Å¡≈ x� ø9$#

58

to transgress ،فسق فسوق

فسق يـفسق افسق فاسق مفسوق

%è≅ö ƒt≈‾'r‰šκp$ #$9ø6x≈�Ï�ãρχš59 to disbelieve كفر يكفر اكفر كافر مكفور كفر

$¬Η s>sù ôM yè Ïϑy™ £ÏδÌ� õ3 yϑÎ/&r‘ö™y=nMô )Î9s�öκÍ£ 60

to plot, to scheme

مكر يمكر امكر ماكر ممكور مكر

ρu9øFtΖàÝ�ö Ρt�ø§Ó Β¨$ %s‰£ΒtMô 9Ïót‰7 61 to look at, to wait

نظر يـنظر انظر Vظر منظور نظر

ρuΒÏ ©x�hÌ nt%™Å‰> )ÎŒs# my¡|‰y62 to envy حسد يحسد احسد حاسد محسود حسد

%s‰ ?6t¨t #$9�”©ô‰ß ΒÏz #$9øöxcÄ 63 to be guided, to be on the right

رشد يـرشد ارشد راشد مرشود رشد

tÏG ÏΖ≈s) ø9$# uρ ÏM≈ tFÏΖ≈s) ø9$#uρ t Ï% Ï‰≈ ¢Á9$#uρρu#$9Á¢≈‰Ï%s≈MÏ 64

to be obedient قـنت يـقنت اقـنت قانت مقنـوت قـنوت

ãβθ ä3s?uρ ãΑ$t6 Éf ø9$#2Ÿ$$9øèÏγôÇ #$9øϑyΖ�àθ\Â 65

to puff up, to swell

فوش نـفش ش ف ن ـ يـنـفش انـفش Vفش منـ

1.3. Conjugation of مر فعل الأ from Bab: ضرب، يضرب ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

إضربـوا Beat/ strike! (you all)

إضر[ Beat/ strike! (you both)

إضرب Beat/ strike! (you one)


إضربن Beat/ strike! (you all)

إضر[ Beat/ strike! (you both)

إضربى Beat/ strike! (you one)


58 And be not like those who forget Allah, so he made them forget themselves. Those are the defiantly disobedient. (59:19)

59 Say O’ disbelievers (109:1). 60 So when she heard of their malicious talk, she sent for them. (12:31) 61 And let every soul look at what it has put forth for tomorrow. (59:18) 62 And from the evil of the envious one when he envies. (113:5) 63 The right course has become clear from error. (2:256) 64 And obedient men and obedient women, the truthful men and truthful women. (33:35) 65 And mountains will be like wool, fluffed up. (101:5)

216

Six forms of ضرب، يضرب :@ب Examples from

Al-Quran Al-HakimEnglish

Translation اسم مصدر

فعول الم اسم فاعل ال

ماضى مضارع امر

š�ù= Ï?uρ ã≅≈sV øΒF{$# $pκ æ5 Î� ôØ tΡ Ä¨$Ζ= Ï99sèy=‾γßΟó ƒtGt�x3©�ãρχš66

to strike, to hit, to give example

ضرب يضرب اضرب ضارب مضروب ضرب

$oΨ−/u‘ Ÿωuρ ö≅Ïϑ óss? !$uΖ øŠn= tã #\� ô¹ Î) $yϑ x.myϑy=ùFtµç… ãt?n’ #$!©%Ïš ΒÏ %s6ö=ÎΖu$ 67

to carry, to bear

حمل يحمل احمل حامل محمول حمل

68وتـواصوا [لحق و تـوصوا [لصبر to bear with patience

صبر يصبر اصبر صابر معبود صبر

)ÎΡ‾$ !¬ ρu)ÎΡ‾$! )Î9s‹øµÏ ‘u≡_Åèãθβt69 to return ،رجع رجوع

رجع يـرجع ارجع راجع مرجوع

óΟßγs9 uρ ë># x‹ tã 7ΟŠ Ï9r&/Îϑy$ .x%Ρçθ#( ƒt3õ‹É/çθβt70

to lie كذب يكذب اكذب كاذب مكذوب كذب

Βt$! &rîø_o4 ãtΨ÷µç Βt$!è&ã… ρuΒt$ 2Ÿ¡|=|71 to earn كسب يكسب اكسب كاسب مكسوب كسب

Βt≈=Î7 ƒtθöΘÏ #$!$eÏÉ 72 to possess ملك يملك املك مالك مملوك ملك

zΝ tF yz ª! $# 4’ n? tã öΝ ÎγÎ/θ è= è%ρuãt?n’4 ™yϑôèÏγÎΝö73

to set a seal, to stamp

ختم يختم اختم خاتم مختـوم ختم

)Îβ #$!© ƒt'ùΒã�ã /Î$$9øèy‰ôΑÉ ρu#$}Mmô¡|≈Ç 74 to be just, to be fair

عدل يـعدل اعدل عادل معدول عدل

66 And those examples we present to the people that perhaps they will give a thought (59:21). 67 Our Rabb, and lay not upon us a burden like that which you laid upon those before us (2:286). 68 And advice each other to truth and advice each other of patience (103:3). 69 Indeed we belong to Allah, and indeed to Him we will return (2:156). 70 And for them is a painful punishment because they (habitually) used to lie (2:10). 71 His wealth will not avail him and that which he earned (111:2). 72 Sovereign of the Day of Recompense (1:3). 73 Allah has set a seal upon their hearts and upon their hearing. (2:7) 74 Indeed, Allah orders justice and good conduct. (16:90)

217

óΟ n= sùr& (#ρç�� Å¡ o„ ’Îû ÇÚ ö‘F{ $# tβθ ä3 tGsù;mλçΝö %è=èθ>Ò ƒtè÷)É=èθβt 5Íκp$!75

understand, make use

of the intellect

عقل يـعقل اعقل عاقل معقول عقل

.xξā ( 9sŠã⊥.6t‹xβ ûÎ’ #$:øtçÜsϑyπÏ76 to throw بوذ نـبذ نـبذ يـنبذ انبذ Vبذ منـ

1.4. Conjugation of مر فعل الأ from Bab: ع يسمع سم

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

اسمعواHear (you all)

إسمعاHear (you both)

إسمع Hear (you one)


اسمعن Hear (you all)

اسمعاHear (you both)

اسمعىHear (you one)


Six forms of ع يسمع :@ب سم


English Translation

ماضى مضارع امر فاعل مفعول مصدر

ωŸ Brtø“tβ÷ )Îχā #$!© ΒtèyΨo$ 77 to be grieved حزن يحزن احزن حازن محزون حزن

†stø¡|=Ü &rβ Βt$!s&ã…ÿ &r{÷#s$tνç78 to think:

to consider

ب يحس احسب حاسب محسوب حسبان حسب

Ÿωuρ … çνßŠθ ä↔ tƒ $ uΚßγ Ýà ø�Ïm 4 uθèδ uρ#$9øèy?Í’÷ #$9øèyàÏŠΟÞ 79

to guard:

to protect

ظ احف حافظ محفوظ حفظ حفظ يحفظ

)Îβ #$}MΣ¡|≈z 9s∀Å’ zä£ô�A 80 to lose خسر مخسران

خسر يخسر اخسر خاسر مخسور

§Ν èO āξx. t∃ ôθ y™ tβθ ßϑn= ÷ès? .

.xξā 9sθö ?sè÷=nϑßθβt æÏ=ùΝz #$9ø‹u)ÉÈ 81

to know علم يـعلم اعلم عالم معلوم علم

šÏ%©! $# (#θãΨ tΒ# u to work ل يـعم اعمل عامل معمول عمل عمل

75 So have they not travelled through the earth so that their hearts may thus learn wisdom. (22:46) 76 By no means will he be thrown in the Crusher. (104:4) 77 Do not grieve; indeed Allah is with us. (9:40) 78 He thinks that his wealth will make him immortal. (104:3) 79 And there preservation tires Him not. And He is the Most High, the Most Great. (2:255) 80 Indeed mankind is in loss. (103:2) 81 Then no! You are going to know. No! if you only knew with knowledge of certainty. (102:4,5)

218

ρuãtϑÏ=èθ#( #$9Á¢≈=Îsy≈MÏ 82

Î�ö� xî ÅUθ àÒ øóyϑ ø9$#æt=n‹øγÎΟó ρuωŸ #$9Òā$!9jÏt83

to be angry غض يـغضب اغضب غاضب مغضوب غضب ب

ρu9s≈3Å ωā ?s�ø)sγßθβt @n¡ó6Î‹syγßΝö84 to understand, to

comprehend

فقه يـفقه افـقه فاقه مفقوه فقه

’ Îû Ν ÎγÎ/θè= è% ÖÚ z÷£∆ùs“t#ŠyδèΝã #$!ª Βt�tÊZ$ 85

to be sick, to fall ill

مرض يمرض امرض مارض محرض مرض

1.5. Conjugation of مر فعل الأ from Bab: كرم يكرم ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

اكرمواAll of you respect

اكرماBoth of you respect

اكرم You respect


اكرمن All of you respect

اكرماBoth of you respect

اكرمى You respect


1.6. Conjugation of فعل الأمر from Bab: حسب يحسب ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

احسبـوا All of you think

احسباBoth of you think

احسب You think


احسبن All of you think

احسباBoth of you think

احسبى You think


Examples of this Bab from Al-Quran

1 ÷Πr& |=Å¡ ym tÏ% ©!$# (#θãm u�tIô_ $# ÏN$t↔ÍhŠ ¡¡9$# What! do those, who seek after evil ways, think… (45:21).

2 ÷Π r& |=Å¡ ym tÏ% ©!$# tβθè= yϑ÷è tƒ … ÏN$t↔ Íh‹ ¡¡9$# Do those, who practice evil, think … (29:4)

3 ÷Πr& |=Å¡ ym šÏ% ©!$# ’ Îû ΟÎγ Î/θè= è% . . . íÚ t� ¨Β Or do those in whose hearts is a disease … (47:29)

4 See also Al-Quran: 2:214, 3:142, 9:16, 19:9 and 27:44.

82 To those who believe and do righteous deeds. (2:25) 83 Not of those who have evoked (your) anger upon them, or of those who are astray. (1:7) 84 But you do not understand their (way of) exalting. (17:44) 85 In their hearts is disease, so Allah has increased their disease (2:10).

219

Some Important Rules As stated in the beginning of this unit that the imperative أمر (amr) is a command. It has

two kinds: first is called affirmative command, and the second is called negative

command. This unit is related to the first kind which is affirmative command. It is made

from the six forms of the second person of Present Tense ( ع ار ض م ) as seemed from the

conjugations of six groups of triliteral verbs and the six forms of every bab ( ب [ ). We

should keep in our mind the following rules which are very important:

1. First of all, the from the beginning of the 2nd person of the Present ”ت“ علامة المضارع

Tense is dropped.

2. After dropping “ت”, a همزة الوصل is prefixed to the verb.

3. If the second letter (radical, alphabet) of the Present Tense (Mudre -مضارع ) has ة ضم(dammah then, the ) e.g., Present Tense ,(حركة -for) ضمة will take همزة الوصل ع ار ض م ), second

person تـنصر (you help or you will help) will have its imperative انصر (help), and تكرم will

have its imperative اكرم. 4. And if the second radical of the مضارع has كسرة (kasrah) or فـتحة (fatha), this همزة will take

.e.g ,كسرة

افـتح will have its imperative (you open or you will open) تـفتح 2nd person verb م ض ار ع (open), تسمع (you hear) will have اسمع (hear), تحسب (will have) احسب and رب ض ت (you

beat or will beat) will have the imperative mood اضرب because the second letter has رة كس .

So, in the verbs of ثلاثى مجرد (other than its weak verbs _معتل) (إأ ) الف is attached to 2nd person

verbs. This الف takes ضمة on, it if the ة م ل ك ال ين ع of root words has ضمة, otherwise it takes a

.(معتل ) under it. This rule is not related to the weak verbs كسرة 5. After prefixing the following changes are found in five forms of the 2nd person (أ، إ، أ ) همزة

of a Present Tense:

i. The last letter ( حرف) of the 2nd person singular verb ( و اح د م ذ ك ر ح اض ر) is marked

with the sign of جزم /كون س , e.g., يـفعل (he does) is مضارع and إفـعل is أمر (do - you

one person).

ii. The four :are dropped نـون الإعرابى

220

a. From two forms ( صيغ) of dual verbs (m. and f. 2nd person), e.g., تـفعلان is.(do – both of you) افـعلا :from it is أمر and the ,(Present Tense) مضارع

b. From one form of 2nd person singular f. ( واحد مؤنث حاضر). تـفعلين is مضارع(Present Tense) and the أمر from it will be افـعلى [do – you feminine singular

(f.sg)].

c. From one form ( صيـغة) of 2nd person plural m. تـفعلون (you do, you are

doing, you will do), is مضارع and the imperative verb ( أمر فعل ) from it will

be افـعلوا [do - you masculine plural (m.pl)].

Note: The نـون نسوة of the plural form of 2nd person f. ( غة جمع مؤنث حاضر ,.is not dropped, e.g (صيـ

Do] افـعلن :is the Present Tense form and the imperative form of it is [do - you (fpl)] تـفعلن

- you (fpl)].

If there is a weak verb (معتل), from مجرد ثلاثى (triliteral), no need to prefix الوصل همزة (أ،إ)

to the imperative verb, for instance:

) The Present Tense .قـول is in fact (he said) قال .1 ع مضار ) is قول ت ـ (you say) and the imperative

.(!say) قل is (أمر )

The weak letter ( حرف العلة) و (waw) is dropped because of التقاء الساكنين, it means

combining the two ساكن (sakin) letters in one place: "و" and "ل" After dropping .قـول =

the “و” the أمر is “ قل”. This imperative is used 293 times in Al-Quran, e.g.

1 ö≅è% zÇrρ é& ¥’n< Î) Say, “It has been revealed to me”. (72:1)

2 ö≅è% ’ÎoΤ Î) s9 ’ÎΤ u��Ågä† zÏΒ «!$# Say, “No one can deliver me from Allah (if I were to disobey Him)”. (72:22)

3 ö≅è% $pκš‰r'‾≈ tƒ šχρ ã�Ï�≈ x6ø9 $# Say, “O you that reject Faith”. (109:1)

4 ö≅è% uθèδ ª! $# î‰ym r& Say, “He is Allah, the one and only”. (112:1)

5 ö≅è% èŒθ ããr& Éb>t� Î/ È,n= x� ø9$# Say, “I seek refuge with the Lord of the dawn”. (113:1)

6 ö≅è% èŒθ ããr& Éb>t� Î/ Ä¨$Ψ9$# Say, “I seek refuge with the Lord and Cherisher of Mankind”. (114:1)

221

Conjugation of مر فعل الأ قل :ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

قـولواSay (all of you)

قـولا Say (both of you)

قلSay (you one person)

حاضر ر ك ذ م (m.)

قـلن Say (all of you)

قـولا Say (both of you)

قـولى Say (you one person)

حاضر ث ن و م (f.)

Conjugation of مر فعل الأ ال كن _ ع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

كونـواBe (all of you)

Vكو Be (both of you)

كن Be (you one person)


كن Be (all of you)

Vكو Be (both of you)

كونى Be (you one person)

حاضر ث ن و م (f.)

Use of قل in sentences of daily usage

.Say to him قل له 1

.Say to your brother قل لأخيك 2

.Say to the teacher قل للأستاذ 3

ا طالبة نشيطة جدا 4 .Say to her that she is a very active student قل لها أ«

.”Say “there is no God but Allah قل: لا اله الا الله 5

222

��

النه

ى فعل The Negative Imperative

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

تـفعلوالا Don’t open

لا تـفعلا Don’t open

لا تـفعل Don’t open


لا تـفعلن Don’t open

لا تـفعلا Don’t open

لا تـفعلىDon’t open

حاضر ث ن ؤ م (f.)

223

Introduction to 2nd part of Unit No.08 The 2nd part of this unit is about the negative Imperative ( فعل النـهى). Here, you will study

the following points:

1. Definition of the negative Imperative ( النـهى فعل تـعريف ).

2. Some important rules how to make the negative Imperative verb from the six “2nd person”

forms of the Present Tense.

3. Changes in the five forms of the “2nd person” of the Present Tense after prefixing

.لا الناهية

4. Conjugation of the negative Imperative ( فعل النـهى) from six groups of the triliteral verb

.(ابـواب الفعل الثلاثى المجرد )

Objectives of 2nd part of Unit No.08 After going through this part of Unit No.08 you will Insha Allah be able:

1. to define the negative Imperative.

2. to make the negative Imperative verb from the “2nd person” of Present Tense.

3. to know the changes in the five forms the “2nd person” of Present Tense after prefixing

.لا الناهية

4. to conjugate the negative Imperative verb according to the six groups of the triliteral verbs

( تة ابـواب الفعل الثلا ثى المجرد الس ).

224

�� فعل النهى��The Negative Imperative

The Negative Imperative (فعل النهى) is a verb in which there is one asks or orders someone

not to do something like لا تـفعل (don’t do), لاتكتب (don’t write), لا 6كل (don’t eat), لا.etc ,(don’t help him) تـنصره

Some Important Rules:

1. Like an affirmative command ( فعل الأمر), this negative command of imperative mood is

made from six forms ( صيغ) of the 2nd person of the Present Tense.

2. The negation .(فعل مضارع ) is prefixed to Present Tense (لا الناهية ) لا 3. After prefixing ( لا الناهية) the following changes in five forms of the 2nd person of a Present

Tense are found:

i. The last alphabet (letter, ح ر ف) of the 2nd person singular verb ( و اح د م ذ ك ر ح اض ر) is

marked with the sign of م ز ج , e.g., تكتب (you write) is a Present Tense, the » ى(negation) is .(don’t write) لا تكتب

ii. The four ابى ر نـون الإع are dropped:

a. from two forms of dual verbs (m. & f. 2nd person), e.g., تضر[ن is a Present

Tense and the » ى (negation) from it is ]لا تضر(don’t beat - you two person

m. & f.).

b. from one form of 2nd person singular f. تكتبين (you write). It is a Present

Tense, the negative verb from it becomes لاتكتبى (don’t write - you one

person f.).

c. from one form ( غة is Present ,(you write) تكتـبـون .of 2nd person plural m (صيـ

Tense ( ع ار ض م ), and the » ى is لاتكتـبـوا (don’t write – all of you).

Note: The نـون نسوة of the plural form of 2nd person (f.) ( صيـغة جمع مؤنث حاضر) is not dropped.

.[don’t write – all of you (f)] لاتكتبن ,(you write) تكتبن

225

Conjugations of Negative Imperative (فعل النهى) According to the Six Groups

(Form) of the Triliteral Verb ( د ر مج ى ث لا ث اب و ب ـا ):

1. Conjugation of ى فعل from Bab تح يـفتح فـ

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لا تـفتحواDon’t open

لا تـفتحاDon’t open

لا تـفتح Don’t open


لا تـفتحن Don’t open

لا تـفتحاDon’t open

لا تـفتحىDon’t open

حاضر ث ن ؤ م f.

2. Conjugation of ى from Bab فعل ضرب يضرب

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لا تضربـواDon’t beat

تضر[ لا Don’t beat

لا تضرب Don’t beat


لا تضربن Don’t beat

لا تضر[ Don’t beat

لا تضربى Don’t beat


3. Conjugation of ى نصر يـنصر from Bab فعل

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لا تـنصرواDon’t help

لا تـنصراDon’t help

لا تـنصر Don’t help


لا تـنصرن Don’t help

لا تـنصراDon’t help

لا تـنصرىDon’t help


4. Conjugation of ى ع يسمع from Bab فعل سم

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لا تسمعواDon’t hear

لا تسمعاDon’t hear

لا تسمع Don’t hear


لا تسمعن Don’t hear

لا تسمعاDon’t hear

لا تسمعى Don’t hear

حاضر ث ن و م f.

226

5. Conjugation of ى حسب يحسب from Bab فعل

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لا تحسبـواAll of you don’t think

لا تحسباBoth of you don’t think

لا تحسب You don’t think


لا تحسبن All of you don’t think

لا تحسباBoth of you don’t think

لا تحسبى You don’t think


6. Conjugation of ى فعل from Bab كرم يكرم

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لا تكرمواAll of you don’t respect

لا تكرماBoth of you don’t respect

لا تكرم You don’t respect


تكرمن لا All of you don’t respect

لا تكرماBoth of you don’t respect

لا تكرمى You don’t respect


Use of لا الناهية in Al-Quran Al-Kareem

The word لا as لا الناهية along with and لا النافية لنفى الجنس لا are used 812 times in Al-

Quran Al-Karim.

Some Examples of لا الناهية: 1 Ÿω (#ρ ß‰Å¡ø� è? ’Îû ÇÚ ö‘ F{$# Don’t make mischief on the earth (2:11).

2 $yγ •ƒr' ‾≈tƒ šÏ% ©!$# (#θ ãΨtΒ# u Ÿω (#θ ä9θ à)s? $uΖÏã≡u‘ (#θ ä9θ è% uρ$tΡ ö� ÝàΡ$# (#θ ãè yϑó™$# uρ 3 š Ì� Ï�≈ x6 ù= Ï9uρ ë># x‹ tã ÒΟŠ Ï9r&

O you who believe. Say not (to Allah’s Messenger), “ra’ina” but say, “unzurna” and listen. And for the disbelievers is a painful punishment (2:104).

3 Ÿ$yγ•ƒr' ‾≈tƒ tÏ% ©!$# (#θãΖ tΒ# u Ÿω (#θ è=ÏÜ ö7è?Ν ä3ÏG≈ s% y‰|¹ Çd yϑø9 $$Î/ 3“ sŒF{ $# uρ

O believer! Cancel not your charity by reminders of your generosity or by injury (2:264).

4 Ÿω (#θ ãèÎ6 −Gs? ÏN≡uθ äÜäz Ç≈ sÜø‹ ¤±9$# 4 Don’t follow the Satan’s footsteps (24:21).

5 Ÿω (#θè=äz ô‰s? $�?θ ã‹ç/ u� ö� xî öΝ à6 Ï?θã‹ç/ Don’t enter house other than your own (24:27).

6 Ÿω ô#y‚s? Ÿωuρ ÷β t“ øtrB Fear not, nor grieve (29:33).

Use of لا الناهية in Sentences of Daily Usage

.Don’t go to the cinema لا تذهب إلى دار الخيالة 1

227

.Don’t sit here لا تجلس هنا 2

.O Fatima! Don’t write on the wall \ فاطمة لا تكتبى على الجدار 3

.O students (f.)! Don’t laugh لا تضحكن \ طالبات 4

يطان 5 .Don’t worship the Satan لا تـعبد الش

محمد و رشيدة لا تكتـبا على الطاولة \ 6 O Muhammad and Rashida! Don’t write on the desk.

Note: In example No. 5, the last letter ( ف ر ح ) is مكسور, due to التقاء الساكنين. There is a rule for

it, i.e., اذا حرك الساكن فحرك [لكسرةDue to the combination of two sakin letters in one place, the حركة that is given to the sakin

.كسرة is ,(ساكن)

and the لا الناهية The difference between the negation) الفرق بين لا الناهية و لا النافية

negative النافيةلا )

The above mentioned six examples are related to the examples of the negation لا ) لا :(لا النافية) لا and the following are the examples of the negative ,(الناهية

.Why are you not writing/ why don’t you write لماذا لا تكتب 1

,He does not go to school, or He is not going to school هو لا يذهب إلى المدرسة 2or He will not go to school.

.You do not understand the lesson أنـتم لا تـفهمون الدرس 3You will not understand the lesson.

تذهبن إلى نـنكاوى هل 4 Are you going to Nunkavi? Will you go to Nunkavi?

?Do you studying in the university هل تدرسون فى الجامعة؟ 5

ختبار 6 Are you (both m. & f.) writing the answers on the هل تكتـبان الأجوبة فى الإanswer sheet?

In short, both are imperative and negative imperative ( ى « و ر م أ ) forms, we can order only

the person in front of us (2nd person). It means that the both forms ( أ م ر و « ى) are for only

the 2nd person as seems from the following comprehensive conjugation of Past Tense, Present Tense, Imperative and Negative Imperative:

ى ر م أ ع ار ض م اض م No Gender Person

يـفعل He does/ will do

فـعل He did

sr

m 3rd person يـفعلان They do/ will do

فـعلا They did

dl

228

يـفعلون They do/ will do

فـعلواShe did

Pl

تـفعلShe does/ will do

فـعلت She did

sr

f 3rd person تـفعلان They do/ will do

فـعلتاThey did

dl

يـفعلن They do/ will do

فـعلن They did

pl

لا تـفعل Don’t do (it)

افـعل Do (it)

تـفعل You do/ will do

فـعلت You did

sr

m 2nd person لا تـفعلا Don’t do (it)

افـعلا Do (it)

تـفعلانYou do/ will did

فـعلتماYou did

dl

تـفعلوا لا Don’t do (it)

افـعلوا Do (it)

تـفعلون You do/ will do

فـعلتم You did

pl

تـفعلى لا Don’t do (it)

افـعلىDo (it)

تـفعلين You do

فـعلت You did

sr

f 2nd person تـفعلا لاDon’t do (it)

افـعلا Do (it)

تـفعلان You do

فـعلتماYou did

dl

تـفعلن لا Don’t do (it)

افـعلن Do (it)

تـفعلن You do

فـعلتن You did

pl

افـعل I do/ will do

فـعلت I did

sr

f. & m. 1st personنـفعل

We do/ will do

فـعلناWe did

dl & pl

229

فاعل ��اسم ال

(Active Participle)

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

فاعلون All doer

فاعلان Both doer

فاعل Doer

ر ك ذ م m.

فاعلات All doer

فاعلتان Both doer

فاعلة Doer

ث ن ؤ م f.

� � � اسم المفعول ��(Passive Participle)

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ن و مفعول ر ك ذ م مفعول مفعولان m.

ث ن ؤ م مفعولة مفعولتان مفعولات f.

230


In this part of unit, with the Grace of Allah, you will study about two things:

.(The Active Participle) اسم الفاعل .1

.(The Passive Participle) اسم المفعول .2


After studying this part of unit no.08, Inshallah, you will be able:

1. to define فاعل اسم (Active Participle).

2. to say/write فاعل اسم correctly according to the rules.

3. to conjugate فاعل اسم from the six groups on trilateral verb .ابـواب الفعل الثلاثى المجرد4. to present examples of فاعل اسم from Al-Quran Al-Karim.

5. to use فاعل اسم in sentences of daily usage.

6. to describe the definition of .(Passive Participle) اسم مفعول

7. to say/write .correctly according to the prescribed rules اسم مفعول

8. to state the examples of .from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem اسم مفعول

9. to easily utilize .in sentences of daily usage اسم مفعول

231

��8.3 اسم الفاعل

The Active Particle

م و المعل رد ج م ال ى ث لا اغ من الماضى الث ص ي ع منه الفعل ق يدل على ما و هو اسم مشتق : اعل ف اسم ف تـعري .اعل ف ن ز ى و ل ع

Definition of Active Noun

فاعل اسم (Active Noun) is derived from the root words by adding ) الف after the first ( ا

letter and marking the sign of (ـ) كسرة under the central letter, e.g., ر ، ص ، ن , these are

root words, and فاعل اسم of it is صرV, (helper, one who helps). From ل ع ف , the م س ا ل اع ف is فاعل, (doer/the person who does certain actions). Some examples from Al-Quran

Al-Hakim are presented in the table below:

1 ª! $# öΝ ä3 š/u‘ ß, Î=≈yz Èe≅ à2 & ó x« Allah is the creator of all things (40:62).

2 ôyϑ x. uθèδÓ$ Î#≈yz ’Îû Í‘$ ¨Ζ9$# Like those who abide eternally in the Hellfire (47:15).

3 Ÿξ sù u�ÅÀ$tΡ öΝ çλ m; And there was none to aid them (47:13).

4 $yϑ sù …çµs9 ÏΒ ;ο§θè% Ÿω uρ 9�ÅÀ$tΡ Then he will have no power and no helper (86:10).

5 β Î) ä3 tƒ öΝ ä3Ζ ÏiΒ tβρ ç�ô³Ïã tβρ ç�É9≈ |¹ If there are twenty patient people amongst you (8:65).

6 ÏΒuρ Ìh� x© >‰ Å™% tn # sŒÎ) y‰ |¡ym And from the evil of the envier when he envies (113:5).

Conjugation of ل اع ف م س ا According to the Six Groups of Triliteral Verb

( د ر ج م ال ى ث لا الث ل ع ف ال اب و ب ـا )

1. From Bab ، يـفتح ح ت ف ـ

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

فاتحون All openers

فاتحان Two openers

فاتح One opener

ر ك ذ م

فاتحات All openers

فاتحتان Two openers

فاتحة One opener

ث ن ؤ م

232

Some other اسم الفاعل from Bab يـفتح فـتح [عث 1

(raiser, resurrected) من هو [عث

جاعل 2(maker)

الله جاعل الكون ذاهب 3

(going, goes) هل انت ذاهب الى الجامعة

رافع 4(raiser)

الله رافع الدرجات خادع 5

(deceiver) المنافق خادع

جامع 6(gatherer, collecter)

الله جامع شع سخا 7

(humbler) هل انت خاشع كثيرا

شافع 8(interceder)

لمحشر د صلى الله عليه وسلم شافع امحم صانع 9

(doer, maker) الله صانع

مانع 10(stopper, preventer, withholder )

أنت مانع Vحر 11

(slaughterer) هل أنت Vحر

2. Conjugation of from Bab اسم فاعل to beat, to hit, to strike, to struck, to) ضرب، يضرب

give example)

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

ضاربـون All beater

ضار[ن Two beater

ضارب One beater

ر ك ذ م m.

ضار[ت All beater

ضاربـتان Two beater

ضاربة One beater

ث ن ؤ م f.

Some Other اسم الفاعل from This Bab

غافر (forgiver, coverer)

الله غافر الذنب

233

كاذب (liar)

نافق كاذب الم

كاسب (earner)

حبيب الله كاسب ال

مالك (possessor)

الكون ك ال م الله

خاتم (sealer)

محمد صلى الله وسلم خاتم الأنبياء

عاقل (rational)

هو عاقل

Vبذ (thrower)

هو Vبذ

3. Conjugation of from Bab اسم فاعل نصر يـنصر

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

Vصرون All helper

Vصران Two helper

Vصر One helper

ر ك ذ م m.

Vصرات All helper

Vصر6ن Two helper

Vصرة One helper

ث ن ؤ م f.

Some Other اسم فاعل from This Bab

6رك 1(leaver)

هو 6رك الدنـيا خالق 2

(creator) الله خالق

اخل د 3(enterer)

داخل فى الغرفة هل هو ذاكر 4

(remembered) احمد ذاكر معروف

زق را 5 (provider)

الله رازق ساجد 6

(prostrated) هل هو ساجد

شاكر 7(grateful)

أV شاكر الله؟

234

عابد 8(worshiper)

هل أنت عابد الله؟ كافر 9

(disbeliever) هو كافر

Vظر 10(looker)

V ر ظ هل أنت

Conjugation of الفاعل اسم from Bab ع، يسمع سم

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

سامعون All hearer

سامعان Two hearer

سامع One hearer

ر ك ذ م m.

سامعات All hearer

سامعتان Two hearer

سامعة One hearer

ث ن ؤ م f.

Some other اسم فاعل from this Bab (ب@)

حازن 1(griever)

اليـوم: أV حازن حافظ 2

(protector, Guardian) الله حافظ

شاهد 3(Observer, Witness)

V ◌ الله شاهد بين عالم 4

(Scholar) الله عالم الغيب. هو عالم معروف

عامل 5(Worker)

هو عامل ماهر جاهل 6

(ignorant) المجالات أV جاهل فى بـعض

حامد 7(praise)

هو لا يحب حامدا. حامد يحمد كثيرا شارب 8

(drinker) هل أنت شارب الخمر

عاهد 9(adherer)

هل أنت عاهد

235

راحم 10(merciful)

الله راحم على عباده

Conjugation of اسم فاعل from bab (No example is provided in this course) حسب يحسب

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

حاسبـون All thinker

حاسبان Both thinker

حاسب Thinker

ر ك ذ م m.

حاسبات All thinker

حاسبـتان Both thinker

حاسبة Thinker

ث ن ؤ م f.

236

8.4۔ اسم مفعول ( The Passive Participle)

هو اسم مشتق يدل على ما وقع عليه الفعل.: تـعريف اسم المفعول This noun or phrase describes the person or thing that is affected by the action of a verb.

This noun is derived from the root words by prefixing “ م” and inserting “I” between the

second and third letters. The central letter (alphabet) is marked with the sign ضمة (_ ◌_),

e.g., ن، ص، ر, these are root words and اسم مفعول from it is منصور (one who is helped),

.(one who is killed) مقتـول

Conjugation of اسم مفعول According to the Six Groups of Triliteral Verb

( الثلاثى المجرد ابـواب الفعل )

1. Conjugation from Bab فـتح يـفتح

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

مفتـوحون They are all opened

مفتـوحان Both of them are opened

مفتـوح It is opened

ر ك ذ م m.

مفتـوحات They are all opened

مفتـوحتان Both of them are opened

مفتـوحة It is opened

ث ن ؤ م f.

Some Other مفعول اسم from Bab فـتح يـفتح مبـعوث 1

(He is resurrected) عزوجل الله ن م ث و ع ب ـمحمد صلى الله عليه وسلم م

ول ع مج 2 (It is made)

الى ع هذا الكون مجعول و الجاعل هو الله ت ـ مجموع 3

(It is gathered) المال المجموع غير Vفع

مرفـوع 4(It is raised)

مرفـوع هذا حديث مخدوع 5

(He is deceived) ) هو انسان مخدوع و الخادع هو المنافق (من المنافقين

مشفوع 6(Who is interceded)

وعا و الشافع يكون محمد صلى الله عليه وسلمف أV أكون مش

237

مصنـوع 7(It is mad)

انعه الله عزوجل هذا كون مصنـوع وص

ممنـوع 8(It is prevented)

التدخين ممنـوع هنا

منحور 9(It is sacrificed/slaughtered)

هذا جمل منحور

2. Conjugation of اسم مفعول from Bab ضرب يضرب

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

مضروبـون All are beaten/hit

مضرو[ن Two are beaten/hit

مضروب One is beaten/hit

ر ك ذ م m.

مضرو[ت All are beaten/hit

مضروبتان Two are beaten

مضروبة It/she is beaten/hit

ث ن ؤ م f.

Some other اسم مفعول from Bab ضرب يضرب محمول 1

(It is carried/ bewared)

هذا أمر محمول/ هذه أشياء محمولة

مظلوم 2(It is wronged)

أV مظلوم وهو ظالم

مغفور 3(He is forgiven)

الله عزوجل غافر الذنب وأنت مغفور

مكذوب 4(It is laid)

هذا أمر مكذوب. لا Ñتم Ëذا الخبر لأنه مكذوب

ب مكسو 5 (It is earned)

المال الذى يكسبه الكاسب يسمى المال هذا رزق مكسوب. المكسوب

مملوك 6(It is possessed)

كتاب مملوك لى ال هذا )1( الله) (مملوك مملوك é كل الكون )2(

مختـوم 7(It is sealed/ stamped)

يسقون من رحيق مختـوم )1( (They will be given to drink pure sealed wine).

مختـومة ة و ب ـنـ ل ا )2( (The Prophethood is stamped)

کلام معقول هذا )1( معقول 8

238

(It is understood) )2( السعر معقول

3. Conjugation of from bab اسم مفعول نصر يـنصر

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

منصورون All of them are helped

منصوران Both of them are helped

منصور It/He is helped

ر ك ذ م m.

منصورات All of them are helped

منصور6ن Both of them are helped

منصورة It/she is helped

ث ن ؤ م f.

Some other اسم مفعول from Bab نصر، يـنصر متروك 1

(It is left)

عة متروكة فى ايـران )1( المتـ عمل متروك فى المجتمع الإسلامى اهذ )2(

مخلوق 2(It is created,

creature)

نحن مخلوق الله )1(مخلوق كل شىء )2(

مذكور 3(He is remembered)

مذكور وانت ذاكر الى ع الله ت ـ )1( هذه قصة مذكورة فى القرآن الكريم )2(

معبـود 4(He is worshipped)

نحن عابدون والله معبـود مكفور 5

(It is disbelieved) هذا صنم مكفور

منظور 6(You are looked)

Vظرون و انـتم منظورون نحن (We are looker you are looked)

مقتـول 7(Who is killed)

كان المقتـول غنيا

4. Conjugation of from Bab اسم مفعول ع يسمع سمع جم

PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

مسموعون All of them are heard

مسموعان Both of them are heard

مسموع He/It is heard

ر ك ذ م m.

مسموعات All of them are heard

مسموعتان Both of them are heard

مسموعة She/It is heard

ث ن ؤ م f.

Some other اسم مفعول from Bab ع، يسمع سم

239

محزون(Which is grieved)

الطالب محزون وأمه حازنة (The student is grieved and his mother is griever).

محفوظ (Which is protected,

guarded)

)1(ö≅t/ uθèδ ×β#u ö� è% Ó‰‹ Åg¤Χ ∩⊄⊇∪ ’ Îû 8yöθ s9 ¤âθà� øt¤Χ ∩⊄⊄∪

(Nay! This is a Glorious Qur’an in preserved tablet (85:21, 22).

هذا مال محفوظ )2((This is a protected (guarded wealth).

مرحوم (Who is being

mercied)

الله راحم وهو مرحوم (Allah is merciful and he is being mercied).

د مشهو (Which is witnessed)

شهود م وذلك يـوم (And that is a day (which will be) witnessed (11:103).

×y7Í )1( معلوم ‾≈ s9 'ρ é& öΝçλ m; ×− ø— Í‘ ×Πθè= ÷è ¨Β(For then is a Sustenance determined) (37:41).

هذا شىء معلوم )2( (This thing is known).

معمول (Which is worked on)

هذا شىء معمول عليه والعامل رشيد )1( (This is a thing which is worked on and the worker is rasheed).

محمود (One who is praised)

نحن حامدون والله تـعالى محمود (We are praiser and Allah Taala is Praised).

مشروب (Which is drunk)

الشاربـون هم الأطفال اللبن مشروب، و (The milk is drunk and the drinkers are children).

مغضوب Who is evoked

Î�ö� xî ÅUθàÒ øóyϑø9 $# óΟ Îγø‹ n= tæ Ÿωuρ t Ïj9 !$āÒ9$#(Not of those who have evoked (your) anger) (1:7).

240

� �

ةمل

الج

فعلية

ال

The Verbal Sentence (2) (1)

الفعل الفاعل المفعول الفعل الفاعل (The subject) (The Verb) (The Object) (The Subject) (The Verb)

الجملة الفعلية ◌ الجملة الفعلية (The Verbal Sentence) (The Verbal Sentence)

الفعل المتـعدى الفعل اللازم (The Intransitive Verb) (The Transitive Verb)

ضرب الله مثلا جاء الحق وزهق الباطل

فعل فاعل مفعول فعل فاعل فعل فاعل

جملة فعلية جملة فعلية جملة فعلية

241

Introduction of 4th part of Unit No.08 The 4th part of this unit is about the verbal sentence ( الجملة الفعلية). It involves sentences

that start with verbs indicating past, present, future, imperative or negative. If the verb is

transitive ( ى د ع ت ـم ) then verbal sentence comprises verb, subject and object. If the verb is

intransitive ( لازم) then it contains only the verb and the subject.

Objectives of 4th part of Unit No.08 After studying this 4th part of unit no 08 you will achieve the following objectives and

Insha’Allah you will be able:

1. to define the verbal sentence ( الجملة الفعلية). 2. to define the verb ( الفعل), subject ( ل الفاع ) and the object ( المفعول). 3. to know that every فاعل (subject) is مرفـوع and every مفعول (object) is منصوب.

4. to know that when a word ( فاعل or مفعول) is attached with “ ال” then one of the two

dhammahs (tanween) is dropped.

5. to know that when a word ( فاعل or مفعول) is without “ ال” then it will take کسر6ن /فتحتان(dual dhammah).

6. to know about the two types of verbal sentence: with and without object ( بمفعول و بغير .(مفعول

7. to change the Past Tense to either Present or Future Tense and vice versa.

8. to make verbal sentences from every bab of the six groups of triliteral verbs ( ابـواب الفعل .(المجرد الثلاثى

9. to know about the agreement of the subject and the object ( مطابـقة الفاعل و المفعول).

242

� � � �الجملة الفعلية ��The Verbal Sentence

ى، والمضارع والأمر، مثلا: اض م ال الجملة الفعلية هى الجملة التى تـبدأ بفعل ما من :تـعريف الجملة الفعلية فـعل، يـفعل، افـعل.

Definition of the Verbal Sentence

A verbal sentence begins with verb indicating the Past, Present, Future and Imperative,

e.g., فـعل (he did), يـفعل (he does), افـعل (do).

(Parts of a Verbal Sentence) أجزاء الجملة الفعلية

There are three parts of a verbal sentence: فـعل (verb), فاعل (subject) and مفعول (object)86.

(Definition of a Verb) تـعريف الفعل .1

A verb is a word ( كلمة) that indicates an action associated with past present and future.

For example: He beated, he beats, he will beat, beat, don’t beat,

ستـقبل، مثلا: ضر ب، يضرب، سيضرب، الفعل كلمة تدل على عمل واقع فى الزمن الماضى أو الحاضر أو الم

اضرب، لا تضرب. (Subject) الفاعل .2

(Definition of Subject) تـعريف الفاعل

له فعله الفاعل: ۔ _و ما وقع الفعل من\ و حکم\ الرفع هو الإسم المرفـوع المذكور قـبـ

or (dhammah) ضمة that takes a ,المرفـوع which is (اسم ) is an ism (the doer, subject) الفاعل

تان .(verb) فعل on the last letter and mentioned before its (tanween) ضم

For every action there is a doer or the one of the action is called الفاعل (al-faa’il), e.g.,

ض ما فعل is ذهب ,In this example .(Hamid went to the mosque) ذهب حامد إلى المسجد ,

.”مجرور بحرف جر “ is المسجد and حرف جر is إلى ,فاعل مرفـوع is حامد

Note: الفاعل is not always apparent after the verb ذهب. This is because in the past tense if الفاعلis not apparent then the ضمير (pronoun) هو (he) will be الفاعل. And this ضمير (dhamir) is

known as الضمير المستتر (the hidden dhammir). e.g. محمد أين (where is Muhammad?) خرج .(He left the mosque) من المسجد

86 In other words we can say that a verbal sentence consists of a verb ( فـعل), subject ( فاعل) and object ( مفعول).

243

(The Object) المفعول به .3

منصوب يـقع عليه فعل الفاعل، مثلا: كتب محمد رسالة.اسم : به تـعريف المفعول Definition of Object

به المفعول (the object) is a noun (or a pronoun) which is منصوب, and which describes the

person or thing that is being affected by the action of a verb. المفعول takes واحدة فـتحة (one

fathah ـ) or فـتحتان (fathahtaan ـ) on the last letter, for example:

د الرسالة .Muhammad wrote the letter كتب محم

كتب محمد رسالة Muhammad wrote a letter.

يد كتا[ قـرأ حم Hameed read a book.

قـرأت عزيـزة الكتاب Aziza read the book.

Note: When a word is attached with “ ال”, one of two fathah (ـ) is dropped. For example, as

shown in the above sentences, رسالة has double fathah ( فـتحتان), whereas الرسالة has one

fathah ( فـتحة). Similarly ]كتا has double fathah فـتحتان, whereas الكتاب has only one fathah

.(فـتحة )ملة الفعلية أشكال الج (Types of the Verbal Sentence)

There are two types of a verbal sentence: without مفعول and with مفعول.

الجملة الفعلية بدون مفعول .1 (The verbal Sentence Without مفعول (Object))

This type of verbal sentence is for verbs as known as: لازمالفعل ال (The Transitive Verb).

It is a verb which does not need an object ( مفعول). For example:

د .Muhammad went ذهب محم

.The student stood قام الطالب

.The women went ذهبت النساء

.The men sat down جلس الرجال

.The child laughed ضحك الطفل

.The student entered دخل الطالب

.The man forbears/ endures صبر الرجل

.The student returned back رجع الطالب

244

الفعلية بمفعول الجملة .2 (The Verbal Noun with مفعول (Object))

This type of verbal sentence is for verbs as known: تـعدیالفعلالم (the intransitive verb). It

is a verb which needs an object ( مفعول), e.g., الكتاب قرأ الطالب (The student read the book).

Example of الجملة الفعلية from the six groups of triliteral verb:

Examples from Bab: فـتح يـفتح

.The student opened the door فـتح الطالب الباب.

د بشيرا. .Muhammad beated Bashir ضرب محم

.(صلى الله عليه وسلم) Allah sent Muhammad بـعث الله محمدا صلى الله عليه وسلم.

.Allah made the earth جعل الله الأرض.

.The hypocrite deceived the Muslim خدع المنافق المسلم.

.The carpenter made the chair صنع النجار الكرسى.

.The teacher stopped the student منع الأستاذ الطالب.

.)حول هذه الجمل من الماضى إلى المضارع (خمسة فـقط س: Convert these sentences from the past to the aorist (five only), e.g.

الأرض يجعل الله Allah makes the earth.

جعل الله الأرض Allah made the earth.

Examples of (فـعل + فاعل + مفعول ) جملة فعلية from Bab نصر يـنصر .Allah helps the slaves يـنصر الله العباد.

.Allah creates the people يخلق الله الناس.

.The thief enters the house يدخل اللص البـيت.

) Muhammad remembers Allah يذكر محمد الله . ◌ سبحانه و تعالى ).

.sustains the creature (سبحانه و تعالى) Allah يـرزق الله المخلوق.

.Muhammad prostrates to Allah يسجد محمد الله .

.The people are grateful to the people يشكر الناس الناس.

.We worship Allah نـعبد الله .

.The disbeliever refuses Islam يكفر الكافر الإسلام

.We look at the things نـنظر الأشياء

245

حول هذه الجمل من المضارع إلى الماضى. س.Q: Change these (ten) sentences from the Present Tense to the Past Tense.

Examples of جملة فعلية from Bab ضرب يضرب

.Rashid beated Nazir ضرب رشيد نذيـرا

الله مثلا ضرب Allah ( ی سبحانه و تعال ) gave example.

.The man carriers the bag يحمل الرجل الحقيبة

.The police man was unjust to the people ظلم الشرطى الناس

) Allah يـغفر الله الإثم ی سبحانه و تعال ) forgives the sin.

.The worker earns the money يكسب العامل الفلوس

.stamped the hearts (سبحانه و تعالى) Allah ختم الله القلوب

.The child threw the stone نـبذ الطفل الحجر

الماضى ومن الماضى إلى المضارع.غير الجمل من المضارع إلى س.Q: Change the above sentences from past to Present and from Present to past.

Examples of جملة فعلية from Bab ع يسمع سم

عت الصوت .I heard the voice سم

كثيرا حزنت الخبر I am grieved the news very much.

.The man thinks about the wealth يحسب الرجل عن الثروة التاجر

.The trader (merchant) lost in the business خسر فى التجارة

.The doctor mercies the patient يـرحم الطبيب المريض

.I testified that he is a Muslim شهدت ïنه مسلم

.I knew the truth علمت الحق

.The worker does the work يـعمل العامل العمل

.The Muslims do good deeds يـعمل المسلمون الصالحات

تـعالى نحمد الله We praise Allah ( ◌ سبحانه و تعالى ).

.The child drink the milk يشرب الطفل اللبن

.The teacher is angry with the pupil يـغضب الأستاذ التلميذ

246

1. Change all these sentences into the imperative mood, e.g., الصوت، سمعت الصوت اسمع . 2. Change all of the above mentioned verbal sentences into nominal sentences.

Some more Examples from Al-Quran:

ôM£ϑ s? àMyϑ Î= x. š�În/u‘ The fair promise of thy Lord was fulfilled (7:137).

$uΖø. t�≈t/ $pκ�Ïù šÏϑ n=≈ yè ù=Ï9 We have blessed for the nations (21:71).

ö/ä3 n=yè y_ He has made you (35:39).

Ÿ≅y™ ö‘r& yx≈tƒ Ìh�9$# He sends the winds (35:9).

(#ρã� ä. øŒ$# |M yϑ ÷èÏΡ «! $# ö/ä3 ø‹ n= tæ Remember the Grace of Allah upon you (35:3).

!$‾Ρ Î) çµ≈oΨ ø9t“Ρr& ’Îû Ï' s# ø‹ s9 Í‘ô‰s) ø9$# Verily! We have sent it (this Quran) down in the Night of Al-Qadr (Decree) (97:1).

7tΡθ è=t↔ ó¡ o„ Ç tã Ïπ tã$¡¡9$# They ask you (O Muhammad صلى الله عليه وسلم) about the Hour (the day of judgment) (79:42).

ö≅è% èŒθ ããr& Éb>t� Î/ Ä¨$Ψ9$# Say: I seek refuge with (Allah) the Lord of mankind (114:1).

4 |Âyèsù ãβöθ tãö� Ïù tΑθ ß™§�9$# But Fir’aun (pharaon) disobeyed the messenger (Moses) (73:16).

â¨ Èθó™ uθ ãƒ †Îû Í‘ρ ß‰ß¹ ÄZ$Ψ9$# Who whispers in the hearts of mankind (114:5).

الفاعل مطابقة الفعل و (Agreement of the Subject and the Object)

الفعل مفرد والفاعل مثنى أو جمع، مثلا: 1ذهب الولدان والأولاد

The verb is singular and the subject is dual and plural, e.g.: The two sons and all sons went.

الفعل مفرد والفاعل مذكر فيه علامة 6نيث 2وهى "ة" المربـوطة، مثلا:ذهب طلحة

The verb is singular and the subject is masculine and in it there is a sign

of feminine “ة”, e.g., Tahah went.

نـهما واؤ 3 الفعل مفرد والفاعل اثنان و بـيـالعاطفة لاجتـناب عن تكرار الفعل، مثلا:

د و بشير ذهب محم

There is one verb and there are two subjects. To avoid from the repetition of the same verb a waw

Atifa is put between both ”و“

subjects, e.g., Muhammad and Bashir went.

الفعل مؤنث و علامة التانيت هى "ت" والفاعل مونث 4حقيقى، مثلا:ذهبت هند

The verb is feminine the sign of

feminine is the “ت” and the subject

is feminine e.g: Hind went.

التالى يجوز ëنيث الفعل فى .5 (Use of feminine verb is permissible as follow):

247

The sons and daughters came. Here, the .جاء و جاءت البـنـون والبـنات.الفعل هنا جمع سالم 5.1verb is masculine and feminine 3rd person singular and the subject is sound plural.

The men come. Here the verb is جاء و جاءت الرجال، الفاعل هنا جمع تكسير 5.2masculine and feminine 3rd person singular and the subject is broken plural.

جمع جاء و جاءت النساء. الفاعل هنا: اسم 5.3 The women came. Here the verb is masculine and feminine 3rd person singular but the subject is plural noun.

The sun rise: Here, the verb is طلع و طلعت الشمس: الفاعل هنا: مؤنث مجازى 5.4masculine and feminine 3rd person singular and the subject is formal feminine.

Some Rules As stated in the beginning of this unit, in Arabic the subject ( الفاعل) is in nominative case

) and the object (مرفـوع ) به المفعول ) is in accusative case ( منصوب).

تلميذه المدرس سأل .1 (The teacher asked his pupil).

In this example, the object ( به المفعول ) is تلميذه. The attached pronoun is not part of تلميذbut it relates to the teacher means “his pupil”. تلميذ is مضاف (determined noun) and “ ه”

is إليه مضاف (the determining noun). So تلميذه is a relative phrase ( اضافى مركب ).

وتك ص سمعت .2 (I heard your voice).

Here ت +سمع is verb + object (I heard). صوت is the object ( مفعول) and ك is a possessive

pronoun ( الملكية ضمير ) mean “your voice” is a relative phrase ( اضافى مركب ).

3. Attached pronoun as به مفعول : Attached can be an object ( به مفعول ), e.g.

د لقى سأله و حميدا محم (Muhammad met Hameed and asked him). Here لقى is verb محمد(Muhammad) is subject ( مرفـوع فاعل ), and يدا is object (Hameed) حم

( منصوب مفعول ). And in the second sentence سأل is verb and the attached pronoun “ ه” is

the object ( المفعول). 4. For (the purpose of) emphasizing or focusing the subject ( الفاعل) or the object ( المفعول),

sometimes المفعول comes after the verbs with the type (form) of attached pronoun ( ضمير

ل الفاع and (متصل (the subject) comes after المفعول (the object), for example:

248

(i) ئب أكله لئن قالوا الذ (They said: if a wolf devours him). (12:14)

In this Ayah أكل is a verb ( فعل), “متصل ضمير ”ه is the object ( المفعول) which follows the

verb اكل in the shape of متصل ضمير ئب and ,”ه“ ) (الفاعل ) is the subject الذ المرفـوع الفاعل )

which is after the object ( به مفعول ). So, in this Quranic verse, the sequence is: فعل (verb)

ول مفع + (object) + فعلية جملة = فاعل (verbal sentence). And the stress is on the object “ه”

which refers to Yaqub السلام عليه .

(ii). الموت يـعقوب حضر اذا (When death approached Yaqub السلام عليه ) (2:133).

In this verse, حضر is verb, يـعقوب is منصوب مفعول , and الموت is مرفـوع فاعل . The object

) in the form of a proper noun حضر comes, after the verb يـعقوب علم اسم ) and the subject

which is (المفعول ) The stress is again on the object .يـعقوب follows the object that is الموت

Yaqub السلام عليه . المفعول قـبل الفعل و الفاعل .5 (The object is before the verb and the subject):

In Arabic, sometimes the object ( المفعول) precedes the verb ( الفعل) and the subject ( الفاعل),

for example:

ك نستعين ك نـعبد وإ\ You (Allah alone) we worship and you (alone) we ask for help (for] إ\

everything)] (1:34).

Here, in both places, ك is verb and hidden pronoun for 1st نـعبد ,(الم فعول ) is the object ا\

person ( الضمير المستر لجمع متكلم), i.e., نحن is the subject ( الفاعل).

ية تحويل الجمل الفعلية إلى الجمل الإسمChange of Verbal Sentences into Nominal Sentences

Nominal Sentence ( ية (الجمل الفعلية ) Verbal Sentence (الجمل الإسمالمدرس كتب الدرس

The teacher wrote the lesson.

كتب المدرس الدرس The teacher wrote the lesson.

الطالبان ذهباTwo students went.

ذهب الطالبان Two students went.

المسلمون قـتـلوا الكافرين The Muslims killed the nonbelievers.

المسلمون الكافرين قـتل The Muslims killed the nonbelievers.

المدرسون يـنصرون الطلاب The teachers help the students.

يـنصر المدرسون الطلاب The teachers help the students.

249

المرأة أكلت التـفاحة The women ate the apple.

أكلت المرأة التـفاحة The women ate the apple.

تان رج من الجامعة تاع البـنـThe two daughters returned from the university.

تان من الجامعة رجعت البـنـThe two daughters returned from the university.

الطالبات كتبن الدرس The students wrote the lesson.

كتـبت الطالبات الدرس The students wrote the lesson.

الولد رجع إلى البـيت The boy returned to the house.

رجع الولد إلى البـيت The boy returned to the house.

الطالبان رجعا إلى البـيت The two students returned to the house.

رجع الطالبان إلى البـيت The two students returned to the house.

الطلاب رجعوا الى الجامعة The students returned to the university.

رجع الطلاب الى الجامعة The students returned to the university.

(The Agreement of the Verb With the Subject) مطابـقة الفعل @لفاعل

1. If a verb comes before a subject, it is a third person masculine singular

( غائب كر مذ واحد ), the subject may be singular or dual as plural. The verb will however

agree in gender ( جنس), for example.

صيغ فعل + فاعل فعل + فاعلان فعل + فاعلون ذهب المدرسون

The all (f) teachers went

ذهب المدرسان The both (m) teachers went

المدرس ذهب The teacher went

مذكر غائب 3rd person m.

ذهبت المدرسات The all (f) teachers went

تان ذهبت المدرس The both (m) teachers went

ذهبت المدرسة The teacher went

مونث غائب 3rd person f.

2. If the subject is a broken plural other than human being, the verb is a third person feminine

singular ( واحد مؤنث غائب), for example.

(i) جاءت الجمال (The camels came).

(ii) ذهبت النوق (The she-camels went).

3. If the subject is a broken plural of the human being, the verb of any gender can be used,for example.

(i) or قال الرجال قالت الرجال (The men said).

(ii) or قال نسوة نسوة ت قال (The women said).

Similar is the case with a subject which is a collective noun, e.g., حضر القوم or حضرت.or (The people were present) القوم

4. When a subject precodes its verb, both the subject and the verb agrees with each other in

gender and in number, for example.

250

صيغ فعل + فاعل فعل + فاعلان فعل + فاعلون المدرسون ذهبـوا

All the teachers went.

المدرسان ذهباBoth the teachers went.

المدرس ذهب The male teacher went.

مذكر m.

المدرسات ذهبن All the teachers went.

المدرستان ذهبـتاBoth the teachers went.

المدرسة ذهبت The lady teacher went.

مونث f.

جاء القوم وذهبـوا .5 (The people came and went away). In this example, there are two verbs

having one subject, therefore, the difference of verb in number is correct in usage.

Summary of the Verbal Sentence

The sentence which starts with a verb is called جملة فعلية (verbal sentence). The parts of

such types of sentences are الفاعل ,الفعل and به المفعول , where الفاعل is the person / thing

that does the action. الفعل is the action itself, and المفعول is the thing/ person upon which

the action is happening, e.g.

الرسالة كتب أحمد . In this sentence, كتب is the action (verb), أحمد is the person who did the

action, and the letter is the thing that is being written به المفعول . And (اعراب ) حركة in such

sentences must be included: the types of tenses (past, present, future or imperative) and

the حركة of the last letter of each word.

(i) الفاعل (the subject) is always ة [لض مرفـوع م .

(ii) الفعل (the verb) depends on the type of the verb: األماضى مبنى على الفتحة and فـوع مر المضارعة .[لضم

(iii) المفعول به (the object) is always منصوب [لفتحة . In the above mentioned sentence the

action فعل is كتب. It is a Past Tense, so its حركة is فـتحة (fatha) فاعل (subject) is أحمد, so its

is being written by Ahmad. So it is the object (الرسالة ) The letter .(dhammah) ضمة is حركة

( به المفعول ) upon which the action is happening, hence, the حركة on it is فـتحة (fathah).

In conclusion, the اعراب of this sentence is as follows:

كتب: فعل ماض مبنى على الفتح. .1ة الظاهرة .2 عه الضم آخره.فی أحمد: فاعل مرفـوع و علامة رفـ آخره. فیالرسالة: مفعول به منصوب وعلامة نصبه الفتحة الظاهرة .3

251

QUESTIONS

ةسئل


سئل

جب e الا :ا

الأمر ـ فعل عرف ۔1

ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم الأمر فعل صيغ استعمال فيـها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔2تـرجمها ، ثم رم الك و الحساب و النصر و السمع و الضرب و الفتح و ل ع ف ل "ا صدر فعل الأمر من م غ صي اكتب ۔3

ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم ، القول والكون " مصدر من الأمر فعل صيغ اكتب ۔4 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم المفيدة الجمل في " قل " استخدم ۔5ب: من النـهى فـعل صيغ اكتب ۔6 يحسب حسب ، يسمع سمع ، يـنصر نصر ، يضرب ضرب ، يـفتح فـتح [

زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم يكرم كرم ،ـزية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم هى النـ ها فعل في ـ التي آنية القر الآ\ت اكتب ۔7ها التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ۔8 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم النافية و"لا" الناهية "لا" استخدام فيـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم "ل ع ف ل "ا :صدر مفعول من م ال واسم الفاعل اسم صيغ اكتب ۔9

الفاعل ـ اسم عرف ۔10 ـزية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم الفاعل استخدام اسم فيـها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔11ع يـفتح ح فـت :الفاعل من [ب سم ا غ ها صي في ـ التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ۔12 ، ضرب يضرب ، نصر يـنصر ، سم

ـزية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم يسمع ، حسب يحسب اسم المفعول ـ عرف ۔13 ـزية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم الفعل""مصدر: من المفعول اسم صيغ اكتب ۔14، ضرب يضرب ، نصر يـفتح ح فـت :المفعول من [ب سم صيغ ا ستخدام ها ا في ـ التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ۔15

ع يسمع ثم زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها يـنصر ، سمية ز لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها المفعول ثم سم ا غ صي تعمال اس فيـها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔16ـ الفعلية الجملة عرف ۔17

252

؟ الفعلية الجملة أجزاء هى ما ۔18 ـ به والمفعول والفاعل الفعل عرف ۔19 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم به والمفعول والفاعل الفعل على تحتوى التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ۔20 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم فـقط والفاعل الفعل على تشتمل التي المفيدة الجمل اكتب ۔21 ـزية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم يسمع سمع ، يـنصر نصر ، يـفتح فـتح [ب: من الفعلية الجمل اكتب ۔22ها التي الجمل اكتب ۔23 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم والفاعل الفعل مطابـقة فيـية مل الج اكتب ۔24 ها ثم الاسم زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة وتـرجمها إلى الجمل الفعلية غيرها التي الجمل اكتب ۔25 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم [لفاعل الفعل مطابـقة فيـ

253

وحدۃ

الحروف التاسعة : ال

Unit No.09:The Letters

الحروف القمرية ۔9.1The Lunar Letters

والحروف الشمسية ۔9.2The Solar Letters

الجارة روف لح ا ۔9.3The Preposition Letters

العربية غير الحروف الجارة (الحروف)الألفاظ ۔9.4The Arabic Words other than the Preposition

تة @لفعل ۔9.5 الحروف المشبـهة السThe Six Particles Similar to a Verb

ستفهام ادوات ۔9.6 الإThe Interrogative

�مید خان عبا�� إعداد: الأستاذ الدکتور � عبد ا

�ق مراجع: الأستاذ الدکتور � سمیع ا


254

روف

الحThe Letters

)3 ( )2 ( )1 (

الحروف الجارة

The Prepositions

منذ، مذ، (ب، ت، ك، ل، و،

، خاشا، من عدا، فى ، خلا، رب

، الى) 17= عن، على، حتى

الشمسية الحروف

(The Solar Letters)

س، ش، (ت، ث، د، ذ، ر، ز،

ص، ض، ط، ظ، ل، ن)= 14

الحروف القمرية

(The Lunar Letters)

(الف، ب، ج، ح، خ، ع، غ،

ف، ق، ك، م، و، ه، ى)= 14

255

Introduction to 1st part of Unit No.09 This 1st part of unit concentrates on prepositions ( الحروف الجارة). There are seventeen

Prepositions:

،[ؤ، 6ؤ، كافو، لامو، واؤ، منذ، مذ، خلا ، إلى تى ى، ح ل ، ع ن ، ع ا، فى د ا، من، ع اش ، ح ب ر

However in this unit, only eleven (11) prepositions ( حروف جر) that are commonly used

in Arabic Language will be explained.

ل .4 ك .3ت .2ب .1 عن .8 فى .7 من .6 و.5 إلى .12 حتى .10 على .9

Rules of Using the Preposition

1. They are used as connectors.

2. When they are used with a proper noun, then a double kasrah ( ---- ) is placed on the

last letter of the word (or a single kasra, ـ in case ال is attached with it), e.g., كرجل (like

a man) and كالرجل (like the man).


After studying this 1st part of unit No.09 one will be able:

1. to describe the 17 Arabic Preposition ( حروف جر) in the form of شعر (couplet).

2. to present the example of above mentioned eleven prepositions ( حروف جر) from Al-

Quran Al-Hakeem.

3. to use them with attached pronouns.


256

��

مسية

الش

روف

والح

قمرية ال

روف

ا و الح

لح

روف

الجارة

The Lunar and the Solar Letters and the Preposition

(The Lunar and the Solar Letters) الحروف القمرية والحروف الشمسية _9.1-2

In Arabic language, there are only 28 letters. 14 letters are called حروف شمسية (solar

letters), and the other 14 are called حروف قمرية (lunar letters).

Rules relating to the Solar and Lunar letters:

1. In order to pronounce the solar letters, the tip of the tongue is involved as in t, n, r, s, etc.

The tip of the tongue does not play any part for the pronunciation of the lunar letters as

in b, w, m, k, etc.

2. For the lunar letters, the lam (ل) of ال (al) is pronounced, e.g., لقمر ا (al-qammaru).

However for the solar letters the ل (lam) of ال (al) is assimilated (joined) to the first letter

of the noun after ال (al), e.g., al-shams (the sun) is pronounced ash-shamsu.

3. No change takes place in writing الشمس. The assimilation is indicated by the شد (shadda)

on the first letter of the noun after ل ا (al).

Note: In a connected speech, the vowel of the article is replaced by the final vowel of the

preceding word, e.g., we read الكتاب after هذا (haza - this), which would be read as هذا

.(hazal kitabu - this book) الكتاب

The table below covers each letter in the Arabic alphabet along with an example of a

word which starts with that particular relatively letter depending on whether it is a solar

or lunar letter:

الشمسية الحروف .1 1. The Sun Letters

2. الحروف القمرية 2. The Moon letters

The trader ت: التاجر The father/ mother أ: الأب/ الأم The cloth ث: الثـوب The door ب: الباب The house ار ج: الجنة The garden/heaven د: الدThe gold ذ: الذهب The donkey ح: ألحمار The man ر: الرجل The bread خ: الخبـز The flower ز: الزهرة The eye ع: العين

257

The fish س: السمك The lunch غ: الغداء The sun ش: الشمس The mouth ف: الفم The chest ص: الصدر The moon ق: القمر The guest ض: الضيف The dog ك: الكلب The student ط: الطالب The water م: الماء The injustice ظ: الظلم The boy و: الولد The meat ل: اللحم The air ه: الهداء The star ن: النجم The hand ى: اليد

9.3

الح

روف(The Prepositions) الجارة

ة ل م الج فى ر لج ا ف و ر ح ل م ع (Function of Preposition in a Sentence)

الزمن و حروف ى تدل حروف الجر على العلاقة بين الفاعل و المفعول به ويـوجد أيضا حروف جر دالة عل جر دالة على المكان.

A preposition shows the relation between the subject and the object. There are also

prepositions of time and prepositions of place.

(Number of the Propositions) عدد حروف الجر

There are seventeen prepositions ( حروف جر) in the Arabic Language:

،رب، حاشا، من، عدا، فى، عن، على، حتى، إلىواؤ، منذ، مذ، خلا [ؤ، 6ؤ، كافو، لامو، و ر فى الجمل الج دام حروف خ است (Use of Prepositions in Sentences)

The following prepositions ( حروف جر) are in common usage:

ب .1 (with, of, in, during, to): This letter is used 1262 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, e.g.,

¨β Î) tÏ% ©!$# šχρã� à� õ3tƒ ÏM≈tƒ$t↔ Î/ «!$# As to those who deny the signs of Allah (3:21).

$yϑ ‾ΡÎ) ß ÏΒ÷σ ãƒ $uΖ ÏG≈tƒ$t↔ Î/ Only those who believe in Our signs (32:15).

tΒ ß ÏΒ÷σ ãƒ $uΖ ÏG≈tƒ$t↔Î/ Ν ßγsù tβθ ßϑÎ= ó¡•Β Who believe in Our signs and submit (their wills in Islam) (30: 53).

Ÿωuρ (#θ Ý¡ Î6ù= s? �Yysø9$# È≅ÏÜ≈t7 ø9 $$Î/ And cover not truth with falsehood (2:42).

ö≅ è% èŒθ ããr& Éb>t� Î/ Ä¨$Ψ9 $# Say: I seek refuge with the Lord of mankind (114:1).

258

zzÏΒ uρ È≅ø‹ ©9 $# ô‰ ¤fyγtF sù . . . ÏµÎ/ And from (part of) the night, pray … (17:79).

$yδθè=äz ÷Š$# AΟ≈n= |¡Î0 t ÏΖÏΒ#u Enter it in peace, safe (and secure) (15:46).

$oΨö; tF x.uρ öΝÍκ ö�n= tã !$ pκ�Ïù ¨βr& }§ ø�Ζ9$# Ä§ ø�Ζ9$$Î/š ÷yèø9 $#uρ È ÷yèø9 $$Î/ y#ΡF{$# uρ É#ΡF{ $$ Î/

šχ èŒW{ $# uρ ÈβèŒW{ $$ Î/ £Åb¡9 $#uρ ÇdÅb¡9$$Î/

We ordained therein for them: Life for life, eye for eye,

nose for nose, ear for ear, tooth for tooth (5:45).

Use of ب (bi) with attached Pronouns:

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

Ë مWith (all of) them

Ëما With (both of) them

به With him


Ë ن With(all of) them

Ëما With (both of) them

Ëا With her


كم ب With(all of) you

كماب With (both of) you

ك ب With you


كن ب With(all of) you

كماب With (both of) you

ك ب With you


ناب With(all of) us

ناب With (both of) us

بى With me


Use of “ ب” in Sentences of Daily Usage:

أV أكتب [لقلم I write / am writing/ will write with a pen.

نذوق [للسان We taste with tongue.

هو يضربه [ليد He beats him with (his) hand.

ين هی تـقطع اللحم [لسك She cuts the meat with a knife.

هات بى Come with me.

نـنظر [لعين We see with (our) eyes.

هل أنت تكتبين [لمرسم Are you writing with a pencil? OR Will you write with a pencil?

:It is used for oath only, for example :(ta) ت .2

And by Allah, I have a plan for your idols (I will surely act against your idols) (21:57).

259

«! $$s? uρ ¨β y‰‹ Å2V{ / ä3yϑ≈uΖ ô¹r& See Al-Quran Al-Hakeem: (12:73, 85, 91, 95 + 16:56, 63 + 26:97 + 37:56).

:for example ,(as, like) ك .3

ã≅yè ôfuΖsùr& tÏΗ Í>ó¡çRùQ $# t ÏΒÌ�ôf çRùQ $%x. Shall we then treat the Muslims (people of faith) like the Mujrimeen (people of sin)? (68:35).

āχ Î)uρ $�Β öθtƒ y‰Ψ Ïã y7În/ u‘ É#ø9r( x. Verily a day in the sight of your Lord is like a thousands years. (22:47)

È≅≈ sVøΒ r(x. Çυä9 ÷σp=9$# ÈβθãΖõ3 yϑø9 $# Like unto pearls well-guarded. (56:23)

u !$|¡ÏΨ≈tƒ Äc É<Ζ9$# ¨ä ó¡s9 7‰tnr'Ÿ2 z ÏiΒ Ï !$|¡ÏiΨ9$# O wives of the Prophet (صلى الله عليه وسلم)! You are not like any other woman. (33:32)

y7Í× ‾≈ s9'ρ é& ÉΟ≈yè÷ΡF{ $% x. They are like cattle. (7:179)

Use of ك with Attached Pronouns

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

م كمثله Like (all of) them

ماكمثله Like (both of) them

كمثله Like him


ن كمثله Like (all of) them

ماكمثله Like (both of) them

اكمثله Like her


كم كمثل Like (all of) you

كماكمثل Like (both of) you

ك كمثل Like you


كن كمثل Like (all of) you

كماكمثل Like (both of) you

ك كمثل Like you


ناكمثل Like (all of) us

ان كمثل Like (both of) us

ى كمثل Like me


Use of “ ك” in Sentences of Daily Usage:

الشجاعة أنت كالأسد فى You are like the lion in bravery.

.They are like us in the worship هم كمثلنا فى العبادة

.Rashidah is like Nasirah in the habits رشيدة كالناصرة فى العادات

.O my teacher! I want to be like you \ استاذى! اريد أن اكون كمثلك

.Be like the traveler in this world كن كمثل المسافر فى هذه الدنـيا

260

:For example .(to, for, let) ل .4

‰ôϑ ys ø9$# ¬! Å_Uu‘ šÏϑn=≈ yèø9$# Praise to Allah the sustainer of the worlds (1:1)

“W‰èδ zŠ É)−F ßϑù= Ïj9 Guidance for those who fear Allah (2:2).

£èδθà) Ïk=sÜ sù �∅ÍκÌE £‰ÏèÏ9 Divorce them at their prescribed period (65:1).

øŒÎ) tΑ$s% y7•/u‘ Ïπ s3 Í× ‾≈n= yϑù=Ï9 Behold (remember) when your Lord said to the angels (38:71).

øŒ Î)uρ tΑ$s% ß≈yϑø) ä9 Ïµ ÏΖö/ eω Behold, when Luqman said to his son (31:13).

Use of ل" " with Attached Pronouns

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لهم For (all of) them

لهماFor (both of) them

له For him


3rd person m.

لهن For (all of) them

لهماFor (both of) them

اله For her


لكم For (all of) you

لكماFor (both of) you

لك For you


لكن For (all of) you

لكماFor (both of) you

ك ل For you


لناFor (all of) us

لناFor (both of) us

لى For me


Use of “ ل” in Sentences of Daily Usage:

.This house is for him OR this house belongs to him هذا البـيت له‘

بة لها .This bag is for her OR This bag belongs to her هذه الحقيـ

.His car is for me سيارته لى

بطريقة سهلة هذا مهم للأستاذ أن يدرس It is essential for the teacher to teach in an easy method.

.There are five books for me هناك خمسة كتب لى

:6844 times in Al-Quran. For example (and, oath) و .5

È ÏnG9$#uρ Èβθ çG ÷ƒ“9$# uρ By the fig and the olive (95:1).

261

و العصر By the time (103:1).

7‰ Ïδ$x©uρ 7Šθåκ ô¶tΒuρ By one that witnesses and the subject of the witness (85:3).

Use of “ و” in Sentences of Daily Usage “ ل م الج "واؤ" فى ام د خ ت س ا ”

الأقلامأV اشتريت الكتب و I bought the books and the pens.

لا أريد أن اذهب هناك والله By Allah, I do not like to go there.

.By Allah I don’t like the hypocrites والله لا أحب المنافقين

This preposition :(From, of, because of, among, during, any, according to, instead of, than) من .6

is used 1207 times in Al-Quran. For example:

ÏΒuρ ÏN≡t� yϑrO È≅‹ Ï‚ ¨Ζ9$# And from the fruit of the date-palm. (16:67)

zÏΒ uρ È≅Î/ M}$# È ÷ uΖøO $# Of camels a pair. (6:144)

ÏΒuρ Ïµ ÏG yϑôm §‘ Ÿ≅yèy_ â/ä3 s9 Ÿ≅ø‹ ©9$# u‘$yγΨ9$#uρ It is because (out) of his Mercy that He has made for you night and day. (28:73)

ôÏΒ uρ È≅÷δr& É=≈tGÅ3 ø9$# Among the people of the book. (3:75)

z ÏΒuρ È≅ø‹ ©9$# çµós Îm7|¡ sù And during a part of the night (also), glorify Him. (50:40)

$tΒ uρ ô ÏΒ >µ≈ s9Î) āωÎ) ª!$# And there is no other god except Allah. (3:62)

£ èδθãΖ Å3 ó™ r& ôÏΒ ß] ø‹ ym Ο çGΨs3 y™ ÏiΒ öΝ ä. Ï‰÷ ãρ Lodge them (the divorced women) where you dwell, according to your means. (65:6)

ΟçF� ÅÊ u‘r& Íο4θ u‹ ysø9 $$Î/ $u‹ ÷Ρ‘‰9$# š∅ ÏΒ Íοt� ÅzFψ $# Do you prefer the life of this world instead of the hereafter. (9:38)

ä' s#ø‹s9 Í‘ô‰ s)ø9$# ×� ö� y{ ôÏiΒ É#ø9 r& 9�öκ y− The Night of Al-Qadr (Decree) is better than a thousand month. (97:3)

Use of من with Attached Pronouns

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم من ـFrom (all of) them

همامن ـ From (both of) them

ه من From him


هن من ـ From (all of) them

همامن ـ From (both of) them

اه من ـ From her


كم من From (all of) you

كمامن From (both of) you

ك من From you


262

كن من From (all of) you

كمامن From (both of) you

ك من From you


ان م From (all of) us

ان م From (both of) us

منى From me


Note: من is some times used to complete the sense of قـبل (before) and بـعد (after). In this case the

words قـبل and بـعد become مبنى على الضمة (indeclinable), i.e., قـبل and بـعد, e.g.

¬! ã�øΒ F{$# ÏΒ ã≅ ö6s% . ÏΒ uρ ß‰ ÷è t/(With Allah is the decision in the past and in the future) (30:4).

This Kind of “ “ However, if .من ”is called an “additional ” ن م come in a بـعد and ” قـبل

sentence as اف ض م (annexed) then they are “ :for example ,(in genitive case) ” مجرور

t Ï%©! $# uρ ÏΒ öΝä3 Î= ö6 s% And those (who come) before you (2:21).

.ÏiΒ Ï‰÷è t/ öΝä3 ÏΖ≈ yϑƒ Î) After you have believed (2:109).

This preposition .(in, about, into, on, account of, respecting, with, compared, concerning) فى .7

is used 1185 times in Al-Quran, for example:

’ Îû Ν ÎγÎ/θè= è% ÖÚz÷£∆ In their hearts is a disease (2:10).

ôMs9$s% óΟßγè= ß™ â‘ ’Îûr& «!$# A7 x© Their messengers said: Is there a doubt about Allah? (14:10).

àM ÷‚x� tΡuρ ÏµŠ Ïù ÏΒ Çrρ •‘ And (I) breathed into him of My spirit (15:29).

$yϑ ‾ΡÎ) ãΝ ä39 pκ÷]tƒ ª! $# Ç tã tÏ% ©! $# öΝ ä.θè= tG≈s% ’Îû È Ïd‰9$# It is only with regard to those who fought against you on account of Deen (religion), (60:9)

$tΒ uρ äο4θ u‹ysø9 $# $u‹ ÷Ρ‘‰9$# ’ Îû Íοt� ÅzFψ $# āωÎ) Óì≈ tFtΒ But the life of this world is but little comfort in the Hereafter (13:26).

È≅è% ª!$# öΝ à6‹ÏFø� ãƒ ’Îû Ï' s#≈ n=s3 ø9$# Say: Allah gives a ruling concerning (Kalalah), i.e., One having neither descendants, nor ascendants (as heirs) (4:176).

Use of فى with Attached Pronouns

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

م فيه In (all of) them

مافيه In (both of) them

فيه In him/it


ن فيه مافيه ا فيه ب ائ غ ث ن ؤ م

263

In (all of) them In (both of) them In her/ it 3rd person f.

كم في In (all of) you

كمافي In (both of) you

ك في In you


كن في In (all of) you

كمافي In (both of) you

ك في In you


فينا In (all of) us

فينا In (both of) us

فى In me


Use of “ فى” in Sentences of Daily Usage

?What is in your pocket ماذا فى جيبك؟

ab رنظ

�قیبةا

�ا See in the class.

.The truths are in Al-Quran Al-Majid فى القرآن المجيد ق ائ ق لح ا

?Who is in the kitchen من فى المطبخ

.The driver is in the car فى السيارة ق ئ السا

.He is in the bathroom هو فى الحمام

?What is in your hand ماذا فى يدك؟

.The duster is in my hand فى يدى الممسحة

الحكيم كم سورة فى القرآن How many chapters are there in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem?

سورة مئة فى القرآن اربـعة عشر There are 114 chapters in Al-Quran.

-This preposition is used 223 times in Al-Quran Al .(about, with, from, because, of) عن .8

Hakim. For example:

tΒuρ Ü=xîö� tƒ tã Ï' ©#ÏiΒ zΟ↵Ïδ≡t� ö/Î) And who turns away from the religion of Abraham

(2:130).

š�tΡθ è=t↔ ó¡ o„ Ç tã Ï'©#Ïδ F{ $# They ask you (O Muhammad (s.a.w) about (concerning)

the new moons (2:189).

y7 tΡθè=t↔ ó¡ o„ Ç∅tã Ì�ôϑy‚ ø9$# Î� Å£÷�yϑ ø9$#uρ They ask you concerning wine and gambling (2:219).

(#ρ ‘‰ |¹ uρ tã È≅‹Î6y™ «! $# And keep off (men) from the way of Allah (4:167)

$tΒuρ šχ% x. â‘$x�øó ÏGó™ $# zΟŠÏδ≡ t� ö/Î) ÏµŠ Î/L{ āω Î)tã ;οy‰Ïãöθ ¨Β

And Abraham (عليه السلام) prayed for his father’s

forgiveness only because of a promise . . . (9:114).

264

¨β Î* sù ©! $# ; Í_xî Ç tã tÏϑ n=≈ yèø9$# All is independent of (all) creatures . . . (3:97).

s9uρ 4 yÌ ö�s? y7Ψtã ßŠθåκ u�ø9$# Ÿω uρ 3“t�≈|Á ¨Ψ9$# And never will the Jews and the Christians approve of

you (2:120).

Use of عن in Sentences of Daily Usage

ب ال ط ال ن ع اذ ت يسال الأس The teacher asks / will ask about the student.

ت عنك ل أ س I asked about you.

الجامعة لماذا تسأل عن Why you ask about the university?

عنك ابحث I am searching for you.

.I’m looking for this topic ابحث / ابحثى عن هذا الموضوع

Use of عن with Attached Pronouns

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

هم عنـAbout (all of) them

هما عنـFrom/about (both of) them

عنه From/about him


عنـهن About (all of) them

هما عنـAbout (both of) them

ها عنـAbout her


عنكم About (all of) you

عنكماAbout (both of) you

عنك About you


كن عن About (all of) you

كماعن About (both of) you

ك عن About you


عناAbout (all of) us

عناAbout (both of) us

عنى About me


لىع .9 (on, over, at, under, on, condition, to). This preposition is used 676 times in

Al-Quran Al Hakim. For example:

yìoΨóÁ çG Ï9uρ 4’ n? tã û Í_ø‹ tã And that you would be brought up under My eye (20:39).

óΟçFΖä3 sù #’ n? tã öΝ ä3Î7≈ s)ôã r& tβθÝÁÅ3Ζ s? But you used to turn back on your heels (23:66).

βr& Çyϑ Ïk= yèè? $£ϑÏΒ |M ôϑ Ïk=ãã #Y‰ ô© â‘ Moses said to him: May I follow you, on the footing that you teach me some thing of the (Higher) Truth which you have been taught (18:66).

Ÿ≅yz yŠuρ sπuΖƒÏ‰ yϑø9 $# 4’ n?tã ÈÏm 7' s#ø�xî ôÏiΒ $yγÎ= ÷δ r& And he entered the city at a time when its people were not watching (28:15).

265

’ÎoΤr& uρ öΝ ä3 çGù= āÒ sù ’n? tã tÏϑn=≈ yè ø9$# And that I preferred you to/over all others (for my message) (2:47).

ÉL©9$# ßìÎ= ©Üs? ’ n?tã Íοy‰Ï↔øùF{ $# While leaps up over/to the hearts (104:7).

Sometimes “على” is used in hostile sense, e.g., خرج عليه (He went out against him).

Use of with Attached Pronouns على

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

عليهم On (all of) them

عليهماOn (both of) them

عليه On him


عليهن On (all of) them

عليهماOn (both of) them

عليـهاOn her


عليكم On (all of) you

عليكماOn (both of) you

عليك On you


كن علي On (all of) you

كماعلي On (both of) you

ك علي On you


نا عليـOn (all of) us

نا عليـOn (both of) us

علي On me


Use of على in Sentences of Daily Usage

.The book is on the table الكتاب على المنضدة

.We walk on the Earth نحن نمشى على الأرض

.The mosques on Earth المساجد على الأرض

.The cap is on your head القلنسوة على رأسك

على العرش الله Allah is on the throne.

.Peace be upon you سلام عليكم

على كل شىء قدير الله ان Surely, Allah is possessor over all things.

This preposition is utilized 142 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, e.g .(until, till, yet) حتى .10

}‘Ïδ 4 ®L ym Æìn= ôÜtΒ Ì� ôf x� ø9$# This, until the rise of morning (97:5).

(#θ ãè−F yϑ s? 4®Lym &Ïm Enjoy (your brief day) for a little while. (51:43)

266

Ν åκ÷] ÏΒuρ ¨Β ßìÏϑ tGó¡ o„ y7 ø‹s9Î) #Lym# sŒÎ) (#θã_ t� yz ôÏΒ x8Ï‰ΨÏã

And among them are men who listen to you, but in

the end, when they go out from you . . . (47:16)

إلى .11 (to, till, towards, at, unto). This preposition is used 405 times in Al-Quran

Al-Hakeem, e.g.

Ì� ÝàΖu‹ù= sù ß≈ |¡ΡM}$# 4’ n<Î) ÏµÏΒ$yèsÛ Then, let man look at his food (80:24).

#sŒ Î)uρ (#þθ ç7 n=s)Ρ$# #’ n<Î) ÞΟ ÎγÎ= ÷δr& And when they returned to their own people (83: 31).

Ü=Î= s)Ζtƒuρ #’n< Î) Ï&Î#÷δ r& #Y‘ρç�ô£tΒ And he will turn to his people, rejoicing (84:9).

Ÿξsùr& tβρ ã�ÝàΨ tƒ ’n<Î) È≅Î/M} $# y#ø‹ Ÿ2 ôMs) Î= äz Do they not look at the camels, how they are made? (88:17).

¨β Î) 4’ n<Î) y7 În/u‘ # të ô_”�9$# Verily, to your Lord in the return (of all) (96:8).

Use of إلى in Sentences of Daily Usage

.I go/am going/ will go to the house اذهب إلى البـيت

.The students go/are going/ will go to the university الطلاب يذهبـون إلى الجامعة

.The lady professor goes/is going to the classroom الأستاذة تذهب إلى غرفة المحاضرة

الجامعة هو يذهب إلى He goes/ is going to the university.

حاضرة .The student goes/ is going to the classroom الطالبة تذهب إلى غرفة الم

.Look at her انظر إليـها

.Look at me انظر إلى

Use of إلى with attached Pronouns

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

إليهم Toward (all of) them

إليهماToward (both of) them

إليه Toward him


إليهن Toward (all of) them

إليهماToward (both of) them

ها إليـToward her


إليكم Toward (all of) you

إليكماToward (both of) you

إليك Toward you


كن إلي Toward (all of) you

كماإلي Toward (both of) you

ك إلي Toward you


نا نا إليـ م ل ك ت م إلي إليـ

267

Toward (all of) us Toward (both of) us Toward me 1st person m. & f.

In short:

ف الجر حر .1 is a letter / particle that enter upon an ism (اسم) only.

الجر ف حر .2 changes the state of the اسم (noun) to مجرور (majrur), meaning the اسم (ism)

takes Kasrah (ـ) kasrataan ( ---- ) on the last letter.

الجر ف حر .3 can have many meanings and its actual meaning couldn’t be determined until it

used in a sentence only then its exact meaning is known from the context of the sentence,

e.g., الجامعة فى الطالب (The student is in the university). In this sentence “ فى” is جر حرفand “ مجرور ”الجامعة.

There are two kinds of جر حروف (Preposition):

1. There are five attached prepositions:

i. (bi) ب ii. (ta) ت iii. (waw) و

iv. (lam) ل v. .(ka) ك

2. There are also five Separable/ detached prepositions:

i. (fi) فى ii. (un) عن iii. (min) من

iv. (ala) على v. .(ila) إلى

268

ارة ��

روف الج

غير الح

عربيةلفاظ ال

الا The Arabic Words other than The Preposition

Directional Words

(8) (7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)

، لدن، لدى ورآء أمام قـبل تحت فـوق دون عند لدىNear,

with, at Besides,

other than Over, above

Under, below

Before In-front

Behind (With) These words are used with attached

pronouns, e.g.,

(with him) لديه

(16) (15) (14) (13) (12) (11) (10) (9)

بـعد حول بين ذو اولوا صاحب مع أى (What, Who,

whom, which

With Companion Possessor Possessor Between, among

Around After

269

Introduction to 2nd part of Unit No.09

In this part of unit, Insha’Allah one will study the following words and their usage and

action in an Arabic sentence:

، لدن، لدى فـوق ,(under, below) تحت ,(before) قـبل ,(in front) أمام ,(behind) ورآء ,(with) لدى(over, above), دون (beside, other than), بـعد (after), حول (around), بين (between, among),

,what, who, whom) أى ,(with) مع ,(companion) صاحب ,(possessor) اولوا ,(possessor) ذو

which).


With the help and Taufiq of Allah ( ی سبحانه و تعال ), when one completes the study of this

2nd part of Unit No.09 one will then be able to know:

1. meanings of the directional words.

2. their function and effect in the Arabic sentence after using them.

3. their examples from the Quran and from sentences of daily usage.

270

الألفاظ العربية غير الحروف الجارة The Arabic Words other than the Preposition

(With) لدى، لدن، لدى .1

These words are used with attached pronouns as لديه (with him), لدى (with me), لديهم(with them), لدنى (with me, to me).

Usage of Theses Prepositions in Sentences:

.And it is in the original of the book with us (43:4) وانه فى أم الكتاب لديـنا

And you were not with them when they cast lots with their وما كنت لديهم اذ يـلقون اقلامهمpens. (3:44)

The Messengers fear not in my presence. (27:10) ولا يخاف لدى المرسلون

Use of لدى with Attached Pronoun

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

لديهم With them

لديهماWith them

لديه With him

مذكر غائب3rd person m.

لديهن With them

لديهماWith them

لديـهاWith her

مونث غائب3rd person f.

لديكم With you

لديكماWith you

لديك With you

مذكر حاضر2nd person m.

لديكن With you

لديكماWith you

لديك With you

مونث حاضر2nd person f.

لديـناWith us

لديـناWith us

لدى With me

متكلم1st person m. & f.

ورآء .2 (behind) 12 Times in Al-Quran

This word is used with the meaning of behind. For example:

«! $# u !#u‘ uρ öΝ Ïδ Í‘θßγàß Allah is behind their backs (2:101).

�∅ èδθè= t↔ ó¡sù ÏΒ Ï!# u‘ uρ 5>$pgÉo And when you ask (his ladies عنهما الله رضى ) for anything you

want, ask them from behind a curtain/veil? (33:53).

÷ρ r& ÏΒ Ç›!# u‘uρ A>$pg Éo Or from behind a veil (42:51).

Çyϑ sù 4xötG ö/$# u !# u‘uρ y7 Ï9≡sŒ But those who trespass beyond this (70:31).

271

.The child is behind the wall الطفل وراء الجدار

امشى وراء الناس Walk behind the people.

لا تمشى وراء الجهلاء Do not follow the footsteps of the ignorant people.

(In front) امام .3

مام امام المسجد .The imam is in front of the mosque الا

.I am standing in front of the teacher أV قائم امام الأستاذ

.Al-Quran is in front of me القرآن امامى

.We walk infront of you all نحن نمشى أمامكم

قـبل .4 (Before) - 20 Times in Al-Quran

Some examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem:

Ÿ≅ö6s% ÏµÏ?öθ tΒ Before his death (4:159).

Ÿ≅ ö6s% Ï!% tæÍρ Ïµ‹ Åzr& Before (he came to) the baggage of this brother (12:76).

Ÿ≅ö6 s% ÏπuΖ|¡ ysø9$# Before the good. (13:6)

Ÿ≅ö6s% ÏΘöθ tƒ Ïπyϑ≈ uŠÉ) ø9$# Before the Day of Judgment. (17:58)

Ÿ≅ö6s% Æíθè=èÛ Ä§ ôϑ¤±9$# Before the rising of sun. (20:130)

تحت .5 (Under, Below, Beneath) - 4 Times in Al-Quran

$ tΒuρ |MøtrB 3“u�©Y9 $# And what is under the soil. (20:6)

|Møt rB $ uΖÏΒ# y‰ø% r& Beneath our feet. (41:29)

øŒ Î) š�tΡθãèÎƒ$ t7ãƒ |M øtrB Íοt� yf ¤±9$# When they pledged allegiance to you (O Muhammad صلى الله عليه وسلم) under the tree (48:18).

$ tFtΡ% Ÿ2 |Møt rB È øy‰ö6 tã They were under two of our righteous servants. (66:10)

فـوق .6 (Over, Above) - 13 Times in Al-Quran

Some examples from Al-Quran:

β Î* sù £ ä. [ !$|¡ÎΣ s− öθsù È ÷ tG t⊥øO $# But if there be more than two women only (4:11).

s− öθsù ÍνÏŠ$ t6Ïã Over His worshippers (6:18).

272

s− öθ sù <Ù÷è t/ Above others (6:165).

s− öθsù É−$oΨôãF{ $# Above (upon) the necks (8:12).

s− öθsù É>#x‹yè ø9$# Over the punishment (16:88).

دون .7 (Besides, Other Then) - 8 Times in Al-Quran

tβρ ßŠ «!$# Other than Allah (37:86).

tβρ ßŠ š�Ï9≡ sŒ Besides that (21:82).

tβρ ßŠ É># x‹yè ø9$# Î�y9ø.F{ $# The lower punishment before the greater punishment (32:21).

عند .8 (Near, With, At) (98 Times in Al-Quran)


y‰ΨÏã óΟÎγ În/u‘ With their Lord (2:62).

y‰ΨÏã Ïµ În/u‘ With His Lord (2:112).

y‰ΖÏã Ï‰Éf ó¡ pRùQ $# ÏΘ# t� ptø: $# Near the Majidil Haram (2:191).

y‰Ζ Ïã $oΨÏè≈ tG tΒ With our things (12:17).

y‰Ζ Ïã Ç≈uΗ ÷q§�9 $# # Y‰ôγ tã Contract with (Allah) Most Gracious (19:78).

الشمس جاء عند طلوع He came at sun rise.

Note: عند is often used to denote the meaning of “for” near, presence, etc. For example:

’ÎΤö� à2 øŒ$# y‰ΨÏã š� În/ u‘ Remember me in presence of your Lord (12:42).

$tΒ óΟ ä. y‰ΨÏã ß‰x�Ζ tƒ ( $tΒuρ y‰Ζ Ïã «! $# 5−$t/ Whatever you possess will vanish and what Allah has, will endure (16:96).

بـعد .9 (After) - 55 Times in Al-Quran

y‰ ÷èt/ $pκ ÌE öθ tΒ After its death (2:164).

y‰÷è t/ öΝÍκ È]≈ yϑƒ Î) After their belief (3:86).

y‰÷èt/ È≅ß™”�9$# After the Messengers (4:165).

y‰÷è t/ öΝÎγÏΒ$tã #x‹≈yδ After this year of theirs (9:28).

273

y‰ ÷èt/ ¥Ïm After a time (38:88).

حول .10 (Around) - 1 Time in Al-Quran

For example:

tΑöθym tΛ©yγy_ $ wŠ ÏW Å_ Around Hell upon their knees (19:68).

بين .11 (Between and Among) - 70 Times in Al-Quran


t ÷t/ Ï!$ uŠ ÏΨøîF{ $# Between the rich people (59:7).

t ÷ t/ Ïö� yϑ ø9$# Ïµ Å_ ÷ρy—uρ Between the man and his wife (2:102).

t ÷t/ 7‰ tnr& óΟ ßγ ÷ΨÏiΒ Between any of them (2:136).

t ÷t/ Ï!$ yϑ¡¡9$# ÇÚ ö‘F{ $#uρ Between the sky and the earth (2:164).

t ÷ t/ öΝä3 Î/θè= è% Among your hearts (3:103).

ذو .12 (Possessor) - 26 Times in Al-Quran


÷,Ï�Ψã‹ Ï9 ρ èŒ 7π yèy™ ÏiΒ ÏµÏF yèy™ Let the man of means spend according to his means (65:7).

ª!$# uρ ρ èŒ È≅ôÒ x� ø9$# ÉΟŠÏà yèø9$# And Allah is the Lord of the highest bounty/ Grace abounding (62:4).

ρ èŒ È≅≈ n=pg ø:$# ÏΘ#t� ø. M} $#uρ Full of Majesty, Bounty and Honour (55:27).

ρ èŒ Ä¸ ö�yèø9 $# (He is) the Lord of the Throne of authority (40:15).

ãβöθ tãö� Ïùuρ ρ èŒ ÏŠ$s?÷ρ F{ $# And pharaoh, the lord of stakes (38:12).

اولوا .13 (Possessor) - 2 Times in Al-Quran

For example:

(#θ ä9'ρ é&uρ ÏΘ% tnö‘ F{$# And those of (blood) relationship (8:75 and 33:6).

صاحب .14 (Companion)

For example:

.Our teacher is a man of learning استاذV صاحب علم

نة صاحبة عل م أختى سكيـ My sister Sukiana is companion of knowledge.

274

مديـرV الأستاذ/ الدكتـور شكرى صالح الأخلاق والحكمة صاحب العلم و

Our Director Prof. Dr. Sukri Salah is the man of

learning ethics/ character and wisdom.

.I am the man of wealth أV صاحب المال

.She is the lady of wisdom هى صاحبة الحكمة

مع .15 (With) (58 Times in Al-Quran)

Some examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakim:

Ÿξsù (#θ ããô‰s? yìtΒ «! $# # Y‰tnr& So, invoke not anyone along with Allah (72:18).

āω ö≅yèøg rB yìtΒ «! $# $�γ≈ s9Î) t� yz#u Take not with Allah another object of worship (17:22).

Ÿωuρ ä3s? yìΒ tÍ� Ï�≈s3 ø9$# And be not with the unbelievers (11:42).

(# þθßϑ n= ÷æ$#uρ ¨βr& ©!$# yìtΒ š É) −Gßϑ ø9$# And know that Allah is with those who fear Him (9:123).

$uΖ−/u‘ Ÿω $uΖù= yèøg rB yìtΒ ÏΘöθs)ø9 $# t ÏΗ Í>≈©à9 $# Our Lord! Send us not to the company of the wrong-doers. (7:47)

أى .16 (What, Who, Whom, Which) - 6 Times in Al-Quran

ö≅è% ‘“r& > ó x« ç�t9ø. r& Zοy‰≈pκ y− ( Say: “what thing is the most weighty in evidence?” (6:19).

‘“r& È ÷t/ ÷“ Ïtø: $# 4 |Âôm r& Which of the two parties was the best at calculating? (18:12)

‘“r& È ÷ s)ƒ Ì�x� ø9 $# ×�ö� yz $YΒ$s) ¨Β Who of the two parties (yours or ours) is the best in point of position? (19:73)

£“r& 5= n=s)ΖãΒ tβθç7 Î= s)Ζtƒ To that (kind of) return they will be returned (26:227).

ô ÏΒ Äd“r& > ó x« …çµ s)n=yz From what stuff He created him? (80:18).

þ’Îû Äd“ r& ;οu‘θß¹ $Β u!$x© š� t7©.u‘ In whatever form He wills, He puts you together (82:8).

Note: All of the above 13 words are not prepositions, but when they exist before a noun or a

pronoun then it becomes a genitive case ( جرية حالة ) because the last letter of the noun is

ر و ر مج or ر و س ك م .

The first word is called مضاف and the noun or pronoun is called اليه مضاف . The

combination of مضاف and اليه مضاف is called اضافى مركب (Relative Phrase).

275

��فعل � îل

تة الس

ة مشبه

ال

روف

الح

The Six Particles Similar to a Verb

(6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)

ليت

wish, certainly,

hypothetical or

optative

لعل

It is hoped

that, it may

be that

لكن

But

كأن

It looks as if

أن

That

إن

Indeed, surely,

certainly, no doubt,

truly, verily

These six particles are called اÑان ) ان و أخوا and his sisters).

Commonly used before the nominal sentence ( ية الجملة الإسم ), e.g., حاضر الطالب ان

276

Introduction to 3rd part of Unit No.09 This part of unit is about the following six particles similar to a verb ( تة الحروف المشبـهة الس:([لفعل

ان، أن، كأن، لكن، لعل، ليت

Objectives of 3rd part of Unit No.09 With the help and the Taufiq of Allah ( سبحانه و تعالی), one after studying this 3rd part of

unit No.09 which is about اÑان و اخوا ( ان and its sisters), then one will be able to

understand the following:

1. meaning of the six particles similar to a verb.

2. functions and effects of these particles in an Arabic sentence (after their usage).

3. to know about their usage in the Quranic verses and in sentences of daily usage.

277

��تة @لفعل �� الحروف المشبـهة السThe Six Particles Similar to a Verb

، لعل، ليت ان ) ان و أخواÑا These are called .ان، ان، كأن، لكن and its set) and commonly

used before the nominal sentence ( ية الجملة الإسم ) which is a combination of تدأ المبـ and الخبرe.g., موجود الطالب .

In this complete sentence the first word “ الطالب” is تدأ مرفـوع مبـ and the second is مرفـوع خبر .

In Arabic language, the sentence which consists of تدأ is called خبر and مبـ ية جملة خبرية اسم .

The تدا مرفـوع مبـ after ان and its set ( أخواÑا و ان ) is منصوب (mansub), (i.e. in the accusative

case الحالة النصبية), and is called اÑاسم إن و أخوا, and is not called تدأ مرفـوع خبر while ,مبـ iscalled ا خبرÑإن و أخوا (khabaru- inna and its sister) not called خبر for تدأ تداء ) مبـ .(الخبر لمبـ

ية فـتـنص ملاحظة: تدأ حروف مشبـهة [لفعل تدخل على الجملة الإسم الخبر و رفع ها و ت ـو يسمى اسم ب المبـها، مثلا: ان زيدا شجاع.يسمى خبر

Use of ان and Its Sisters in Sentences

ان .1 – (certainly, indeed, surely, no doubt, truly, verily). This letter is used 607 times in Al-

Quran, for example:

¨βÎ) ©!$# ìì‹ Ïÿ xœ ×ΛÎ=tæ Indeed, Allah hears and knows (all things) (2:181).

¨β Î) u�óÇ nΣ «!$# Ò=ƒÌ� s% Verily, the help of Allah is (always) near (2:214).

¨βÎ) ©!$# 4’ n? tã Èe≅ä. & ó x« Ö�ƒÏ‰ s% Surely, Allah has power over all things (3:165).

(# þθä9$s% ¨βÎ) ©!$# ×�� É)sù ßøt wΥuρ â !$u‹ÏΖ øîr& They said: “Truly, Allah is poor and we are rich”. (3:181)

¨βÎ) ©!$# yìtΒ šÎ� É9≈ ¢Á9$# Indeed, Allah is with the patient (8:46).

ان الطالب موجود. Indeed, the students are present.

ان البـيت نظيف. Verily, the house is clean.

Note: Do read the following rules with understanding the changes in the above seven sentences.

The following rules of ان are equally applicable to its set ( أخواÑا و ان ).

i. If the تدأ ) they ,ان after using ,(two dhammahs) تـنوين has مبـ تان ضم – 2 dhammahs) change

into 2) فـتحتان fathahs ـ), for example.

278

بشير جيد.Bashir is good.

ان بشيرا جيد.Indeed Bashir is good.

ممتاز. کريما Kareem is good.

ممتاز. کريما ان Indeed Kareem is good.

ii. If the تدأ ة واحدة has مبـ ضم (one dhammah), it changes فـتحة واحدة (one fathah after using

.for example ,(ان

السيارة جديدة.The car is new.

ان السيارة جديدة.Indeed the car is new.

طالبة.عزيـزة Aziza is a student.

ان عزيـزة طالبة.Indeed Aziza is a student.

iii. If the تدأ منـفصلة ضمائر is from مبـ (detached pronouns), it changes to its corresponding

تصل ضمير م form which is an attached pronoun (mansub) منصوب after using ان and its set,

for example:

هو طالب.He is a student.

.انه طالب Indeed he is a student.

هما طالبان.Both of them are students.

ما طالبان .أ« Indeed, both of them are students.

هم طلاب.All of them are students.

م طلاب. أ«Indeed all of them are students.

أV طالب.I am a student.

اننى طالب.Indeed I am a student.

279

Conjugation

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

م هم= ا« All of them= Indeed

all of them

ما هما= ا«Both of them=

Indeed both of them

هو= إنه He= Indeed he


ن هن= ا«All of them= Indeed

all of them

ما هما= ا«Both of them=

Indeed both of them

ا هى= ا«She= Indeed she


انـتم= انكم All of you= Indeed

all of you

انـتما= انكماBoth of you= Indeed

both of you

أنت= انك You= Indeed you


انكن أنتن= All of you= Indeed

all of you

انـتما= انكماBoth of you= Indeed

both of you

أنت= انك You= Indeed you


نحن= انـناWe= Indeed we

نحن= انـناWe= Indeed we

أV= اننى I= Indeed I


This letter is used 98 times in Al-Quran. It comes before a noun or a pronoun - (That) أن .2

in the middle of the sentence and makes it accusative ( منصوب), for example:

Ÿωuρ r& tβθßϑ n= ôètƒ ¨βr& ©!$# ãΝ n= ÷ètƒ Do they not know that Allah knows. (2:77)

öΝ s9r& öΝn= ÷ès? ¨βr& ©! $# 4’n? tã Èe≅ä. &óx« í�ƒ Ï‰ s% Do you not know that Allah has power over all things? (2:106)

(# þθßϑ n=÷æ$$ sù… ¨β r& ©!$# î“ƒ Í•tã íΟŠÅ6ym …Then know that Allah is Exalted in power,most Wise. (2:209)

(# ÿρ ß‰Îγx© uρ ¨βr& tΑθ ß™ §�9$# A, ym And (after) they bare witness that the Messenger was true. (3:86)

(#þθ ßϑ n=ôã$# āχ r& ©! $# ß‰ƒ Ï‰ x© É>$s) Ïèø9$#¨βr& uρ ©! $# Ö‘θà� xî ÒΟ‹Ïm §‘

You know that Allah is strict in punishment and

that Allah is the Most-Forgiving, Most

Merciful. (5:98)

دا رسول الله شهدت ïن محم I testify that Muhammad (s.a.w) is the messenger of Allah.

Note: أن is also attached to pronouns like إن, e.g., أنه (that he), ا م ,(that she) أ« .etc ,(that they) أ«

كأن .3 - means “it looks as if” (one time in Al-Quran Al-Hakim). It affects nominal sentence

like ان because it’s from its set, for example.

280

¨β r(x. þ’ Îû Ïµø‹ tΡèŒé& # \� ø% uρ As if there was deafness in both his ears (31:7).

كأن الطالب مريض. It looks as if the student were sick.

كأنك من كشمير. You seem to be from Kashmir.

:6 times in Al-Quran, for example - (but) لكن .4

بشير مجتهد و لكن رشيدا كسلان. Bashir is hardworking but Rashid is lazy.

جرة صغيرة. البـيت كبير و لكن الح The house is big but the room is small.

الماء [رد و لكن الحليب دافىء. The water is cold but the milk is hot.

Note: لكن is one of the set of ان, and it acts like ان in the sentence.

As we saw in the first three examples above, the لكن used without the شد /تشديد (shaddah

:it loses two of its characteristics ,(شد without لكن ,.i.e) In this case .(lakin) لكن ,.i.e ,(ـ

i. It does not sender following it منصوب (mansub), see example not 1,2 and 3.

ii. It may also be used in verbal sentences, e.g., ولكن لا يشعرون (But they do not

perceive/realize it) (2:12).

Both لكن and لكن are used to specify or amend the previous statement.

لعل .5 – It is hoped that, it may be that (3 times in Al-Quran), for example:

¨≅yè s9 sπ tã$¡¡9$# ãβθ ä3s? $�6ƒÌ� s% Perhaps the hour is near (33:63).

¨≅yès9 sπtã$¡¡9$# Ò=ƒ Ì�s% That perhaps the Hour is close at hand (42:17).

¨≅yè s9 ©!$# ß Ï‰øt ä† y‰÷è t/ y7Ï9≡ sŒ # \� øΒr& Maybe Allah will bring about afterward some new situations (65:1).

يل. الجو جميل. لعل الجو جم

The weather is fine.

I hope the weather is fine/the weather may be fine.

الرجل مريض لعل الرجل مريض.

The man is sick.

I am afraid the man is sick.

Use of لعل with Attached Pronouns

y7‾= yè s9 4 yÌö� s? That you may have (spiritual) joy (20:130).

y7 ‾=yè s9 ÓìÏ‚≈ t/ y7|¡ ø� ‾Ρ It may be you ferment your self (26:3).

öΝ ä3 ‾=yè©9 šχρ ß‰tG ôγs? That you may find guidance (43:10).

281

÷/ä3 ª=yè s9 tβθà)−G s? That you may have the chance to learn righteousness (7:171).

ت لي .6 – (whish), it means “certainly”. It also means hypothetical or optative, for example.

Í_tF ø‹ n=≈tƒ àMΖä. $R/≡ t� è? O, would that! I was mere dust (78:40).

4 tLn=÷ƒuθ≈tƒ Í_tFø‹ s9 óΟ s9 õ‹Ïƒ ªB r& O, woe to me! I wish had not taken (25:28).

It is used in the beginning of a sentence, and is used in the same sense in the middle of

the sentence. It also means “that”.

مشبـهة @لفعل لأ¨ا: روف هذه الح بة من ثلاثه أحرف فصاعدا. .1 مرك الآخر كالفعل الماضى.مفتـوحة .2 تـتضمن معنى الفعل و تـلزم الأسمأء. .3 تدخل عليـها نـون الوقاية: إننى. .4

Question: Why ان and its set are similar to a verb?

Answer:

1. They look like verbs and end with the perfective verb (past verb) declension-a.

2. They all carry meanings of verb.

3. They affect the subject of the nominal sentence by changing its case to the accusative

.which is what verbs do with their objects (منصوب )

4. They can be attached to object pronouns like verbs.

282

ستفهام �� ادوات الا The Interrogative

Words Used for Posing Questions

(8) (7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)

ماذلك/ أي تلك

ماهذا/ هذه

أين لما لماذا متى ما

What?, who?,

whom?

What is that?

What is that?

What?, which?

When? Why? Why?, what?

Where?

(16) (15) (14) (13) (12) (11) (10) (9)

أية كيف هل أ كم ماذا من أنى From

where?, How?, when?

Who? , whose?

What? How many?, how much?

Is? Is? How? Who?, which?, what?

283

Introduction to 4th part of Unit No.09 In this part of Unit No 09 one will study about the following interrogative words

( ستـفهام التالية أدوات/ ألفاظ الإ ) and their examples of usage, action and effects in the Arabic

sentences:

(?Why?, what) لما .2 (?where) أين .1

ی مت .4 (?why) لماذأ .3 (when?)

هذه /ما هذا .6 (?What?, which) ما .5 (what is this?)

لك/ تلك ما ذ .7 (what is that?) 8. أى (what?, who?, whom?)

(?How) كيف .10 (?Who?, which?, what) اية .9

(is with singular and with plural) أ .12 (?is) هل .11

(?what) ماذا .14 (?How many?, How much) كم .13

(?from where?, how?, when) أنى .16 (?who?, whose) من .15

Objectives of 4th part of Unit No.09

With the help and Taufiq of Allah ( سبحانه و تعالی), studying this 4th part of unit no.09,

with full attention, one will then be able to get the awareness and knowledge of the

following:

1. meaning of the sixteen Interrogative words of this unit.

2. function and effect of these words in the Arabic sentences.

3. examples of these words from Al-Quran Al-Hakim and from sentences of daily usage.

284

ستفهام �� ادوات الإThe Interrogative

أين .1 (Where) - This word is used 14 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, for example.

t ø r& $tΒ (#θ çΡθä3 s? Wherever you may be. (2:148)

t ø r& $tΒ (#þθ à� É)èO Wherever they may be found. (3:112)

t ø r& ãΝä.äτ !%x. u�à° Where are your partner? (6:22)

t ør& $tΒ óΟ çFΖä. tβρ ß‰ç7 ÷è s? Where are the (gods) you worshipped? (26:92)

t ør& ”�x� pRùQ $# Where is the refuge? (75:10)

لما .2 (Why, What) - This word is used 74 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, for example:

×−Ïd‰ |Á ãΒ $yϑÏj9 öΝ ßγ yètΒ Confirming what is with them (2:89).

¨β Î) y7−/u‘ ×Α$è sù $yϑ Ïj9 ß‰ƒ Ì� ãƒ Indeed your Rabb is a Doer/Accomplice of what He wills (11:107).

|N$pκö�yδ |N$ pκö� yδ $ yϑÏ9 tβρ ß‰ tãθè? How far, how far is that which you are promised? (23:36)

لماذا .3 (Why): Some examples from sentences of daily usage:

?Why are you here لماذا أنت هنا؟

?Why did you not eat لماذا ما اكلت؟

?Why did you kill this man لماذا قتلت هذا الرجل؟

?Why did you open the door لماذا فـتحت الباب؟

اللبن؟ رب لماذا لاتش Why are you not drinking the milk?

متى .4 (When) - This word is used 9 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, for example:

šχθä9θà) tƒuρ 4 tLtΒ # x‹≈ yδ ß‰ ôãuθ ø9$# They say: “When will this promise (come to pass)? ” (34:29)

šχθä9θà) tƒuρ 4 tLtΒ uθ èδ And say, “When will that be?” (17:51)

4 tL tΒ ç� óÇ nΣ «!$# When (will come) the help of Allah? (2:214)

البـيت تذهب إلى متى When will you go to the house?

تـعوذ متى When will you return back?

285

.This word is used 1011 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, e.g - (What, Which) ما .5

!$tΒ t� tΒ r& ª!$# Ïµ Î/ What Allah has ordered to be joined (2:27).

ãΝ n=ôãr& $ tΒ Ÿω tβθßϑ n= ÷ès? I know what you know not. (2:30)

#sŒÎ) u�ÏY÷èç/ $ tΒ ’Îû Í‘θç7 à)ø9 $# When the contents of the graves are scattered (100:9).

tΑ$s% uρ ß≈ |¡ΡM}$# $ tΒ له And man cries, “what is the matter with it”? (99:3)

$tΒ ä' s#ø‹ s9 Í‘ô‰s) ø9 $# What is the night of power? (97:2)

؟ هذه /ماهذا .6 (What is this?) - Use of ؟ماهذا in daily usage sentences:

Question Answer

ماهذا؟What is this?

هذا كتاب.This is a book.


هذا [ب.This is a door.


هذا قـلم.This is a pen.


هذا رجل.This is a man.


هذا بـيت.This is a house.

ماهذه؟What is this?

طالبة.هذه This is a student (f).


هذه Vفذة.This is a window.


هذه سيارة This is a car.


هذه جامعة This is a university.


هذه كراسة This is a notebook.

286

ماتلك /ماذلك .7 (What is that?) - Use of both in sentences of daily usage:

Question Answer

؟ماذلك

What is that?

ذلك دكان.That is a shop.

؟ماذلك

What is that?

ذلك مسجد.That is a mosque.

؟ماذلك

What is that?

ذلك كرسى.That is a chair.

؟ماتلك

What is that?

تلك ملعقة.That is a spoon.

؟ماتلك

What is that?

بة. تلك حقيـThat is a bag.

؟ماتلك

What is that?

تلك امرأة That is a woman.

:This word is used 6 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, for example - (What, Who, Whom) اي .8

See word No. 14 from the list of words other than prepositions. Use of أى with attached

pronoun هم (5 times in Al-Quran), for example:

óΟßγ•ƒ r& ã≅à� õ3 tƒ zΝ tƒ ö� tΒ Which of them should take charge of Maryam? (3:44)

öΝ åκš‰r& Ü>t� ø% r& Even those who are nearest? (17:57)

óΟèδ uθ è=ö7oΨ Ï9 öΝ åκš‰ r& ß |¡ôm r& Wξyϑtã We may test them, as to which of them are best in conduct ?(18:7)

Ο ßγ•ƒr& y7 Ï9≡ x‹ Î/ îΛÏãy— Which of them will stand surety for that? (68:40)

أية .9 (Who, Which, What, That, What kind of) - Some examples from sentences of daily

usage:

?Which student is this أية طالبة هذه

?Which car is cheap أية سيارة رخيصة

?Which Quranic verses are related to the Islamic beliefs أية آ\ت قـرآنية تـتـعلق [لعقائد الإسلامية

?Towards which city are you going إلى اية المديـنة ذاهب أنت

?Which books are related to the sciences of Hadith أية كتب متـعلقة بعلوم الحديث

287

كيف .10 (How) - This word is used 62 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, for example:

tβθ çΗ s>÷ètG |¡ sù y#ø‹ x. Ì�ƒ É‹tΡ You shall know how terrible was my warning? (67:17)

y#ø‹ x. tβθãΚ ä3 øtrB How (foolishly) you judge! (68:36)

y#ø‹ x. u‘£‰s% How he plotted? (74:19)

y#ø‹ Ÿ2 ôM s)Î= äz How they (camels) are made? (88:17)

y#ø‹ Ÿ2 ôM yèÏùâ‘ How it (sky) is raised high? (88:18)

óΟs9 r& t� s? y#ø‹ x. Ÿ≅yèsù y7 •/u‘ É=≈pt õ¾r'Î/ È≅‹ Ï�ø9$# Have you (O Muhammad (SAW) not seen how your Lord dealt with the owners of the elephant? (105:1)

Conjugation

ع جم PLURAL


د اح و SINGULAR

غ ي ص (Forms)

كيف حالهم How are they?

حالهماكيف How are they?

كيف حاله How is he?


كيف حالهن How are they?

كيف حالهماHow are they?

كيف حالهاHow is she?


كيف حالكم How are you?

حالكماكيف How are you?

كيف حالك How are you?


كيف حالكن How are you?

كيف حالكماHow are you?

كيف حالك How are you?


كيف حالناHow are we?

حالناكيف How are we?

كيف حالى How am I?


هل .11 (Is) - This word is used 67 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, for example:

ö≅yδ y79 s?r& ß]ƒ Ï‰ym # y›θãΒ Has the story of Moses reached you? (79:15)

ö≅yδ tβρ ã� ÝàΖ tƒ Are they waiting? (6:158).

ö≅yδ ΛäΡr& tβθ ãèÏϑ tGøg’Χ Are you (now) assembled? (26:39)

ö≅yδ 4’n<Î) 7jŠ t� tΒ ÏiΒ 9≅Š Î6 y™ Is there any way (to effect) a return? (42:44)

ö≅yδ ÏΒ 7‰ƒÌ“ ¨Β Are there any more (to come)? (50:30)

ö≅yδ â!# t“y_ Ç≈ |¡ôm M}$# āωÎ) ß≈|¡ ômM}$# Is there any reward for goodness other than goodness? (55:60)

288

:Some examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakim - [Is (with singular), Are (with plural)] أ .12

(#þθ ä9$s% uρ $uΖçF yγÏ9≡ r&u î�ö� yz ôΘr& uθèδ And they say, “Are our gods better, or he”? (43:58)

@‘Ïϑ ygõƒ −# u @’Î1t� tã uρ What: (a book) not in Arabic? And (a Messenger) an Arab? (41:44).

Ò>$t/ö‘r&u šχθ è% Ìh�x� tG •Β î�ö� yz ÏΘr& ª!$# Are many lords differing among themselves better or Allah (12:39).

(# þθä9$s% |MΡr& u |Mù= yèsù # x‹≈ yδ $uΖÏG oλ Î;$t↔ Î/ They said, “Have you done this to our gods”. (21:62)

óΟ çFΡr& u ÿ…çµtΡθ à)è= øƒrB Is it you who create it? (56:59)

÷Λ äΡr& u ‘‰ x©r& …$)ù= yz Are you the more difficult to create…? (79:27)

كم .13 (How many, How much) - This word is used 12 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, e.g.

öΝ s9r& (#÷ρ t� tƒ öΝ x. $uΖ õ3n= ÷δ r& ÏΒ ….ΟÎγÎ= ö7 s% See they not how many of those before them We did destroy? (6:6)

]öΝx. óΟçFø قال Î6 s9 ’Îû ÇÚ ö‘F{ $# yŠy‰ tã tÏΖ Å™ He said: “How many years did you stay on earth?” (23:112)

ö/ x. ….$uΖõ3 n=÷δ r& How many did We destroy? (38:3)

óΟx. (#θ ä.t� s? ÏΒ ;M≈ ¨Ζy_ 5βθ ãŠããuρ How many were the gardens and springs they left behind? (44:25)

؟عمرك كم What is your age?

Note: The noun that follows كم is singular ( واحد), and is an accusative case

( نصبية حالة ), for example:

?How many brothers do you have كم أخالك؟

?How many rupees do you have كم روبية عندك؟

?What is your age/How old are you كم/ سنة عمرك؟

Note: Sometimes كم is used as خبرية (informative). Then, it has the meaning of many, how

much. And the noun (singular or plural) comes after it, is in a genitive case ( جرية حالة ),

for example:

?How many men are here كم رجل هنا؟

?How many men are there كم رجال هناك؟

?How many students are in the class-room كم طالب فى الفصل؟

لة؟ How many from small company? (2:249) كم من فئة قليـ

289

ماذا .14 (What) - This word is used 22 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, for example:

!#sŒ$tΒ yŠ# u‘r& ª! $# # x‹≈ yγÎ/ WξsV tΒ ؟ What means Allah by this similitude? (2:26)

š�tΡθ è=t↔ ó¡ o„ #sŒ$tΒ tβθà) Ï�Ζãƒ ؟ They ask you what they should spend (in chantey)? (2:215)

# sŒ$Β šχρ ß‰É)ø� s? ؟ What is it that you missed? (12:17)

!#sŒ$Β tΑt“Ρr& ö/ ä3š/ u‘ ؟ What is it that your Lord has revealed? (16:24)

# sŒ$tΒ tβθãè Å_ö� tƒ ؟ What answer do they return? (27:28)

Use of “ماذا” in Sentences of Daily Usage:

ماذا تـعبدون؟ What do you worship?

ماذا تريد الآن؟ What do you want now?

ماذا تـفعل هنا؟ What are you doing here?

?What are you writing ماذا تكتب؟

?What are you cooking ماذا تطبخ؟

?What are you breaking ماذا تكسر؟

من .15 (Who, Whose) - Some Examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakim:

ô tΒ ß#yèôÊr& #Z� ÅÀ$tΡ Who it is that is the weakest in (his) helper. (72:24)

Ÿ≅Š Ï%uρ 2ôtΒ 5−# u‘ And there will be a cry, “Who is a magician (to restore him)?” (75:27)

ã≅ Åzô‰ ãƒ tΒ â !$t± o„ ’Îû Ïµ ÏF uΗ ÷qu‘ He will admit to His Mercy whom He will. (76:31)

$Β r& Ç tΒ 4o_øó tFó™ $# As to one who regards himself as self-sufficient. (80:5)

$Β r'sù ôtΒ š†ÎAρé& …çµ t7≈tGÏ. Ïµ ÏΨŠ Ïϑ u‹Î/ Then, he who is given his Record in his right hand. (84:7)

ô‰ s% yx n=øùr& tΒ 4’ ª1t“s? But those will prosper who purify themselves. (87:14)

Use of “ من” in Sentences of Daily Usage:

من هذا؟ Who is this?

من ذلك؟ Who is that?

ابـوك؟من Who is your father?

لمن هذا الكتاب؟ Whose book is this?

290

لمن الملك اليوم؟ Whose kingdom is today?

أنى .16 (From where, How, When) - This word is used 15 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakim, e.g.

ãΛ uqö� yϑ≈ tƒ 4’ ‾Τ r& Å7 s9 # x‹≈ yδ O Mary! Whence (comes) this to you? (3:37)

tΑ$s% Éb>u‘ 4’ ‾Τr& ãβθä3 tƒ ’ Í< ÖΝ≈ n=äî He said: O my Lord! How shall I have a son? (3:40)

ö� ÝàΡ$# 4†‾Τ r& šχθä3 sù÷σãƒ See in what ways they are deluded away from the truth (5:75).

4’‾Τ r& tβθ èùu�óÇ ç„ How are the turned away (from Reality)? (40:69)

4’‾Τ r& ãΝ ßγs9 3“ t�ø.Ïe%!$# How will there be for them a reminder at that time? (44:13)

291

QUESTIONS

ةسئل


سئل

جب e الا :ا

زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم ها مع ذكر الأمثلة ؟ اكتـب ـ ة ي س م والش القمرية الحروف هى ام ۔1 ؟ هاعدد وكم ؟ ة الجار ف رو الح هى ما ۔2 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم ب " الجر حرف ستعمال ا هافي ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔3 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المتصلة الضمائر " مع الجر "ب حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔4 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم هافي ـ "ب " الجر حرف م د خ ت اس و المفيدة الجمل اكتب ۔5زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم ك " و "حرف الجر "ت م اد خ ست ا هافي ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔6 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و " ك " الجر حرف م اخد ست ا هافي ـ التي المفيدة الجمل جعل ا ۔7 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المتصلة الضمائر مع الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔8 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و " ل " الجر حرف ستخدام ا هافي ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔9

ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المتصلة الضمائر مع الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔ 10 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و " في الجمل المفيدة الجر "ل حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔11 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المفيدة الجمل في " و " الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔12 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و " حرف الجر "و ستخدام ا هافي ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔ 13 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و " ن م " الجر حرف ستخدام ا هافي ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔14 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المتصلة الضمائر مع " ن م " الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔15 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم " في " الجر حرف هافي ـ م د خ ت س ت التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔ 16 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المتصلة الضمائر مع " فى " الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔17 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المفيدة الجمل في " فى " الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔ 18

292

إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم " ن ها حرف الجر "ع في ـ م د خ ت س ت التي هافي ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔ 19ـ زية لي نج الإ

ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المفيدة الجمل في " ن ع " الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔20ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المتصلة الضمائر مع " ن ع " الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔ 21 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم " ن ع " الجر حرف هافي ـ م د خ ت س ت التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔22ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المتصلة الضمائر مع " ىل ع " الجر حرف ل م ع ت ـس ا ۔23ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المفيدة الجمل في " ىل ع " الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔ 24ـ زية لي نج الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها و " تى ح " الجر حرف فيها م د خ ت س ي التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔25 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المفيدة الجمل في " تى ح " الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔26 زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم ها حرف الجر "إلى في ـ م د خ ت س ي التي القرآنية \ت الآ اكتب ۔27 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المفيدة الجمل في " لى إ " الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔ 28 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المتصلة الضمائر " مع لى "إ الجر حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔29 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و هااكتـب ـ ؟الجارة الحروف غير العربية الحروف هى ام ۔ 30 إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم ى د ، ل ، لدن ى د ها حرف الجر "ل في ـ م د خ ت س ي التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔31

ـ زية لي نج الإ ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المتصلة الضمائر مع " ى د ل " لفظ م د خ ت س ا ۔ 32 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم آء ر "و لفظ م د خ ت س ي هافي ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔ 33 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المفيدة الجمل في " ام م ا " لفظ م د خ ت س ا ۔ 34ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المفيدة مل الج فى " ل ب ق ـ" م د خ ت س ا ۔35 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و " ت "تح :لفظ يستعمل التي ة القرآني الآ\ت اكتب ۔36 ، اأولو ، ذو ، بين ، حول ، بـعد ، عند ، ن دو ، ق و ف ـ" لفظ هافي ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔ 37

ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها ثم " ى ا و ،مع

293

تة المشبـهة ف الحرو هى ام ۔38 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و اكتبها ؟ [لفعل الس؟ الجملة فى هال عم وما [لفعل المشبـهة حروف تدخل جملة ة ي ا ىل ع ۔ 39ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و " ن "ا :دأ بحرف تـب التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔ 40 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و المفيدة الجمل في " ان " حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔ 41ـ زية لي نج الإ اللغة إلى تـرجمها و المنـفصلة الضمائر مع " ان " حرف م د خ ت س ا ۔ 42 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و " ن ا " :حرف ستعمال وسطها ا في التي القرآنية ت الآ\ اكتب ۔ 43 إلى اللغة تـرجمها و ، ليت و ، لعل ، كن ل ، أن ك " : حرف هابدايت في التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔ 44

ـ زية لي نج الإ ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و ها الاستفهام ؟ اكتـب ـ هى أدوات ما ۔ 45 كيف ، أى ، ما ، متى ، لماذا ، أين " :مثل الاستفهام أدوات ها في ـ التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔ 46

ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و ـ "نى أ ، ن م ، ماذا ، كم ، أ ، هل ، ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و الاستفهام أدوات هذه ها في ـ م د خ ت س ت التي الجمل اكتب ۔ 47 ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها و والتكلم الكتابة أثـناء م د خ ت س ت التي العربية الألفاظ اكتب ۔48ا،أ ها لفظ "في ـ التي القرآنية ت الآ\ اكتب ۔ 49 ا ، بل إ نم ، بـلى ، لولا ، لآ أ ، ا ، ثم ، أم لا ، ك نم

ـ زية لي نج الإ إلى اللغة تـرجمها " ثم ،نـعم،و ل ا ، ن ، ههنا ، ه مال ، حيث ، م ع ن " : هذه الألفاظ استخدام فيها التي القرآنية الآ\ت اكتب ۔ 50

ن ليزيةإلى اللغة الإنج تلك الآ\ت م رج ت ا" ثم بم ، ر ، أن ، كى ن ، إذا ، أ أ\ الكتاب هذا) 9-1(ات د ح الو فى جد تـو التى القرآنية الآ\ت هرس ف ـ ل ع ج إ ۔ 51

title page 1952

Documents